JP6490954B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention executes variable display of identification information based on the fact that a start condition that allows variable display of identification information to start after a game medium enters a start area provided in the game area is displayed. The present invention relates to a gaming machine that is in a specific gaming state advantageous for a player when a result is derived and a specific display result predetermined as the display result is derived.

  Conventionally, the variable display of the identification information (for example, a decoration) is performed based on the fact that a start condition for allowing the variable display of the identification information to start after the game medium enters the start area provided in the game area is satisfied. A specific game state that is advantageous to the player when a display result is derived by performing a variable display of the symbol, and a specific display result (for example, a combination of “hit” combinations) is derived as the display result. A gaming machine that becomes (for example, a big hit gaming state) is known.

  As such a gaming machine, for example, in Patent Document 1, a specific display (held display in Patent Document 1) displayed when variable display of identification information is held is changed from a normal mode to a special mode (Patent Document 1). Then, a gaming machine is disclosed in which the character image 11 is changed to a display mode) and then changed to another display mode (a special display mode in Patent Document 1).

JP 2004-357878 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, the player pays attention to the special aspect to some extent, but it has been desired to focus attention on the special aspect and improve the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that has improved the fun of gaming.

(1) In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to a player, A plurality of types of winning areas (first starting prize opening, second starting prize opening, and big prize opening) including (first starting prize opening, second starting prize opening), and a hold for storing hold information regarding variable display Storage means (for example, the first special figure reservation storage section and the second special figure reservation storage section) and variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the reservation information (for example, processing of steps S112 and S113 is performed. CPU 103, an effect control CPU 120 that performs the processes of steps S171 and S172, etc.) and a specific display (for example, a hold display symbol) corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. Display means (for example, an image display device 5 that displays a hold display symbol in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb) and a display that controls the display mode of the specific display displayed by the specific display means Aspect control means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that controls the display color of the on-hold display symbol), a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the display aspect of the specific display changes, and game media Signal output means (for example, a portion for executing information output processing in the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100) and setting means for setting the degree of advantage of the gaming machine The display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display displayed by the specific display unit from the current display mode to another display mode. (For example, changing the display color of the reserved display symbol), the display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode (for example, blue) and a special mode (for example, white and gray) different from the normal mode. Etc.) and a special aspect (for example, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.) different from the normal aspect and the special aspect, and the suggestion effect execution means displays the specific display after the effect. A first suggestion effect in which the display mode changes and a second suggestion effect in which the display mode of the specific display does not change after the effect can be executed, and the display mode control means sets the display mode of the specific display in the normal mode. The ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the special mode is higher when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode than when the display mode of the specific display is the normal mode. Thus, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the special mode (for example, in the hold display pattern determination tables of FIGS. 25 to 44, the hold display pattern including a pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode The total value (or average value) of the determination ratios of the hold display pattern including the aspect that changes from gray or white to the display color of the notice mode is higher than the total value (or average value) of the determination ratios. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the rate of change from the current mode to the other mode varies depending on the type of display mode of the specific display ( for example, etc. configuration 1), the ratio of the display mode of the previous SL specific display better when the last to the special embodiment is controlled in the preferred state than when the last to the normal mode is not low.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(2) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) in a start area (for example, a first start prize opening or a second start prize opening) provided in the game area. ) Is entered, and the display result is derived by executing the variable display of the identification information based on the fact that the start condition for allowing the variable display of the identification information (for example, special symbol or decoration symbol) to start is satisfied. When a specific display result (for example, a special symbol that becomes a jackpot symbol or a definite decorative symbol for a jackpot combination) is derived as the display result, a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player) a gaming machine comprising etc.), the starting region (first starting winning opening, a plurality of types of winning region (first starting winning opening comprising a second start winning hole), second start winning hole, and, a special winning Mouth) and front On-hold storage means for storing on-hold information for variable display of identification information in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has entered the start-up area (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit and the second special figure) A variable storage execution unit (for example, steps S112 and S113) that executes variable display of identification information based on the hold information corresponding to variable display of identification information for which the start condition is satisfied A CPU 103, an effect control CPU 120 that performs the processes of steps S171 and S172, and the like, and a hold display area (for example, the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area) corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. 5Hb, etc.) on hold display means (for example, the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold table) for displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display symbol). An image display device 5 that displays a hold display symbol in the area 5Hb) and a current display that displays the specific display in the current display area (for example, the current display area 5Hc) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information being executed. Means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like that displays a hold display symbol in the hold display area 5Hc), and a display mode control unit (for example, a display mode control unit that controls the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit) , An effect control CPU 120 for controlling the display color of the hold display symbol, and the like, and a signal output means for outputting a signal (winning information signal) that can specify the winning area and the number of winnings that the game medium has won (for example, The CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes information output processing), and the display mode control means includes the hold display means and The display mode of the specific display displayed by the display unit this time is changed from the current display mode to another display mode (for example, the display color of the hold display symbol is changed), and the display mode of the specific display includes: A normal mode (for example, blue), a special mode (for example, white and gray) different from the normal mode, and a mode that is different from the normal mode and the special mode, and the ratio of entering the specific gaming state For example, yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors, and the display mode control means displays the specific display displayed by the hold display means and the current display means. The display mode of the specific display is set so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the notice mode is higher when the mode is the special mode than when the mode is the normal mode. (For example, in each all-period hold display pattern determination table, the gray value is more than the total value (or average value) of the determination ratio of the all-period hold display pattern including the pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode.) Or the total value (or the average value) of the determination ratios of the all-period holding display pattern including the aspect that changes from white to the display color of the notice mode is higher), and the display mode control means The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the rate of change from the current mode to the other mode varies depending on the type of display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit. It is characterized in that it is changed (for example, Configuration 1).

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(3) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) in a start area (for example, a first start prize opening or a second start prize opening) provided in the game area. ) Is entered, and the display result is derived by executing the variable display of the identification information based on the fact that the start condition for allowing the variable display of the identification information (for example, special symbol or decoration symbol) to start is satisfied. When a specific display result (for example, a special symbol that becomes a jackpot symbol or a definite decorative symbol for a jackpot combination) is derived as the display result, a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player a gaming machine comprising etc.), the starting region (first starting winning opening, a plurality of types of winning region (first starting winning opening comprising a second start winning hole), second start winning hole, and, a special winning Mouth) and front On-hold storage means for storing on-hold information for variable display of identification information in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has entered the start-up area (for example, the first special figure hold storage unit and the second special figure) A variable storage execution unit (for example, steps S112 and S113) that executes variable display of identification information based on the hold information corresponding to variable display of identification information for which the start condition is satisfied A CPU 103, an effect control CPU 120 that performs the processes of steps S171 and S172, and the like, and a hold display area (for example, the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area) corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means. 5Hb, etc.) on hold display means (for example, the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold table) for displaying a specific display (for example, a hold display symbol). An image display device 5 or the like that displays a hold display symbol in the area 5Hb), and display mode control means that controls the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit (for example, an effect of controlling the display color of the hold display symbol) CPU 120 for control, etc.) and signal output means for outputting a signal (winning information signal) that can specify the winning area where the game medium has won and the number of winning prizes (for example, the CPU 103 of the gaming control microcomputer 100 outputs information). The display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit from the current display mode to another display mode (for example, a hold display pattern). The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode (for example, blue) and a special mode (for example, different from the normal mode). White, gray, etc.) and a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode, and a warning mode (for example, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.) for notifying the proportion of the specific gaming state The display mode control means displays the specific display when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit is the special mode rather than when the display mode is the normal mode. The display mode of the specific display is changed to the notification mode so that the ratio of changing the mode to the notification mode becomes higher (for example, in the reserved display pattern determination tables in FIGS. The holding display pattern including a mode in which the display color of the notice mode is changed from gray or white rather than the total value (or average value) of the determination ratio of the holding display pattern including the pattern that changes to the display color. The total value (or the average value) of the constant ratio is higher), the first special mode (for example, white) is different from the first special mode. A second special mode (for example, gray), and the display mode control unit changes from the current mode to another mode according to the type of display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode (for example, Configuration 2) so that the changing ratio is different.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(4) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention has a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) in a start area (for example, a first start prize opening or a second start prize opening) provided in the game area. ) Is entered, and the display result is derived by executing the variable display of the identification information based on the fact that the start condition for allowing the variable display of the identification information (for example, special symbol or decoration symbol) to start is satisfied. When a specific display result (for example, a special symbol that becomes a jackpot symbol or a definite decorative symbol for a jackpot combination) is derived as the display result, a specific gaming state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player gaming machine comprising etc.) (e.g., a pachinko like game machine 1), the starting region (first starting winning opening, a plurality of types of winning region (first starting winning opening comprising a second start winning hole), the 2 start A holding storage means for storing holding information for variable display of identification information in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the game medium has entered the starting area (for example, a prize opening and a prize winning opening) Variable display execution for executing variable display of identification information based on the hold information corresponding to variable display of identification information for which the start condition is satisfied, and the like. Means (for example, the CPU 103 that performs the processes of steps S112 and S113, the effect control CPU 120 that performs the processes of steps S171 and S172, and the like) and the hold display area (for example, the hold information stored in the hold storage means) A hold display means (for example, a first hold display area 5Ha, a second hold display area 5Hb, etc.) that displays a specific display (for example, a hold display symbol) The display area 5Ha and the second display area 5Hb display an image display apparatus 5 that displays the display information on hold, and the current display area (for example, the current display area 5Hc) corresponding to the variable display of the identification information being executed. Current display means for displaying the specific display on the display (for example, the image display device 5 for displaying the hold display symbol in the hold display area 5Hc), and the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display means and the current display means Display mode control means for controlling the display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 for controlling the display color of the on-hold display symbol), and a signal (winning information signal) that can specify the winning area where the game medium has won and the number of winnings are output. Signal output means (for example, a part that executes information output processing in the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100), and the display mode control The control unit changes the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit from the current display mode to another display mode (for example, changing the display color of the hold display symbol). The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode (for example, blue), a special mode (for example, white and gray) different from the normal mode, and a mode different from the normal mode and the special mode. And a notice mode (for example, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.) for notifying the ratio of entering the specific gaming state, and the display mode control means includes the hold display means and the current display. The ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the notice mode is higher when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the means is the special mode than when the display mode is the normal mode. The display mode of the specific display is changed to the previous notice mode (for example, in each whole period hold display pattern determination table, the total value of the determination ratios of the all period hold display pattern including the pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode) (For example, the total value (or average value) of the determination ratios of all-period holding display patterns including the mode of changing from gray or white to the display color of the notice mode is higher than (or the average value)) The display mode control unit is configured to display the specific display so that a rate of change from the current mode to another mode varies depending on a display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit. The display mode is changed to another display mode (for example, Configuration 2).

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(5) In the gaming machine according to (1) to (4), the special mode includes a first special mode and a second special mode different from the first special mode. The display mode control unit further includes a notification unit (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.) for performing a predetermined notification when the display mode of the specific display is changed to the special mode, and the notification unit includes the display mode control unit. Different notifications may be performed when the display mode of the specific display is the first special mode and when the second special mode is set (for example, Configuration 3).

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5), the special mode includes a first special mode and a second special mode different from the first special mode. The display mode control means, when the display mode of the specific display is the first special mode and when the display mode is the second special mode, the display mode is the second special mode. Only in certain cases, the display mode of the specific display may be changed from the second special mode to another display mode (for example, Configuration 4).

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6), the special mode includes a first special mode and a second special mode different from the first special mode. The display mode control means, when the display mode of the specific display is the first special mode and when the display mode is the second special mode, the display mode is the second special mode. Only in some cases, the display mode of the specific display may be changed from the second special mode to the first specific display mode (for example, Configuration 5).

  According to said structure, the change of a specific display can be diversified and the interest of a game improves.

(8) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (7), the display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display to another display mode at any of a plurality of timings, and The timing for changing the display mode of the specific display when a game medium enters the area may be determined (for example, configuration 6).

  According to said structure, determination of the timing which changes the display mode of specific display can be made easy.

(9) In any one of the above gaming machines (1) to (8), the variable display executing means includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display of identification information to be executed. The aspect control means executes an action effect that changes the display aspect as a result of the effect when changing the display aspect of the specific display to another display aspect during the variable display of the identification information, and the specific display Depending on the variable display pattern of the variable display of the identification information executed when the display mode is changed to another display mode, the effect mode of the effect is varied or the ratio of executing the effect is varied. (For example, Configuration 7 or the like).

According to said structure, the display aspect of a specific display can be changed in a suitable aspect.
(10) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (9), the special mode includes a first special mode and a second special mode different from the first special mode. The display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display to the second specific display mode only when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode (for example, configuration 8). It may be.

The setting means for setting the advantage level of the gaming machine includes an input means for inputting a set value and a storage means for storing the set value input by the input means. The storage means is provided in the main control unit 161F, and is divided by a set value (for example, a step value of 1 to 6 in which the degree of advantage is divided, or the number of game media used in the game is divided by the number of game media acquired in the game) A percentage value indicating a machine discount and a base value indicating the number of acquired game media per predetermined period in a normal state can be stored). The input unit may be a setting switch (for example, a six-stage rotary switch or a dip switch) provided on the main control board 16F, or may be input from the outside (for example, the CU control unit 323F, the security chip 325bF, or the like). It may be an input unit that receives a signal.

The gaming machine changes the advantageous degree of the game based on the set value set in the setting means. Specifically, in the control of paying out a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game media by winning a winning opening (for example, a first starting winning opening, a second starting opening, a large winning opening, a general winning opening, etc.). The predetermined number can be changed (10 is changed to 9). In this case, if the predetermined number is simply changed, the set value will be known if the predetermined number is counted. For example, there are cases where 10 pieces are paid out and nine pieces are paid out, and the ratio is changed. It is possible to make it difficult to determine the set value. Further, the special figure change time may be changed based on the set value. That is, the game efficiency per hour may be changed by shortening the special figure fluctuation time. In this case, the number of tables for determining the special figure variation time may be as many as the set value and selected from them, or the predetermined time may be increased or decreased uniformly. You may make it change the ratio which determines figure fluctuation | variation time. Moreover, you may make it change the game efficiency per time by changing the firing space | interval of a game ball based on a setting value. Further, a movable object that inhibits or promotes the entry of the game medium may be provided on the entrance side of the winning opening, and the movable pattern may be changed based on the set value of the movable object. This movable object may be provided inside the prize winning opening.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram which shows the example of the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine of FIG. It is a figure showing an example of main production control commands. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a figure which shows random number values MR1-4. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure holding | maintenance memory | storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a random value determination process at the time of winning. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a jackpot classification determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the variation category determination table for big hits. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the fluctuation | variation category determination table for loss. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a command analysis process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the relationship between an example of the effect control command received by the effect control board side, and an example of the processing content performed by command analysis processing according to the received effect control command. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the command buffer at the time of a start winning prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a pending | holding display setting process. It is a figure which shows the example of a shape of the hold display symbol according to production mode. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of a hold display symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example, such as a change timing of a hold display symbol. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a holding | maintenance display pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notification buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control pattern setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an effect production execution determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the example of a structure of the corresponding table for determining a reference table based on a fluctuation pattern and the color of the present pending | holding display design. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a reference table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a whole period holding | maintenance display pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect image. It is a front view which shows a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the control circuit used for a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the notification process of the operating / non-operating information from a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in the card unit side and the pachinko machine side, and its transmission / reception. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between a card unit and a pachinko machine. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with the card unit and the pachinko machine at the time of power activation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when a card is inserted in a card unit. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when lending a ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card. It is a figure which shows an example of a process with a card unit and a pachinko machine when paying out a lot of balls and paying out a stored ball. It is a figure which shows an example of the normal process of a card unit and a pachinko machine when counting game balls. It is a figure which shows an example of the count process when a player performs card return operation. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power supply disconnection and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the status information request | requirement from a card unit to a pachinko machine has not reached | attained. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the historical information (machine history information) from the shipment of the game machine which concerns on this embodiment to disposal. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until shipping information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific content of shipping information. It is a figure which shows the detail of the flow until installation information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of installation information input to the machine history management center in FIG. 77. It is a figure which shows the flow until removal information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flow until discard information is registered into the machine history management center which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the content of the discard information input into a machine history management center. It is the schematic for demonstrating the history management of the front frame and game board which concern on this embodiment. It is the schematic of the table which memorize | stores the information of a frame, and the information of a game board, in order to perform machine history management of a front frame and a game board. 10 is a flowchart for explaining abnormality determination processing for management of a front frame and a game board by a machine history management center. It is a figure explaining the table referred with the flowchart shown in FIG. It is the schematic for demonstrating the communication performed between a main control part, the payout control part, and communication control IC. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the payout control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with the main control part. It is a block diagram for demonstrating the structure of the communication control circuit for carrying out encryption communication with communication control IC. It is a flowchart for demonstrating a recovery completion confirmation process. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline of the command and response which are transmitted / received between the main control part and the payout control part. It is a figure which shows the communication sequence between a main control part and a payout control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a process when there exists a power-off and a communication line disconnection, and the command of the game state notification from the main control part to the payout control part has not reached | attained. It is a perspective view which shows the state which opened the front door of the slot machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the various data memorize | stored in each of a card unit and a slot machine, and its transmission / reception aspect.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball (also referred to as a game ball) as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball emitting device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes) and the like. Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B variably displays a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. Thereafter, the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special figure game. The confirmed special symbol may be different from the special symbol displayed during variable display.

  The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. For example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns (a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off as appropriate) may be included as a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED is different. What is necessary is just to be preset as a special symbol. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. On the screen of the image display device 5, in response to the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can be identified are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. And in response to the start of one of the changes in the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game, In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, vertical scroll display) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. Note that the confirmed decorative design may be different from the decorative design displayed during variable display. For example, a decorative pattern other than the scrolled decorative pattern may be a confirmed decorative pattern.

  As described above, on the screen of the image display device 5, the special symbol game (also referred to as the first special symbol game) using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device. Synchronized with a special figure game using the second special figure in 4B (also referred to as a second special figure game), a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each is performed, and a fixed decoration that is a variable display result The symbol is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as “derivation”). In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, a display area 5H is arranged. In the display area 5H, a hold storage display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the special figure game (the special figure hold storage number) in an identifiable manner is performed. The variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game is such that the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable ball apparatus 6B (for example, It is generated based on the start winning by passing. That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is suspended. Done. In this embodiment, the same number of symbols as in the variable display that is being held (in this embodiment, such as a circle mark, a square mark, etc., hereinafter also referred to as a hold display symbol) is displayed as the hold storage display. By doing. One hold display symbol corresponds to one variable display held. As will be described later, the fact that the variable display is held (the hold display symbol is displayed) means that the hold data extracted at the time of starting winning is stored in the first or second special figure hold storage unit. Therefore, the hold display symbol is also displayed in correspondence with the hold data extracted at the time of starting winning and stored in the first or second special figure hold storage unit. The variable display and data held on hold are also called hold storage. The held variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is represented by the hold display symbol displayed in the left area (first reserved display area) toward the display area 5H. The held variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is represented by the hold display design displayed in the area on the right side (second reserved display area) in the display area 5H.

  For example, the start condition of the special figure game (first start condition) using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is established by the occurrence of the first start prize where the game ball enters the first start prize opening. If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not established, the first special figure holding memory number is incremented by one (increment) And the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when a second start prize is entered in which a game ball enters the second start prize opening, a special figure game start condition (second start condition) using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure holding memory number is incremented by one (increment) And the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the hold data (holding memory) is digested, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the second When the execution of the special figure game using the special figure is started, the hold data (hold memory) is digested, and the second special figure hold memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement). When the hold data is digested, the corresponding hold display symbol is deleted. Moreover, when the other hold display symbols are displayed in the display area in which the erased hold display symbols are displayed in the first hold display area and the second hold display area, the displayed hold display. For example, the symbol is shifted to the left display position (including the display position where the erased hold display symbol was displayed).

  The variable special display reserved memory number obtained by adding the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number is also referred to as a total reserved memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  You may make it provide the indicator which displays the number of special figure holding | maintenance memory with the display area 5H instead of the display area 5H. In the example shown in FIG. 1, the first hold indicator 25A for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B together with the display area 5H. And a second hold indicator 25B. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number so that it can be specified. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED). Here, the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number are displayed according to the number of lighted LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting area (first starting area) that is always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed between a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. (Ordinary electric accessory) is provided and a second start winning opening is formed.

  As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the gaming ball does not enter the second start winning opening. To. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the tilted position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, so that the game ball can enter the second start winning opening. Put it in a state. Note that the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally opened when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning opening, while the expanded opening state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. However, it may be configured so that the game ball is difficult to enter. As described above, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B has the first variable state (easy entry state) such as an open state or an expanded open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning port, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter. It is configured to be able to change to a second variable state (state where entry is difficult (including entry impossible)) such as a state or a normally open state where entry is difficult. The first variable state may be a state in which the game ball can easily enter the second start winning opening as compared with the second variable state.

  A game ball that has entered the first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game media), and the first special figure holding memory number is predetermined. If it is less than the upper limit (for example, “4”), the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is less than a predetermined upper limit value. In this case, the second start condition is satisfied.

  The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be one that directly pays out game balls that are prize balls, or may be one that gives a score corresponding to the number of game balls that are prize balls.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a special winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and the specific region that changes between an open state and a closed state by the special winning opening door. As a big prize opening.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the off state, the big winning opening door closes the big winning opening and the game ball enters the big winning opening (for example, Cannot pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become. In this way, the special winning opening as the specific area changes into an open state in which a game ball can easily enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous for the player. Instead of the closed state where the game ball cannot enter the big prize opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially opened state where the game ball is difficult to enter the big prize opening may be provided.

  The game ball that has entered the big prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. Thus, when a game ball enters the large winning opening that has been opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, for example, when a gaming ball enters another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls are paid out. Therefore, if the special prize winning ball device 7 is in the open state, the game ball can enter the special prize winning opening, which is a first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult to obtain the winning ball by making the gaming ball enter the special prize winning port, and the game is more than the first state. The second state is disadvantageous to the person.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. An ordinary symbol (also called “ordinary diagram” or “ordinary diagram”) that is identification information is displayed variably (variably displayed). Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose holding indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and is formed in a passing gate 41 formed in the gaming area (a gaming ball can be passed by a predetermined member. ) Is displayed by the gate switch 21.) The number of ordinary reserved storages as the number of effective passing balls that have passed is displayed.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, a single or plural general winning openings that are always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  In addition, a card unit that enables ball lending by inserting a game card as a game recording medium such as a prepaid card having a prepaid function is installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 (not shown). .

  Various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, and a touch sensor board are arranged on the back of the game board or the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly directed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of receiving a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12 and the like. It has a function of outputting and transmitting a control command (such as an effect control command described later) as an example of information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 also has a function of controlling the first hold indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the universal hold indicator 25C, etc., and displaying various reserved memory numbers.

  On the main board 11, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (detection signals indicating that the passage or entry of game media has been detected (the switch is turned on)) from various switches for detecting game balls, and the game control microcomputer 100. Transmit to. The solenoid circuit 111 receives a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100, a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory, or a solenoid for a grand prize opening door. 82.

  An information output circuit (not shown) for outputting an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall management computer (hall computer) is also mounted on the main board 11. Yes.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the rendering operation by the electrical components for rendering such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 performs all or part of the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the on / off operations in the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED. A function of causing the electrical component for production to execute a predetermined production operation.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on a signal (sound effect signal) from the effect control board 12, the sound (effect) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. A processing circuit for executing sound signal processing for outputting sound (sound designated by a sound signal) is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and based on a signal (electric decoration signal) from the effect control board 12, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED A lamp driver circuit or the like that performs lighting / extinguishing driving (lighting / extinguishing according to the drive content indicated by the electrical signal) is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22 </ b> A and second start port switch 22 </ b> B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. Wiring is connected. In addition, various switches should just have arbitrary structures which can detect the game ball | bowl as game media like what is called a sensor, for example. Further, the main board 11 is connected with wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control, such as the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20. The main board 11 is connected to a wiring for transmitting a solenoid drive signal for driving the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door.

  A control signal (control command) transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted as an electric signal (details will be described later). Each of the effect control commands has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always set to “1” and the first bit of the EXT data may be set to “0” in advance.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numerical data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 is provided, and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 is provided.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, thereby realizing a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, the function of the main board 11 is realized). For the processing etc.). At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 102, temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores various fluctuation data in the RAM 102. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed.

  Note that the one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 only needs to incorporate the RAM 102 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, for example, the random number circuit 104 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The random number used for controlling the progress of the game is also called a game random number. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as the random number circuit 104 or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. May be. For example, numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is stored in a random counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100 or a random counter provided in an internal register different from the RAM 102. The random number value may be updated by updating the stored value periodically or irregularly.

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data and table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 has table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data etc. which comprise are memorize | stored.

  In the RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100, various data (including various flags, counters, timers, etc.) used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, part or all of which is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, for example, even if there is a power outage and the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (so-called power outage), the backup power supply is powered by a predetermined period (for example, the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). Until the supply becomes impossible, the contents of a part or all of the RAM 102 are saved. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special symbol process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data stored in the backup RAM and backed up in this way is appropriately referred to as backup data.

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals are input from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. The

  The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation in accordance with a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. 5, a display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in FIG. 5, a random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

  As an example, in the effect control board 12, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control program read from the ROM 121, thereby controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component (predetermined to the effect electric component). A process for realizing a function for executing the rendering operation) is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updatable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 includes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data configuring the determination tables, pattern data configuring various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is a collection of data for executing various effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects, for example, effect control execution data (display control) associated with a determination value such as a process timer determination value. Data, voice control data, lamp control data, etc.) and process data including an end code.

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 stores various data (including various flags, counters, timers, etc.) used for controlling the effect operation. Since the RAM 122 is not a backup RAM, the stored data is lost when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped (that is, when there is a power interruption).

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 is based on a display control command or the like from the effect control CPU 120 (for example, the display control unit 123 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 by this command). The control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 is determined and executed. For example, the display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to perform variable display of decorative symbols and various types of effect display by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. Control. As an example, the display control unit 123 only needs to be equipped with a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a microprocessor for image processing called a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or more generally a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. Any configuration may be used.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 includes, for example, an input port for capturing an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. It is comprised including. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a sound effect signal transmitted to the audio control board 13, an electric decoration signal transmitted to the lamp control board 14, etc. Is output.

  With the configuration as described above, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R via the sound control board 13 to output sound, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED via the lamp control board 14 and the like. Various effects are executed by performing lighting / extinguishing driving at, or displaying effect images in the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game using a game ball as a game medium is performed, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. The game value given in the gaming machine is directly payout of a game ball to be a prize ball or a score equivalent to this. The record information of the game balls and the score corresponding to the number of the game balls may be any value that can be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize according to the quantity. Alternatively, these game balls and score recording information may not be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes, but may have valuable value that can be used for a second game on a gaming machine.

  In addition, the gaming value that can be given in the gaming machine is not limited to paying out a gaming ball as a winning ball or giving a score, for example, controlling to a big hit gaming state or a special gaming state such as a probable change state. In other words, the maximum number of rounds that can be executed in the big hit gaming state is the first round number (for example, “15”) larger than the second round number (for example, “2”), and the variable that can be executed in the short time state. The upper limit number of times of display is a first number (for example, “100”) larger than the second number of times (for example, “50”), and the big hit probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The first that the probability of being a probability (for example, 1/20), the number of consecutive chunks, which is the number of times of repeated control to the big hit gaming state without being controlled to the normal state, is greater than the second consecutive number of chunks (for example, “5”) Ren Chang (E.g., "10"), such as part or all of it to be, may include be a more favorable game situation for the player.

  As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hitting ball is emitted based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) performed by a player on a hitting operation handle installed on the lower right side of the front surface of the housing of the pachinko gaming machine 1 A game ball as a game medium is launched toward a game area by a launch motor provided in the apparatus. When the game ball that has flowed down the game area enters the first start winning opening (first start area) formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A, the game ball is detected by the first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. (The first start port switch 22A is turned on) or the like is satisfied. Thereafter, a special game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is started based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done.

  Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening (second start area) formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball is detected by the second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. The second start condition is satisfied by the fact that the 2 start port switch 22B is turned on). Thereafter, a special game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is started based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the big hit gaming state. Is done. However, when the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is in the normal open state or closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening.

  Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passage gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2 (the gate switch 21 is turned on), the normal symbol display 20 performs variable display of the normal symbol. The usual chart start condition is established. Thereafter, the normal symbol game 20 is started by the normal symbol display 20 based on the fact that the normal symbol start condition for starting variable symbol normal display such as the end of the previous normal symbol game has been completed. In this ordinary game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the change of the normal symbol, the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per regular symbol is stopped and displayed as the fixed regular symbol, the variable symbol display result of the regular symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. Corresponding to the fact that the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “per standard”, the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed in which the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. When a predetermined time elapses, closing control or normal opening control for returning to the vertical position is performed. Whether or not the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is set as “predetermined per symbol” as the predetermined specific display result is determined when the normal symbol game is started by the normal symbol display 20 or the like. Is determined (predetermined) before derivation display.

  When a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started or when a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, a special game is started. It is determined (predetermined) whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a “big hit” as a predetermined specific display result before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result.

  After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the variation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol as a variable display result is derived. Is displayed. Corresponding to the variable display of special symbols by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, decorations of “left”, “middle”, and “right” arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (effect symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. In the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a fixed special that results in variable display of the special symbol When the symbol is derived and displayed, a fixed decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol is derived and displayed on the image display device 5.

  When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) becomes “big jackpot” (specific display result), and the specific gaming state is advantageous for the player. It is controlled to the big hit gaming state. Whether or not the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state corresponds to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”, and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. When the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed as the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, and the loss symbol is derived and displayed, the variable symbol display result (special symbol display result) is “lost”.

  As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers “3” and “7” is a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

  In the big hit gaming state, the special winning opening is in an open state, and the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player. Then, during the predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) or the period until a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game balls enter the grand prize opening and a winning ball is generated, the grand prize opening is continuously opened. A round game (also simply referred to as “round”) is executed. During periods other than the execution period of such round games, the big prize opening is closed, and it is difficult or impossible to generate a winning ball. When a game ball enters the big prize opening, a winning ball (game ball that has entered the big prize opening) is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball for each detection. It is. The round game in the big hit game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, “15”) is reached.

When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the case where the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change” is included. For example, as a result of variable display of a special symbol, when the big hit symbol indicating the number “3” is derived and displayed, the big hit type is “non-probable change”, and when the big hit symbol indicating the number “7” is derived and displayed, The type is “probable change”. When the jackpot type is “probability change” or “non-probability change”, as a round game in the jackpot game state, the special variable winning ball device 7 is in a first state advantageous to the player (a jackpot opening state is opened). The normal open round in which the upper limit time to be a predetermined time (for example, the first period of 29 seconds) is 15
It is executed a predetermined number of times such as round (15 times). Note that the big hit gaming state based on “big hit” when the big hit type is “non-probable change” is referred to as “non-probable big hit game state”. Also, the big hit gaming state based on “big hit” when the big hit type is “probable change” is referred to as “probability big hit game state”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, the probability that the variable display result is “big hit” (big hit probability) may be controlled to a probability change state where the probability is higher than the normal state. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit gaming state is satisfied. In addition, after the big hit gaming state is ended, the average variable display time may be controlled to a short state when it becomes shorter than the normal state. The time-short state is a short-time end of one of a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 100 times) of variable display (special game) and the start of the next big hit gaming state. It is controlled to continue until the condition is satisfied first. Note that the remaining number of executions of variable display (such as a special figure game) until the time-shutdown condition is satisfied may be referred to as a time-save remaining number. The short-time state and the probability variation state are also advantageous for the player.

  In this embodiment, the gaming state after the non-probability big hit gaming state ends is a time-short state but does not become a probable variation state. In this embodiment, the gaming state after the probability variation big hit gaming state is ended is a short time state and a probability variation state.

  The normal state is a game state other than a state advantageous to the player, such as a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a short-time state, or a probability change state. The probability of “per figure” and the probability that the variable display result in the special figure game will be “big hit” is an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  In the short time state, the normally variable winning ball device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state) in an advantageous change mode in which the game ball is likely to enter the second start winning opening than in the non-short time state that is not in the short time state such as the normal state. Alternatively, the state is changed between an enlarged open state and a second variable state (closed state or normal open state). For example, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol change time (normal diagram change time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, or the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is “general”. Tilt control time for controlling the tilt of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the probability of “per figure” is higher than that in the normal state, and the variable display result is “per figure”. By making the control longer than that in the normal state and increasing the number of tilts more than in the normal state, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is changed to the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode. Just do it. Note that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. Thus, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B between the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode is referred to as high opening control (also referred to as “time-short control” or “high base control”). Is done. By controlling in such a short time state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened, and a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state is achieved.

  Time-short states are also referred to as “high base state”, “high base”, etc., and game states that are not time-short states are also referred to as “low base state”, “low base”, “non-time-short state”, “non-time-short state”, etc. Is called. The probability variation state in which probability variation control is performed is also referred to as “high probability state”, “high probability”, and the gaming state that is not the probability variation state is “low probability state”, “low probability”, “non-probability variation state”, “non-probability variation”. Is also said. The gaming state when in the probable change state and the short time state is also referred to as “high-accuracy high base state”, “high-accuracy high base”, or the like. The gaming state when the state is in the short-time state without being in the probable change state is also referred to as “low-accuracy base state”, “low-accuracy base”, or the like. The game state when the state is in the probabilistic state without being in the short-time state is also referred to as “highly accurate low base state”, “highly accurate low base”, or the like. The state that does not become either the short-time state or the probability variation state, that is, the normal state is also referred to as “low accuracy low base state”, “low accuracy low base”, or the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R In (variable display period), the decorative symbol variable display mode may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established).

  Here, the reach mode refers to a decorative design that has not yet been stopped when the decorative design that is stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination ("reach variation design"). Is also a display mode in which the variation continues, or a display mode in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) that constitutes the determined jackpot combination is stopped. In the symbol display area 5C, etc., the decorative pattern is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R This is a display mode in which all or a part of the combination is changed and changed in synchronization.

  During the variable display of the decorative design, a character image (effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, a background image is displayed, An effect of reproducing and displaying different moving images is executed. These effects are called variable display effects together with the variable display of the decorative pattern itself (this is also an effect). That is, the variable display effect is an effect by an image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol, and is a concept including the variable symbol display itself. Making the variable display mode a reach mode is one of the effects during variable display. In the variable display effect, in addition to the effect by the image (including the variable display of the decorative pattern itself) displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 along with the variable display of the special symbol, the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R. In addition, effects such as lighting operation (flashing operation) in a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 may be included.

  In the variable display effect, a reach effect may be executed. The reach effect is executed in response to the reach mode. Reach effects can be achieved by reducing the fluctuating speed of the decorative pattern, displaying a character image (effect image imitating a person) different from the decorative pattern on the screen of the image display device 5, or changing the display mode of the background image. It is an effect that performs an effect operation different from that before reaching the reach mode, by playing a video that is different from the decorative pattern, or by changing the change mode of the decorative pattern. The reach effect includes not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. In this embodiment, a normal reach, a super reach A, and a super reach B having different production modes are prepared as reach productions (see FIG. 13 and will be described later in detail).

  In addition, during the variable display of decorative symbols, unlike the reach effect, the variable display of decorative symbols can indicate the possibility that the variable display status of decorative symbols will reach the reach state and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is executed depending on the mode or the like. The variable display effect is also included in the variable display effect. In this embodiment, the variable display effect is different from the effect in which the variable display mode is the reach mode. In this embodiment, a variable display effect such as “pseudo-continuous” can be executed, and whether or not to execute each effect operation in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side or the like. It is determined.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. This is the number of times that the decorative symbols re-variate in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As an example, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances of special combinations are displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of the various types of lost combinations is displayed temporarily. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation display or changing the decorative symbol again immediately after stopping for a short time. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the decoration design which is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the decorative symbol may be re-fluctuated after the decorative symbol is stopped to such an extent that the player recognizes that the decorative symbol once displayed is confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, for example, as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) increases, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases. Thus, the player can recognize that the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is performed by displaying the pseudo-continuous chance temporarily stopped, and the variable display result is increased as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. The expectation of becoming a “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the first start condition or the second start condition is established once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once or twice. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative design has been started 2 to 3 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo continuous fluctuations (revariations) in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect may be, for example, four or five.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect such as a related display effect is executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change (pseudo-continuous change). Also good. As an example, a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image may be displayed on the image display device 5 during the period of each variable display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. Further, for example, the most variable effect may be executed by performing an arbitrary effect operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and a lighting operation of another light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9.

  Note that “slip” may be performed as a variable display effect. In the variable display effect of “sliding”, two or more decorative symbol display areas are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (for example, “left” and “right”), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or (2)) decorative symbol display area (for example, “left” decorative symbol display area 5L or “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, or both), the decorative symbol is changed again and then stopped ( A temporary stop display may be performed), thereby performing an effect display for changing a decorative pattern to be stopped (or a temporary stop display may be performed).

  In this embodiment, as the effect mode of the variable display effect, there are a plurality of effect modes in which at least one of the background, the appearance character (for example, the character appearing in the same reach effect), the decorative design, and the like is different. It is prepared. Here, a normal mode and a probability variation mode are prepared as production modes. The probability change mode is an effect mode when the game state is in a probability change state. The normal mode is an effect mode when the gaming state is not a probable change state. In normal mode and probability change mode, for example, the background is different, or characters appearing in at least one of normal reach, super reach A, and super reach B are different (for example, characters appearing in normal reach are characters in normal mode). A and B may be used in the probability variation mode), or the decoration pattern may be different (for example, an Arabic numeral decoration pattern is used on the one hand and a Chinese numeral decoration pattern is used on the other hand). In addition, it is good also as a several production | generation mode by making arbitrary production | generation operations different, for example, the audio | voice output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the lighting operation of other light-emitting bodies, such as the game effect lamp 9, for example.

  In this embodiment, in the variable display effect, a notice effect for notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” (expected degree of big hit) is executed. In this embodiment, a plurality of notice effects having different expected degrees of jackpots are provided. The notice effect is also included in the variable table effect. In the notice effect, a predetermined image is displayed, so that the expected degree of jackpot corresponding to the image is notified (FIGS. 54 and 55 and the like will be described in detail later). The notice effect may be executed by any effect operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting operation of other light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9, for example.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, a normal mode, a special mode, and a notice mode are prepared as display modes of the hold display symbols. The normal mode is a normal display mode. The special mode is a display mode at a predetermined time, unlike the normal mode. The notice mode is a mode for notifying the expected degree of jackpot. In this embodiment, different display modes are represented by the display colors of the hold display symbols (see FIG. 23). As will be described later in detail, in the normal mode, the color of the hold display symbol is blue. In the special mode, the color of the reserved display symbol is white or gray. In the notice mode, the color of the hold display symbol is one of yellow, green, red, and rainbow colors. The shape of the hold display symbol is different depending on the effect mode. As will be described later, the hold display symbol is a circle mark in the normal mode and a square mark in the probability change mode (see FIG. 22, details will be described later).

  As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIG. 53 and the like, the hold display symbol H corresponding to the variable display (pending variable display) corresponding to the first special figure game is on the left side in the display area 5H. Is displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha. The hold display symbol H corresponding to the variable display corresponding to the second special figure game (pending variable display) is displayed in the second hold display area 5Hb which is the area on the right side in the display area 5H.

  Further, as will be described in detail later, in this embodiment, the hold display symbol H displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha or the second hold display area 5Hb corresponds to the variable display currently being executed. The hold display symbol H is displayed in the center current display area 5Hc in the display area 5H (see FIG. 53).

  Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, the display mode of the hold display symbols (here, the first hold display area 5Ha, the second hold display area 5Hb, and the current display area 5Hc) displayed in this embodiment (here, Then, the display color) can be changed from the current display mode to another display mode. In addition, the display mode of the hold display symbol is more likely to change to the other notice mode, particularly the notice mode, in the normal mode than in the special mode.

  Maintaining the display mode of the hold display symbol in a predetermined display mode is also a kind of effect. For example, maintaining the display mode of the hold display symbols displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb as a notice form is also a kind of effect. An effect of maintaining the display mode of the hold display symbols displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb as the notice mode may be referred to as pre-reading notice. For example, maintaining the display mode of the hold display symbol displayed in the current display area 5Hc as a notice mode is a kind of effect. An effect of maintaining the display mode of the hold display symbol displayed in the current display area 5Hc as the notice mode may be referred to as a current hold notice.

  Further, as will be described later, in this embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display symbol is changed, an action effect that changes the display mode as a result of the effect may be executed (FIGS. 56, 57, etc.). ). In this embodiment, a plurality of action effects having different aspects are prepared. When the action effect is executed, the display mode of the hold display symbol changes as a result of the action effect. The action effect may include an arbitrary effect operation such as a sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and a lighting operation of another light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9.

  When the special figure display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game, is “big hit”, a definite decorative symbol that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the same on a predetermined effective line in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of “left”, “middle”, and “right” By deciding and displaying the decorative symbols all together, it is only necessary to derive and display the finalized decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination.

  When the big hit type is “non-probable change”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination may be derived. For example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 is “1”. Among the decorative symbols of “8”, any one of the decorative symbols having the even numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, they may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line as long as they are a certain type of fixed decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols (also referred to as “normal symbols”). .

  When the jackpot type is “probable change”, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination may be derived, or a definite decorative symbol that is a probable variable big hit combination may be derived. For example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are the fixed decorative symbols that are probable big hit combinations. Among the decorative patterns of “8”, any one of the decorative patterns whose pattern numbers are odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “right”. The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line as long as they are a type of a definite decorative symbol that is a jackpot combination. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols.

  A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols in which the determined decorative symbol is a non-probabilistic big hit combination or a probable big hit combination. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are the non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative pattern is changed again, and the decorative pattern (probable variable pattern) that is a combination of the probabilistic big hit and non-variable is displayed. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes the non-probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped display decorative pattern A re-lottery selection effect for deriving and displaying symbols is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probable big hit combination after re-variation of the temporarily stopped decorative pattern A re-lottery winning effect that stops and displays a symbol may be executed, or a re-lottery winning effect may be executed.

  When the big hit type is “probable change”, the decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination is displayed once during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the lottery effect is executed during the variable display, or the subsequent big hit gaming state A jackpot promotion promotion effect may be executed at the end of the middle or jackpot gaming state, and the start of control to be in a probable change state may be notified. The jackpot promotion effect is in the jackpot gaming state at the start of the jackpot gaming state, during the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, during the period from one of the rounds to the start of the next round in the jackpot gaming state Probability change notification is made as to whether or not to control to the probability change state in the period from the end of the final round to the start of the next variable display game. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”. These re-lottery effects and promotion effects during the big hit may not be executed, and the start of control to be in a probable change state may be notified.

  When the special figure display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is not the reach mode, and the decorative pattern constituting the predetermined non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. There are cases in which a definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed. In addition, when the special figure display result is “losing”, the decorative symbols constituting a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as “reach-losing combination”) are stopped and displayed after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode. As a result, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-specific display result may be derived and displayed.

  Next, main operations (actions) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the following, the operation will be described with reference to a flowchart and the like, but in each operation (each process), a process that does not appear in the flowchart may be appropriately performed.

  In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 102 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thereby, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process.

  When the CPU 103 executing such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main-side error processing, information output processing, gaming random number update processing, special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, command control processing, and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Processing for controlling the progress of the process is included. At the end of the game control timer interrupt process, the interrupt enabled state is set. As a result, the game control timer interrupt process is executed every time a timer interrupt occurs, that is, every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) which is the supply interval of the interrupt request signal.

  The switch process is performed by determining whether a detection signal is input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. This is a process for determining for each switch whether or not it is in an ON state (that is, whether or not a game ball has entered or passed).

  The main-side error process is a process of performing an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and generating a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result.

  In the information output process, pachinko gaming machines such as jackpot information, start information, probability variation information, etc. supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 as information to be output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. 1 is a process of outputting information (data) relating to 1 from the information output circuit.

  The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software. As an example, the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side include a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation category, It is only necessary to include the random number MR4 for pattern determination (see FIG. 6). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game is controlled as the big hit game state with “1”. Any of the values of “65535” can be taken. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is a random value used to determine the big hit type as “probable change” or “non-probable change” when the variable display result is “big hit”. It can take any value from “100” to “100”. The random number MR3 for determining the variation category includes a plurality of categories prepared in advance for categories of variation patterns (variation patterns categorized according to their contents, which will be described in detail later) in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols. It is a random value used to determine any one of “1” to “900”. The random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a variation pattern in the variable display of a special symbol or a decorative symbol, which is one of a plurality of variation patterns (variation patterns belonging to a variation category determined based on the random number MR3). This is a random value used to determine the value, and can take any value from “1” to “900”.

  In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the variable display result of the special symbol or the like in the special symbol game is regarded as a big hit. Determination of whether or not to control the game state, determination of variation pattern, control of display operation in the special symbol display device 4 based on the determination result (execution of special game), special variable winning ball device 7 in the big hit gaming state In order to perform the opening / closing operation setting (execution of round game or short-term opening control) of the special prize opening in the predetermined procedure, various processes are selected and executed. Although the details of the special symbol process will be described later, by executing the special symbol process every time a timer interrupt occurs, the variable display result and the variation pattern are determined, the special symbol game is executed based on the determination, and the jackpot gaming state Etc. are realized.

  In the normal symbol process, for example, when the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 (for example, when it is determined in the switch process that the gate switch 21 is turned on), the number of holds reaches the upper limit. If there is not, hold storage of the usual game (for example, extract a random value and store it in the RAM 102), or use the hold memory (random number stored in the RAM 102) to determine the variable display result of the usual game. Or, the variation pattern (variation time, etc.) of the regular game is determined, and the normal symbol display 20 is controlled according to the variation pattern to control the display operation (for example, lighting or extinguishing of the segment LED). First, the variable display result of the normal game can be derived and displayed, or when the variable display result is per general map, the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is opened first. Or carried out the process of the state. By executing the normal symbol process process every time the timer interrupt occurs, the execution of the normal game, the first variable state of the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B at the time of the normal game, etc. are realized.

  The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in special symbol process processing, normal symbol process processing, and the like, transmission setting of a control command (production control command or the like) (for example, storing a storage address value of a control command to be transmitted is stored in the RAM 102) is performed. In the process, a process of actually transmitting the transmission-set control command to the effect control board 12 is performed. In this transmission process, an effect control INT signal or the like is used, and a control command is transmitted.

  After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  Here, main effect control commands transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by the command control process will be described with reference to FIG. “(H)” indicates a hexadecimal number.

  Command 8001 (H) is an effect control command (first variation start designation command) that designates the start of variable display (variation) of the first special symbol. Command 8002 (H) is an effect control command (second variation start designation command) that designates the start of variable display (variation) of the second special symbol. The first variation start designation command and the second variation start designation command may be collectively referred to as a variation start designation command. Information indicating whether to start variable display of the first special symbol or variable display of the second special symbol may be included in a later-described variation pattern designation command. The first variation start designation command or the second variation start designation command is transmitted and set together with the variation pattern designation command and the like in later-described step S111 executed when the variation pattern is set.

  Command 81XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern designation command) that designates a variation pattern of a decorative symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to variable display of a special symbol. In this embodiment, a variation pattern designation command corresponding to each variation pattern (see FIG. 13, details will be described later) is set. For example, a unique number (variation pattern number) is assigned to each variation pattern, and the number is set to “XX” in the command (for example, “01” for the variation pattern PA1-1). The variation pattern designation command is also a command for designating the start of variation of the decorative symbol, and is transmitted and set in step S111 described later that is executed when the variation pattern is set.

  Command 8CXX (H) is an effect control command (display result designation command) that designates whether or not to make a big hit and a big hit type (that is, a variable display result). In this embodiment, a display result designation command corresponding to each display result is set. For example, a unique number is assigned to each display result, and the number is set to “XX” in the command (for example, “00” for “losing”, “big hit” for the big hit type “probable change”). "01"). The display result designation command is transmitted and set in step S111 described later, which is executed when the variation pattern is set together with the variation pattern designation command.

  Command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (design confirmation designation command) for designating that the variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative symbols is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. The symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted and set at the end of the special figure game in step S112 described later.

  Command 95XX (H) is an effect control command (game state designation command) for designating a game state. In this embodiment, a game state designation command corresponding to each game state is set. For example, if the gaming state is a normal state (low probability low base), “XX” is set to “00”. For example, if the gaming state is a high probability low base state, “XX” is set to “01”. For example, “XX” is set to “02” if the gaming state is a highly accurate and high base state. The gaming state designation command is set to be transmitted at the time of execution of step S113 and step S117, which will be described later, in which the gaming state can be changed.

  Command A000 (H) is an effect control command (hit start designation command) for designating the start of a big hit gaming state (start of fanfare). The fanfare is an effect that is executed at the start of the big hit gaming state and notifies that the big hit gaming state has been entered. This command is set to be transmitted when the big hit gaming state is started in step S113 described later.

  Command A300 (H) is an effect control command (hit end designation command) for designating the end of the big hit gaming state (start of ending). Note that the ending is an effect for notifying the end of the big hit gaming state, which is executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. This command is set to be transmitted when the last round game is completed in step S116 described later.

  Command B100 (H) is an effect control command (first start opening winning designation command) for designating that the first starting winning is generated due to the entry of the game medium into the first start winning opening. Command B200 (H) is an effect control command (second start opening winning designation command) for designating that a second start winning has occurred due to the entry of a game medium into the second start winning opening. The first start opening prize designation command and the second start opening prize designation command may be collectively referred to as a start opening prize designation command. These commands are transmitted and set in a start winning determination process (step S101) described later.

  Command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first special figure reserved memory number designation command) for designating the first special figure reserved memory number. “XX” indicates the first special figure reservation storage number. Command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second special figure reserved memory number designation command) for designating the second special figure reserved memory number. “XX” indicates the second special figure reservation storage number. The first special figure reserved memory number designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number designation command may be collectively referred to as a special figure pending memory number designation command. The special figure reserved memory number designation command is transmitted and set in later-described step S101 and step S111 in which the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number can change.

  Command C4XX (H) is an effect control command (designation designation command) for designating a display result among the determination results at the time of starting winning. Command C6XX (H) is an effect control command (variation category designation command) for designating a variation category among the determination results at the time of starting winning. As will be described in detail later, when the first start winning or the second starting winning occurs, the random number values MR1 to MR3 are extracted (step S101). In this embodiment, for the variable display corresponding to the extracted random number values MR1 to MR3, the random number values MR1 and MR3 among the extracted random number values MR1 to MR3 before the start condition of the variable display is satisfied. Based on the above, it is determined whether or not the variable display result of the variable display is “big hit” and the variable category of the variable display (FIG. 13). The determination at the time of starting winning means this determination, and this determination is performed in the winning random number determination process in step S211. Note that this determination may not be performed in a predetermined case. A unique number is assigned to the determination result (including no determination) for the display result, and the number is set to “XX” in the symbol designation command (for example, “00”, “ “01” for “losing” and “02” for “big hit”). A unique number is assigned to the determination result (including no determination) for the variation category, and the number is set to “XX” in the variation category designation command (for example, “00” if “no determination”). “11” for “PA1”, “12” for “PA2”, “13” for “PA3”, etc.). These commands are transmitted and set in a start winning determination process (step S101) described later.

  Next, the special symbol process will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  When the start winning determination process is started, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the first start opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is turned on ( Step S201). If it is determined in the switch process that the first start port switch 22A is on, for example, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the special game using the first special view It is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number that is the number of reserved memories is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 stores the first stored value of a first special figure reserved memory number counter (counter that counts the first special figure reserved memory number) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit). It suffices if the first special figure reserved memory number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved memory number count value. When the number of first special figure reserved storage is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port that is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102 The buffer value is set to “1” (step S203).

  When the first start-up switch 22A is OFF in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reservation storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. It is determined whether or not the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is on (step S204). If it is determined in the switch process that the second start port switch 22B is on, for example, and the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the special game using the second special view It is determined whether or not the second special figure reserved memory number that is the number of reserved memories is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 stores the second stored value of the second special figure reserved memory number counter (counter for counting the second special figure reserved memory number) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control counter setting unit) of the RAM 102. It suffices if the second special figure reserved memory number can be specified by reading the special figure reserved memory number count value. When the second special figure reservation storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S206). If the second start port switch 22B is not turned on (step S204; No), or if the second special figure reservation storage number is the upper limit value (step S205; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated.

  After either of the processes of steps S203 and S206 is executed, the special figure reservation storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated by 1 (step S207). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first special figure reserved memory number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the second special figure reserved memory number count value is increased. Add one. Thus, the first special figure reserved memory count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). Also, the second special figure reserved memory count value increases by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. Updated to (increment). At this time, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (such as a game control counter setting unit), is updated to add 1 (step S208).

  After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number circuit 104 or random data provided by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.) Numeric data (see FIG. 6) indicating the numeric value MR1, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation category are extracted. The numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as reserved data by being set at the head of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2”, the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. At this time, when the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 can control the first hold indicator 25A and specify the first special figure hold memory number added by one. May be displayed on the first hold indicator 25A (for example, the number of lighted LEDs is increased by one). When the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display a display that can specify the number of the second special figure hold memory added by one. You may make it make the 2nd holding | maintenance display device 25B perform (for example, increase the number of lighting of LED by 1).

  The first special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 7A is not started yet, although a game ball has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and a first start winning has occurred. On-hold data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball The stored number of random data MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, etc. extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 or the like as reserved data Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates that execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is being held, and the variable display result ( On-hold storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect, etc.) It becomes.

  In addition, the holding number of the first special figure holding storage unit and the display position of the holding display symbol (controlled on the production control board 12 side) basically correspond to each other. For this reason, when the hold data is stored in the first special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “1”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the leftmost first display position in the first hold display area 5Ha (FIG. 53, etc.). . For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “2”, the second display position located on the right side of the first display position of the first hold display area 5Ha toward the display area 5H. Display the hold display symbol. FIG. 53 shows a state when the hold data is stored up to the hold number “3”. In FIG. 53, the hold display symbol H corresponding to the hold data of the hold number “1” is the first hold display area 5Ha. The hold display symbol H corresponding to the hold data of the hold number “2” is displayed at the first display position (first display position) from the left toward the left in the first hold display area 5Ha. The hold display symbol H corresponding to the hold data of the hold number “3” is displayed at the third display position (second display position), and the third display position (first from the left) in the first hold display area 5Ha. 3 display position).

  The second special figure storage unit shown in FIG. 7B is not yet started, although the game ball has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start winning has occurred. The reserved data of the special game (not shown special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball The CPU 103 extracts the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation category, etc., which are extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. The data is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) is reached. The hold data stored in the second special figure holding storage unit in this way indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure (variable display) is held, and the variable display result (in this special figure game) On-hold storage information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state based on the special figure display result), or whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a specific mode (for example, reach effect, etc.) It becomes.

  In addition, the holding number of the second special figure holding storage unit and the display position of the holding display symbol (controlled on the side of the effect control board 12) basically correspond to each other. For this reason, when the hold data is stored in the second special figure hold storage unit, the hold display symbol is displayed at the display position corresponding to the hold number associated with the hold data. For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “1”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the leftmost first display position of the second hold display area 5Hb (FIG. 53, etc.). . For example, when the hold data is newly stored in association with the hold number “2”, the hold display symbol is displayed at the second display position located on the right side of the first display position in the second hold display area 5Hb. To do. FIG. 53 shows a state when the hold data is stored up to the hold number “2”. In FIG. 53, the hold display symbol H corresponding to the hold data of the hold number “1” is the second hold display area 5Hb. The hold display symbol H corresponding to the hold data of the hold number “2” is displayed at the first display position from the left (first display position) toward the left in the second hold display area 5Hb. Is displayed at the second display position (second display position).

  Following the process of step S210, a winning random number determination process is performed (step S211). As described above, the winning random number determination process is a process for determining the start winning prize, and based on the random values MR1 and MR3 among the random values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209, This is a process of determining whether or not the variable display result of the variable display to be executed is “big hit” and the variable category (FIG. 13) of the variable display. The winning random number determination process will be described in detail later. Thereafter, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2” (step S212). At this time, if the start port buffer value is “2” (step S212; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S213), and then the start winning prize is obtained. The determination process ends. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “1” (step S212; “1”), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S214). The process proceeds to step S204. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S211 of FIG. 5 as the winning random number determination process. In this embodiment, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, the special symbol display result is controlled as a “hit” in the special symbol normal process (step S110 in FIG. 4) to be described later. A determination is made whether or not. In addition, in a variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 3) to be described later, determination of a variation category and variation pattern corresponding to the decorative symbol variable display mode is performed. In the winning random number determination process, apart from these determinations, the game ball is extracted at the start winning timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening). The determination of whether or not the variable display result of the variable display to be executed of the random number (the random number extracted in step S209) is “big hit”, and which of the variable categories of the variable display of the decorative pattern is Judgment or the like is performed (so-called “look ahead”). As a result, the special figure display result is “big hit” before the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the start winning opening is started (before the special game start condition is established). Or a rough variable display mode (variation category) of the decorative symbol is predicted, and the display mode of the hold display symbol is determined by the effect control CPU 120 on the effect control board 12 side based on the prediction result. can do.

  In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 8, first, the CPU 103, for example, a short time flag (a flag that is turned on in the short time state) provided in a predetermined area (such as a game control flag setting unit) of the RAM 102 or a probability change. The current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified by confirming the state of the flag (the flag that is turned on when the probability is changed) (step S401). In step S401, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit gaming state by confirming a value of a special figure process flag provided in a predetermined area (such as a gaming control flag control unit) of the RAM 102. Specify whether or not. For example, when the value of the special figure process flag is “4” to “7”, the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be specified as the big hit gaming state.

  The CPU 103 determines whether or not the gaming state specified in this way is a big hit that is a big hit gaming state (step S402). At this time, when it is determined that it is not a big hit (step S402; No), it is further determined whether or not the time is short (whether or not the time reduction flag is on) (step S403). When it is determined in step S402 that a big hit is being made (step S402; Yes), or when it is determined in step S403 that time-shortening control is being performed (step S403; Yes), the start port buffer value is “2”. It is determined whether or not (step S404).

  When it is determined in step S403 that the time-saving control is not being performed (step S403; No), or when it is determined in step S404 that the starting port buffer value is “2” (step S404; Yes), the big hit determination is made. A range is set (step S405). For example, a special figure display result corresponding to the current gaming state specified in step S401 in a later-described special figure display result determination table (see FIG. 10) prepared by storing in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 101, for example. The range of the decision value assigned to the “big hit” is set as the big hit decision range. For example, if the current gaming state is a probability variation state (if the probability variation flag is on), “8000” to “9899” are set as the jackpot determination range, and the current gaming state is a non-probability variation state (not a probability variation state). State) (if the probability variation flag is off), “8000” to “8189” are set as the big hit determination range (see FIG. 10).

  Thereafter, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S209 is compared with the jackpot determination range set by the process in step S405 (step S406). Thereby, it is determined whether or not the random value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range (step S407). As an example, the CPU 103 compares the individual determination values included in the jackpot determination range with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted by the process of step S209 shown in FIG. The presence or absence of a decision value that matches the numerical value MR1 may be determined. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined values included in the jackpot determination range are set, and the CPU 103 determines the random number MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it may be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range.

  In step S406, for example, the random value MR1 stored in the special figure storage unit in step S210 may be read, and the determination may be performed using the read random value MR1. Separately from step S210, the random number value MR1 is held in a predetermined area (an area other than the special figure storage area) of the RAM 102 or the storage area of the CPU 103, and the CPU 103 makes the determination based on the held random number value. May be. The same applies to a random value MR3 described later. Thus, the random value used in the winning random number determination process may not be the random value stored in the special figure storage unit.

  When it is determined in step S407 that it is within the jackpot determination range (step S407; Yes), a later-described jackpot variation category determination table prepared by storing in the predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 14). ) Is selected and set in the use table (step S409). As will be described in detail later, the jackpot variation category determination table is a table for determining a variation category which is a variable display variation pattern category in which the variable display result is “big hit”, and each variation category has a random value MR3. The decision value to be compared with is assigned.

  In FIG. 14, the determination ratio is described instead of the range of the determination value. In the actual table, it suffices if a determined value in a range corresponding to the determined ratio in FIG. 14 is assigned to each variation category. The determination ratio is a ratio in which the entire range (1 to 900) of values that the random number MR3 can take is 100. For example, in FIG. 14, since the determination rate of the variation category PB3 is 20, the determination rate of the variation category PB4 is 40, and the determination rate of the variation category PB5 is 50, the variation category PB3 is compared with the random value MR3. Determination values 1 to 180 (range of 20%) are assigned, determination values 181 to 540 (range of 40%) to be compared with random value MR3 are assigned to variation category PB4, and random value MR3 is assigned to variation category PB5. Determined values 541-900 (40% range) are compared. The same applies to other tables in which the determination ratio is described.

  When it is determined in step S407 that it is not within the big hit determination range (step S407; No), a later-described loss variation category determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance (see FIG. 15). Is selected and set in the use table (step S408). Specifically, when the current gaming state identified in step S401 is a non-short-time state (low base state) (when the short-time flag is off), the variation category determination table for loss shown in FIG. Is set in the usage table, and the current gaming state identified in step S401 is in the short-time state (high base state) (when the short-time flag is in the on state), determination of the variation category for loss in FIG. Set the table as the used table. As will be described later in detail, the loss variation category determination table is a table for determining a variation category that is a variable display variation pattern category in which the variable display result is “losing”, and each variation category has a random value MR3. The decision value to be compared with is assigned.

  Thereafter, after step S408 or after step S409, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot variation category determination table set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the variation category determination random number MR3 extracted in step S209. Alternatively, the variation category assigned to the decision value matching the random number MR3 is determined with reference to the loss variation category determination table (step S409). As an example, the CPU 103 determines the variation category by determining whether or not there is a decision value that matches the random value MR3 by comparing each decision value assigned to each variation category with the random value MR3 one by one. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value assigned to each variation category may be set, and the CPU 103 may select the random value MR3, the minimum value, The variation category may be determined by comparing with the maximum value (the same applies when referring to other tables).

  After step S416, Or When it is determined in step S404 that the start port buffer value is not “2” (step S404; No) CPU 103 The start winning command transmission setting is made according to the determination result of step S407 or step S416 (step S417). The winning random number determination process is terminated. The command when starting a prize is Start opening prize designation command, Special figure pending storage number designation command, Design designation command, Floating category specification command, Consists of When the start port buffer value is “1”, As a command when starting a prize, A first start opening prize designation command; A first special figure reserved memory number designation command; Design designation command, Floating category specification command, Set the transmission settings. When the start port buffer value is “2”, As a command when starting a prize, A second start opening prize designation command; A second special figure reserved memory number designation command; Design designation command, Floating category specification command, Set the transmission settings. The command set for transmission is Sent by command control processing.

  The first special figure reserved memory number designation command and the second special figure reserved memory number designation command to be set for transmission are commands for specifying the current first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number (the number of such memories). The special figure reserved memory number to be specified may be specified by the count value of the first special figure reserved memory number counter or the second special figure reserved memory number counter. The symbol designating command to be transmitted is set to a command ("big hit") that specifies that the judgment result of the variable display result is "big hit" when the judgment result in step S407 is within the big hit determination range (step S407; Yes). If the determination result in step S407 is out of the big hit determination range (step S407; No), a command (“lost”) that specifies that the variable display result determination result is “lost”. And a determination result in step S404 is “start determination buffer value = 1” (step S404; No), it means “no determination” that the determination at the start winning prize is not performed. Command (command including EXT data corresponding to “no determination”) may be used.The variable category designation command to be set for transmission is a command (command including EXT data corresponding to the variation category that is the determination result) that designates the variation category that is the determination result when the variation category is determined in step S416, and step S404. If the determination result is that the starting port buffer value = 1 (step S404; No), it is determined that the determination at the time of the start winning prize is “no determination” (EXT data corresponding to “no determination”). Command).

  In the winning random number determination process, as described above, for the variable display corresponding to the random values MR1 to MR3 extracted in step S209 this time, the variable display result of the variable display (special game) becomes “big hit”. Whether or not and the variable category of the variable display (FIG. 13) are determined. That is, so-called prefetching is performed. In this process, the determination is made based on the current gaming state and not based on the gaming state when the variable display is actually executed. Therefore, the determination is not necessarily accurate but has some accuracy. Can predict variable display results and variable categories. Also, in the winning random number determination process, it is determined in step S402 that the big hit is being made, or in step S403 it is determined that the time-shortening control is being performed, and the start opening is performed by the process in step S404. It is determined whether or not the buffer value is “2”. At this time, if the start port buffer value is “1” and not “2”, the process proceeds to the process of step S416 without executing the process of step S405 and the like, and the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. Thus, when the high opening control associated with the short-time control is performed or when the game is in the big hit game state, each of the above-mentioned each is based on the occurrence of the start winning (first start winning) due to the game ball entering the first start winning opening. Limit the decision not to be made. Thus, when the special figure game using the second special figure is executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure, the first start winning prize is given during the time-saving control or the big hit gaming state. The soundness of the game can be ensured by restricting the prefetch based on the game from being executed.

  After executing the start winning determination process at step S101 shown in FIG. Select one of these processes and execute it.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal process, the first special symbol display device 4A, the first special symbol display unit 4A, the second special symbol reservation storage unit, the second special figure reservation storage unit, and the like are stored on the basis of the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. It is determined whether or not the special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is determined by the variable display result. Make a decision (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, if the variable display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types such as “non-probable change” or “probable change”. The data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type is stored in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, whereby the jackpot type is stored. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Lost symbol) is set. In the special symbol normal process, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

  FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special symbol holding storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 only has to read the second special figure reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”.

  When the second special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), for example, the first area of the second special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) The numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read as the hold data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (step S232). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (second start winning) at the second start winning opening in the process of step S209 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second special figure reserved memory number count value by one, the second special figure reserved memory number is updated to be subtracted by one, and the second special figure reserved memory number is also subtracted. The stored contents in the holding storage unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the reservation data stored in the storage area lower than the holding number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the holding numbers “2” to “4”) in the second special figure holding storage unit is higher by one entry ( Shift to storage areas corresponding to the holding numbers “1” to “3”. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages may be updated so as to be decremented by one. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the stored value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer provided in a predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102, is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the second special figure reserved memory number is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved memory number is “0” (step S235). The first special figure reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 only has to read the first special figure reserved memory number count value and determine whether or not the read value is “0”. Thus, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved memory number is “0”, and the first special figure reserved memory number is “0”. It is determined whether or not. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  If the special game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the start winning opening regardless of whether it is the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening And the starting opening data indicating which game ball has entered into the second starting winning opening is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the holding number together with the holding data or separately from the holding data, What is necessary is just to make it possible to specify the order in which the start conditions are established for the special game corresponding to each hold data.

  When the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), for example, the first area of the first special figure reservation storage unit (for example, the storage area corresponding to the reservation number “1”) The numerical data indicating a predetermined random number value is read as the hold data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (step S236). Thereby, the game random number extracted corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning (first start winning) at the first start winning opening in the process of step S209 is read. The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the process of step S236, for example, by updating the first special figure reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating it, the first special figure reserved memory number is updated by 1 and the first special figure reserved memory number is updated. The stored contents in the holding storage unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the first special figure hold storage unit stores the hold data stored in the storage area lower than the hold number “1” (the storage area corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) one entry at a time ( Shift to storage areas corresponding to the holding numbers “1” to “3”. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages may be updated to be decremented by 1. Then, the variable special figure designation buffer value is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special figure display result, which is the variable symbol display result of the special symbol, is determined as either “big hit” or “losing” (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a use table for determining the special figure display result. For example, the CPU 103 sets the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10 as a use table. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result indicates the special figure display result as “big hit” and “lost”. It is only necessary to be assigned to the determination result of whether or not the game state is the probability variation state.

  The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result included in the gaming random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S232 or S236 from the random number buffer for variation, and the gaming state is in the probabilistic state. Whether or not the gaming state is a probable change state to the determined value that matches the random value MR1 by referring to the special figure display result determination table based on whether or not there is numerical data indicating the random value MR1 Accordingly, the assigned determination result of “big hit” or “lost” may be determined as the special figure display result. The CPU 103 may determine that it is in the probability variation state when the probability variation flag is in the on state. For example, when the random value MR1 is “9000”, the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the probability variation flag is in an on state (in the probability variation state), and the probability variation flag is turned off. In the case of a state (in the case of an uncertain change state), it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost”.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the probability variation state, the special figure display result is determined as “big hit” at a higher decision ratio than in the non-probability variation state. Therefore, for example, based on the jackpot end process in step S117 shown in FIG. 4 (described in detail later), the probability variation flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is “probability variation”, or the like. When the current state is a probable change state, the special figure display result is likely to be a “hit” and more likely to be a big hit game state than in the non-probability change state. That is, it is advantageous for the player.

  Thereafter, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is “big hit” (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” (step S240; Yes), a big hit flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 is set to an on state (step S241). Further, the big hit type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, a jackpot type determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in a use table for determining the jackpot type. For example, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11 as a use table. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 11, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”. As long as it is assigned to the determination result.

  The CPU 103 reads the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type included in the game random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in step S232 or S236 from the random number buffer for variation, and the jackpot read from the random number buffer for variation Select one of the jackpot types assigned to the decision value that matches the random value MR2 by referring to the jackpot type determination table set in the use table based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the type do it.

  After executing the process of step S242, the big hit type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 stores in the jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control buffer setting unit), a jackpot type buffer setting value indicating the determination result of the jackpot type (for example, “0” in the case of “non-probability change”). In the case of “probability change”, the value of “1”) is stored to store the jackpot type.

  When the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S240; No), after step S243, a fixed special symbol that is a variable display result of the special symbol in the special figure game is determined (step S246). As an example, when it is determined in step S240 that the special symbol display result is not “big hit”, the special symbol predetermined as the lost symbol is determined as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, a plurality of types of big hits are made according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242 (according to the big hit type buffer setting value). Any one of the special symbols predetermined as the symbols may be determined as the confirmed special symbol.

  After executing the process of step S246, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” (step S247), and the special symbol normal process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” in step S247, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the variation pattern setting process in step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

  In step S235, when the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S248), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, after setting the transmission of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration display setting is terminated. The effect control board 12 displays a demonstration screen when a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 in FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on a result of prior determination as to whether or not the variable display result is “big hit”. Since the variation pattern designates the content (variable display mode) of the variable display of the decorative design, the content of the variable display of the decorative design is determined by this determination. The variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols is set in advance corresponding to the variation pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time (special diagram variation time) from the start of variable symbol special display until the finalized special symbol resulting in variable display is derived is determined. Is done. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of performing setting for starting the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol display device 4. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”.

  FIG. 12 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in step S111 as the variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is ON (step S261; Yes), the variation category corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is “big hit” is determined (step S262). If the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), the variation category corresponding to the time of loss when the special figure display result is “lost” is determined (step S263). After step S262 or after step S263, a variation pattern is determined based on the determined variation category (step S265). As described above, in this embodiment, by first determining the variation category, the type of rough variation pattern is determined, and then the detailed variation pattern is determined.

FIG. 13 shows a specific example of the variation category and the variation pattern in the present embodiment.
The variation category PA1 is a shortened / non-reach (losing) variation category. A variation pattern PA1-1 belongs to the variation category PA1. The variation pattern PA1-1 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, specifies non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and the special figure variation time is normal. This is a non-reach fluctuation pattern for short time. This is a variable display mode. The variation category PA1 is a grouping of non-reach variation patterns selected at the time of loss and time reduction.

  The fluctuation category PA2 is a non-reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns PA2-1 and PA2-2 belong to the variation category PA2. The variation pattern PA2-1 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, designates non-reach (the variable display mode does not become the reach mode), and the special figure variation time is normal. This is a non-reach variation pattern of length. The variation pattern PA2-2 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a non-reach variation that designates execution and non-reach (a variable display mode does not become a reach mode) once in a pseudo sequence. It is a pattern. The fluctuation category PA2 is a grouping of non-reach fluctuation patterns selected at the time of loss and non-time reduction.

  The fluctuation category PA3 is a normal reach (losing) fluctuation category. Variation patterns PA3-1 and PA3-2 belong to the variation category PA3. The variation pattern PA3-1 is selected when the variable display result is “lost”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. The variation pattern PA3-2 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of one pseudo-continuation and execution of normal reach. The variation category PA3 is a group of reach variation patterns that are selected at the time of loss and specify normal reach.

  The variation category PA4 is a variation category of super reach A (losing). Variation patterns PA4-1 to PA4-3 belong to the variation category PA4. The variation pattern PA4-1 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of super reach A. The fluctuation pattern PA4-2 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of one pseudo-continuation and execution of super reach A. The variation pattern PA4-3 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of two pseudo-continuations and execution of super reach A. The variation category PA4 is a group of reach variation patterns that are selected at the time of losing and specify Super Reach A.

  The variation category PA5 is a variation category of super reach B (losing). Variation patterns PA5-1 to PA5-3 belong to the variation category PA5. The variation pattern PA5-1 is selected when the variable display result is “lost”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of super reach B. The fluctuation pattern PA5-2 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of one pseudo-series and execution of super reach B. The fluctuation pattern PA5-3 is selected when the variable display result is “losing”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of two pseudo-continuations and execution of super reach B. The variation category PA5 is a group of reach variation patterns that are selected at the time of losing and specify Super Reach B.

  The fluctuation category PB3 is a normal reach (big hit) fluctuation category. Variation patterns PB3-1 and PB3-2 belong to the variation category PB3. The fluctuation pattern PB3-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of normal reach. The fluctuation pattern PB3-2 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of one pseudo-continuation and execution of normal reach. The variation category PB3 is a group of reach variation patterns that are selected at the time of a big hit and specify normal reach.

  The variation category PB4 is a variation category of super reach A (big hit). Variation patterns PB4-1 to PB4-3 belong to the variation category PB4. The fluctuation pattern PB4-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of super reach A. The variation pattern PB4-2 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of one pseudo-ream and execution of super reach A. The fluctuation pattern PB4-3 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of two pseudo-continuations and execution of super reach A. The variation category PB4 is a group of reach variation patterns that are selected at the time of the big hit and specify the super reach A.

  The variation category PB5 is a variation category of super reach B (big hit). Variation patterns PB5-1 to PB5-3 belong to the variation category PB5. The fluctuation pattern PB5-1 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of super reach B. The fluctuation pattern PB5-2 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach fluctuation pattern that designates execution of one pseudo-series and execution of super reach B. The variation pattern PB5-3 is selected when the variable display result is “big hit”, and is a reach variation pattern that designates execution of two pseudo-continuations and execution of super reach B. The variation category PB5 is a group of reach variation patterns that are selected at the time of a big hit and specify the super reach B.

  In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 12, for example, using the big hit variation category determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in the big hit variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for variation category determination may be assigned to the determination result of the variation category. The CPU 103 is assigned to a decision value that matches the random value MR3 by referring to the jackpot variation category determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation category determination random value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer. The variation category may be determined (selected) as the current variation category. In FIG. 14, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

  In the process of step S263 shown in FIG. 12, for example, the variation category at the time of loss is determined using the variation category determination table for loss shown in FIG. 15 (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance). When the gaming state is the non-short-time state (the short-time flag is OFF), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation category determination table shown in FIG. When the gaming state is the short-time state (the short-time flag is on), the CPU 103 refers to the loss variation category determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in each loss variation category determination table, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random number MR3 for variation category determination may be assigned to the determination result of the variation category. The CPU 103 is assigned to the decision value that matches the random value MR3 by referring to the loss variation category determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation category determination random value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer. The variation category may be determined (selected) as the current variation category. In FIG. 15, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

  In the variation category determination table for loss shown in FIG. 15, it is easy to select the variation category PA1 having a short special symbol variation time in the short-time state. By shortening the display time, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of invalid start winnings, and to reduce the stop of the game ball being fired by the player (so-called “stopping”). Moreover, the execution frequency of variable display can be increased.

  Referring to FIGS. 14 and 15, at the time of big hit, the determination ratio of the fluctuation category PB5 for executing the super reach B is the highest, and the determination ratio is gradually increased in the order of the fluctuation category PB4 of the super reach A and the fluctuation category PB3 of the normal reach. It is low. At the time of a loss, the determination ratio of the fluctuation category for executing the non-reach fluctuation category PA1 or PA2 is the highest, and the normal reach fluctuation category PA3, the super reach A fluctuation category PA4, and the super reach B fluctuation category PA5 are determined in this order. The rate is gradually decreasing. For this reason, when Super Reach B is executed, the variable display result is “big hit” at the highest rate. Then, in the order of super reach A and normal reach, the rate at which the variable display result becomes “big hit” (so-called big hit expectation) decreases.

  In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 12, the change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 16A to 16H (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance) according to the change category determined in step S262 or S263. Is used to determine the variation pattern. If the variation category is PA1, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PA2, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PA3, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PA4, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PA5, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PB3, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PB4, the variation pattern determination table in FIG. If the variation category is PB5, the variation pattern determination table in FIG.

  As an example, in each variation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be assigned to the variation pattern determination result. The CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern from numerical data updated by a random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Then, by referring to the variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the extracted random number value MR4, the variation pattern assigned to the determination value that matches the random value MR4 is determined (selected) as the current variation pattern. That's fine. In FIG. 16, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 16, in this embodiment, when super reach A or B is executed at the time of big hit, the determination rate of the variation pattern of the two pseudo-continuations is high, and the determination rate of the variation pattern of the one pseudo-continuation is the next. The determination rate of the variation pattern of zero pseudo-continuations is the lowest. On the other hand, the opposite is true when losing. In addition, when executing normal reach at the time of big hit, the determination rate of the variation pattern for one pseudo-continuous is high and the determination rate of the variation pattern for zero pseudo-continuous is the lowest. On the other hand, the opposite is true when losing. Further, at the time of non-reach at the time of losing (in the case of the fluctuation category PA2), the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern for one pseudo-series is low. For this reason, the expectation of jackpot is higher when the pseudo-run is executed, and the expectation of jackpot is higher when the number of pseudo-runs is larger.

  After executing the process of step S265, a special figure variation time (also referred to as a variation time), which is a variable symbol variable display time, is set (step S266). The special figure change time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the change of the special symbol in the special figure game until the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special display result) is derived and displayed. It is. As shown in FIG. 13, the special figure fluctuation time is determined in advance corresponding to a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the process of step S265. The special figure change time is set by, for example, setting a timer value corresponding to the special figure change time in a game control process timer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

  Following the process of step S266, a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B are started. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start one of the special symbol games for which the condition is satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting is made to transmit a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Thereby, a special figure game is started. When the CPU 103 starts variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold indicator 25A to display the first special figure hold memory number subtracted by 1 from the first display. You may make it carry out to the hold | maintain indicator 25A (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1). When starting the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold indicator 25B to display the second special figure hold memory number subtracted by one for the second display. You may make it carry out to the holding | maintenance indicator 25B (for example, reduce the number of lighting of LED by 1).

  After executing the process of step S267, in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the special figure display result, the variation pattern determination result, etc., transmission setting of a command (variation start command) at the start of special symbol variation Is performed (step S268). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends the first variation start designation command, the variation pattern designation command ( A command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S265), a display result specifying command (command including EXT data indicating the variable display result determined in step S246), a first special figure reserved memory number specifying command (step S237) The first special figure reserved memory count value decremented by 1 (that is, a command including EXT data indicating the first special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed when the special figure game is started) Configure transmission settings for transmission. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a second variation start designation command, a variation pattern designation command ( A command including EXT data indicating the variation pattern determined in step S265), a display result specifying command (a command including EXT data indicating the variable display result determined in step S246), and a second special figure reserved storage number specifying command (step S233). The second special figure reserved memory count value decremented by 1 (that is, a command including EXT data indicating the second special figure reserved memory number when one reserved memory is consumed when the special figure game is started) Configure transmission settings for transmission.

  After executing the process of step S268, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” (step S269), and the variation pattern setting process is terminated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” in step S269, when the next timer interruption occurs, the special symbol variation process in step S112 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer. Then, when the timer value of the game control process timer (the timer value after subtracting 1) is not 0, the special figure variation time has not elapsed, so control for executing variable display of the special figure game (for example, the first The first special symbol display is performed by updating the display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (control for transmitting a driving signal to appropriately update the display for maintaining the special symbol display for a predetermined time. The same applies hereinafter). In the device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, a process for changing the special symbol is performed, and the special symbol changing process is ended. On the other hand, when the timer value of the game control process timer becomes 0 and the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display The apparatus 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol (the fixed special symbol set in step S110) that is the variable display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display) (the fixed special symbol is a predetermined time). It is good to control so that it is continuously displayed.) When the display is stopped, the symbol confirmation designation command transmission setting is also performed, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “3”. By repeatedly executing step S112 each time a timer interrupt occurs, special symbol variable display, fixed special symbol derivation display, and the like are realized.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 determines whether the big hit flag is on. When the big hit flag is on, the time reduction flag and the probability variation flag are reset (turned off), and the remaining number of variable displays executed in the time reduction state provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (time reduction remaining number) ) Is counted. The count value of the short time counter is counted as “0”. Then, a timer value corresponding to the fanfare waiting time (the waiting time from the start to the end of the fanfare in the big hit gaming state, which is a predetermined time) is set as an initial value in the game control process timer. Then, “15” is set as an initial value in a round number counter provided in the RAM 102 for counting round games. After that, it is set to send a hit start designation command and a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state (in this case, a command for designating the normal state), and the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. The symbol stop process is terminated. Since the gaming state is changed after the big hit gaming state, it is not necessary to transmit the gaming state designation command here.

  When the big hit flag is in the off state, it is determined whether or not the time reduction flag is in the on state. If it is in the on state, “1” is subtracted from the count value of the time reduction number counter. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the count value after subtracting “1” is “0”. If the count value is “0”, the time-short end condition for ending the time-short state is satisfied (that is, Since a predetermined number of variable displays that can be executed in the state has been executed), the time reduction flag is turned off to end the time reduction state. Thereafter, a transmission setting for transmitting a game state designation command (here, a command for designating a highly accurate low base state) is performed based on the current game state. When the time flag is off, the count value after subtracting “1” is not “0”, or after the game state designation command transmission setting, the special process flag value is updated to “0”, etc. Then, the special symbol stop process is finished.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. In this big hit release pre-processing, for example, 1 is subtracted from the timer value of the game control process timer. If the timer value after the subtraction is not “0”, the fanfare waiting time has not yet elapsed, so the big hit release pre-processing ends. When the timer value after subtraction is “0”, the fanfare waiting time has elapsed and the round game start timing has come. In this case, a process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state and opening the grand prize opening (for example, a process of transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door), the big prize opening A process for setting a timer value corresponding to the upper limit (29 seconds in this case) of the period during which the game is opened to the game control process timer is executed. When the process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”. By repeating step S114 every time a timer interrupt occurs, waiting until the start timing of the round game (waiting until the end of the fanfare), opening of the big prize opening, and the like are realized.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This big hit release process includes a process of subtracting 1 from the timer value of the game control process timer, a timer value after 1 subtraction, and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 in one round game (switch Each time the count switch 23 is determined to be in the ON state in the process, the winning prize opening may be changed from the open state to the closed state (or the counter may be counted by a counter (provided in the RAM 102) or the like). Including a process for determining whether or not it is time to return to a partially open state).

  When it is determined that the timer value after decrementing by 1 has reached 0, or the number of detected game balls (count value of the counter) has reached a predetermined number (for example, 9), the big prize opening is closed. Therefore, the process of returning the special winning opening to the closed state (for example, the process of turning off the solenoid 82 by stopping the transmission of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door) Processing to set the timer value corresponding to the winning period closing period (a round game interval period, a preset period) in the game control process timer, or to decrement the count value of the round counter is executed Is done. If the timer value after subtracting 1 does not become 0 and the number of detected game balls has not reached the predetermined number, a process for maintaining the open state of the big prize opening (for example, the solenoid drive signal Etc.), and the process during the big hit release is completed. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”. By repeating step S115 every time a timer interrupt occurs, the open state of the big prize opening is maintained until the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In the processing after the big hit release, there are processing for determining whether or not the count value of the round number counter has become “0”, processing for decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 when it is not “0”, and the like. Done.

  When it is determined that the count value of the round number counter is “0”, it means that the round game has reached the upper limit number of times. Is a waiting time until the end of the game, and a timer value corresponding to a predetermined time is set in the game control process timer. In addition, a setting for transmitting a hit end designation command is performed, and processing for updating the special figure process flag to “7” is also performed.

  When the process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed, it is determined whether the timer value after decrementing by 1 is 0. If not, it is not the start timing of the round game, so the closed state Is maintained, and the processing after the big hit release ends. If it is 0, it is the start timing of the round game, so the timer value corresponding to the upper limit (29 seconds in this case) of the process for opening the big winning opening and the period for opening the big winning opening. A process for setting the game control process timer is executed. When the process for opening the special winning opening is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”.

  Each round game is realized by repeatedly executing S115 and S116 after the big winning opening is opened in step S114 every time a timer interrupt occurs.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the big hit end process, a process of decrementing the timer value of the game control process timer by 1 is performed. If the timer value decremented by 1 is not 0, the ending has not ended, and the jackpot end process is terminated as it is. When the timer value decremented by 1 reaches 0, the ending is completed. Therefore, depending on the big hit type (big hit type buffer setting value) stored in the big hit type buffer, the short time flag, short time counter, probability change flag, etc. Set the state.

  For example, if the big hit type is “probability change”, the time reduction flag and the probability change flag are turned on, and “100” is set as a count initial value in the time reduction counter provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102. If the big hit type is “non-probable change”, only the hour / hour flag is turned on, and “100” is set as the initial count value in the hour / hour counter. In the jackpot end processing, after such setting, a transmission setting for transmitting a gaming state designation command for designating a gaming state corresponding to the setting is performed, and various data such as a gaming control process timer and a jackpot type buffer setting value (next value) The variable is not carried over to the variable display), and the special figure process flag value is updated to “0”.

Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described.
In the effect control board 12, when the supply of power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. When the production control main process is started, the production control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process, clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer mounted on the production control board 12). Circuit) register setting, etc. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not a timer interrupt flag provided in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122 is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, the process waits.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process is executed. In the effect control process, for example, various effects such as an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and the like. With respect to the control content of the rendering operation using the apparatus, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11 are performed. Subsequent to the effect control process, an effect random number update process is performed, and numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter in the RAM 122 is updated by software as various random values used for effect control. Thereafter, it is determined again whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on.

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. In the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a start winning prize command (start opening prize designation command, special figure reserved memory number designation command, symbol designation command, variation category designation command) has been received from the main board 11. (Step S681).

  When the start winning command is received (step S681; Yes), the received command is stored in the start winning command buffer (step S682). When a first start opening winning designation command or a first special figure reserved memory number designation command is received as a start winning command, a start winning command (first starting opening prize designation command, first special figure reserved memory number designation command) , Symbol designation command, variation category designation command) are stored in the first start winning command buffer (provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122). When a second start port winning designation command or a second special figure reserved memory number designation command is received as a start winning command, a start winning command (second start opening prize designation command, second special figure reserved memory number designation command) , Symbol designation command, variation category designation command) is stored in the second start winning command buffer (provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122).

  FIG. 19A shows a configuration example of the first start winning command buffer. The first start winning prize designation command, the first special figure reserved memory number designation command, the symbol designation command, the storage area having the smallest pending display number serving as the buffer number among the empty areas of the command buffer at the time of the first starting prize The variable category designation command is stored in order. A storage area is secured in the first start winning command buffer so that a set of effect control commands (start winning command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the first start winning can be stored in association with each other. Yes. The effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control commands (start prize command) received when the first start prize is generated, according to the reception order, and the hold display numbers “1” to “5” in the first start prize command buffer. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area in the storage area corresponding to "."

  FIG. 19B is a configuration example of the second start winning command buffer. Among the empty areas of the command buffer at the time of the second start winning prize, the second start opening prize specifying command, the second special figure reserved memory number specifying command, the symbol specifying command, The variable category designation command is stored in order. The second start winning command buffer has a storage area so that a set of effect control commands (start winning command) transmitted in response to the occurrence of the second start winning can be stored in association with each other. Yes. The effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control commands (start prize command) received when the second start prize is generated, according to the reception order, and the hold display numbers “1” to “5” in the second start prize command buffer. Are stored in order from the beginning of the empty area in the storage area corresponding to "."

  The symbol designation command “C400 (H)” and the variation category designation command “C600 (H)” in FIG. 19 indicate “no determination” at the time of starting winning. The first special figure reserved memory number designation command “C101 (H)” indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number is one at the time of starting winning. “C102 (H)” of the first special figure reserved memory number designation command indicates that the first special figure reserved memory number is two at the time of starting winning. “C201 (H)” of the second special figure reserved memory number designation command indicates that the second special figure reserved memory number is one at the time of starting winning. “C202 (H)” of the second special figure reserved memory number designation command indicates that the second special figure reserved memory number is two at the time of starting winning. “C203 (H)” of the second special figure reserved memory number designation command indicates that the second special figure reserved memory number is three at the time of starting winning. The symbol designation command “C401 (H)” indicates that the determination result regarding the display result at the time of starting winning is “lost”. The symbol designation command “C402 (H)” indicates that the determination result regarding the display result at the time of starting winning is “big hit”. “C611 (H)” and “C625 (H)” of the variation category designation commands indicate predetermined variation categories corresponding to the EXT data. In FIG. 19, it is determined that the display result of the variable display corresponding to the third hold storage of the second special figure game is “big hit”. In addition, regarding the hold storage of the first special figure game, the determination at the time of starting winning is not performed. For this reason, FIG. 19 exemplifies the contents of the first start prize command buffer and the second start prize command buffer in the time-saving state.

  The start winning command stored in the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer has a one-to-one correspondence with the hold display symbol. Specifically, the hold display number and the display position of the hold display symbol correspond to each other, whereby the start winning command corresponds to the hold display symbol on a one-to-one basis. The hold display number basically corresponds to the hold number in the first and second special figure hold storage units.

  For example, the hold display number “1” in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to the first display position from the left of the first hold display area 5Ha, and the hold display number “2” in the first start winning command buffer. Corresponds to the second display position from the left of the first hold display area 5Ha, and the hold display number “3” in the first start winning command buffer is the third display position from the left of the first hold display area 5Ha. In response to this, the hold display number “4” in the first start winning command buffer corresponds to the fourth display position from the left of the first hold display area 5Ha.

  For example, the hold display number “1” in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the first display position from the left of the second hold display area 5Hb, and the hold display number “2” in the second start winning command buffer. Corresponds to the second display position from the left of the second hold display area 5Hb, and the hold display number “3” in the second start winning command buffer is the third display position from the left of the second hold display area 5Hb. In response, the hold display number “4” in the second start winning command buffer corresponds to the fourth display position from the left of the second hold display area 5Hb.

  For example, when the start winning command is stored in the hold display number “4” of the second start winning command buffer, the hold display symbol is displayed at the fourth display position from the left of the second hold display area 5Hb. At this time, since the start winning command should be stored in the hold display numbers “1” to “3” of the second start winning command buffer, the first to third from the left of the second hold display area 5Hb. A hold display symbol is also displayed at the display position.

  A target flag is provided corresponding to each hold display number in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting win command buffer. As will be described in detail later, the target flag is turned on when the hold display symbol corresponding to the start winning time command corresponding to the flag together with the hold display number is displayed as a target in a special mode or a notice mode.

  In the example of FIG. 19, the hold display symbol corresponding to the start winning command corresponding to the hold display number “3” in the second start winning command buffer is the target, and the display mode of the hold display symbol of this target is It becomes a special mode or a notice mode in the present or future.

  In this embodiment, on the main board 11 side, step S110 (first special figure reserved memory number or second special figure reserved memory number-1), step S101 (first special figure reserved memory number or second special figure reserved memory) There is a possibility that the processing is performed in the order of the stored number +1 and the start winning command transmission), step S111 (variation start command transmission). There is a possibility that there will be five start winning commands stored in the start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer (in this case, the hold display number does not correspond to the hold number). Therefore, in this embodiment, storage areas corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “5” are provided in the first start winning command buffer and the second start winning command buffer. Storage areas corresponding to “1” to “4” and storage areas corresponding to the hold display numbers “1” to “6” or more may be provided.

  After step S682 or when the start winning command is not received (step S681; No), the effect control CPU 120 performs other analysis processing (step S689) and ends the command analysis processing.

  FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a table of processes performed in the command analysis process for each effect control command. In the processing content, S682 indicates that the processing is performed in step S682 described above. Other processing contents are, for example, processing performed in step S689. Each reception flag and each storage area in the table are provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Also, setting the reception flag means turning on.

  When the first special figure reserved memory number designation command is received as the change start command, that is, when the first special figure reserved memory number designation command is received together with the first fluctuation start designation command, the first special figure pending memory number designation command is received. The memory number designation command is stored in the first special figure reserved memory number designation command storage area.

  When receiving the gaming state designation command, the effect control CPU 120 switches the on / off state of the high-accuracy flag and the high base flag based on the contents of the received gaming state designation command. The high-accuracy flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122, and is turned on in response to the probability-changing state. Corresponding to the switching between the state and the off state, the on state and the off state are switched. The high base flag is provided, for example, in a predetermined area (for example, an effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122, and is turned on in response to the short time state. The high time flag on the main board 11 side is turned on. Corresponding to the switching between the state and the off state, the on state and the off state are switched. For example, when the gaming state designation command designates the high-accuracy high-base state (for example, when the probability change flag and the time-short flag are designated to be on), the effect control CPU 120 designates the high-probability flag and the high Both base flags are turned on (if the flag is already on, the on state is maintained. The same applies to the on state and the off state for both flags). When the gaming state designation command specifies the high probability low base state (for example, when the probability variation flag is on and the time reduction flag is off), the high probability flag is turned on and high base Turn off the flag. When the gaming state designation command specifies a low probability low base state (normal state) (for example, when specifying that the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are in an off state), both the high probability flag and the high base flag are set. Turn off. The production control CPU 120 turns on the high-accuracy flag (that is, when the production mode changes to the probability change mode) or turns off the high-accuracy flag (that is, the production mode changes to the normal mode). When a display control command is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123, the currently displayed hold display symbol is changed to a shape (square mark or circle mark) corresponding to the effect mode. change.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 20, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a hold display setting process (step S162).

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the hold display setting process. In the hold display setting process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first checks the first start prize command buffer and the second start prize command buffer (step S501), and receives a new received command (start prize command). ) Is stored in the storage area corresponding to any of the hold display numbers “1” to “4” (step S502). If a new received command is not stored (step S502; No), the hold display setting process is terminated.

  When a new received command (start winning prize command) is stored in the storage area corresponding to any of the hold display numbers “1” to “4” (step S502; Yes), it is included in the received command. It is determined whether the symbol designation command and the variation category designation command are those for designating “no judgment” at the time of starting winning (step S503).

  If “no determination” is not designated (step S503; No), the hold display symbol is currently displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode, or the hold display symbol scheduled to be changed to a display mode other than the normal mode is currently It is determined whether it is displayed (step S504). This determination may be made, for example, by checking the state of the target flag provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Since the target flag is turned on when the display mode of the held display symbol is changed to a display mode other than the normal mode at present or in the future, if there is a target flag in the on state, the display mode other than the normal mode is displayed. It can be determined that the hold display symbol is currently displayed, or that the hold display symbol scheduled to be changed to a display mode other than the normal mode is currently displayed.

  Since all the target flags are in the off state, etc., the hold display design is not currently displayed in a display mode other than the normal mode, and the hold display design to be changed to a display mode other than the normal mode is currently displayed. If there is not (step S504; No), whether or not three or more start winning commands are stored in a buffer in which new received commands are stored in the first start winning command buffer and the second starting winning command buffer It is determined (whether the number of reserved memories is 3 or more) (step S505).

  When three or more start winning commands are stored (step S505; Yes), a hold display pattern is determined (step S506).

  Here, the hold display symbol will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, the on-hold display symbols are continuously displayed with different modes (shapes) depending on the production mode. Here, in the normal mode, the hold display symbol is a circle (FIG. 22A), and in the probability variation mode, the hold display symbol is a square mark (FIG. 22B).

  Moreover, there are a normal mode (blue), a special mode (white and gray), and a notice mode (yellow, green, red, and rainbow) as the display mode (display color here) of the hold display symbol (FIG. 23). reference). Among the notice modes, yellow is set with a low expectation degree for jackpot. For example, when the reserved display symbol is yellow at the end, the big hit expectation is low. Among the notice modes, the green color is set to have a big hit expectation degree. For example, when the hold display symbol is green at the end, the big hit expectation is medium. Among the notice modes, red is set to have a high expectation degree for jackpot. For example, when the reserved display symbol is red at the end, the big hit expectation is high. Among the notice modes, red is set to have a high expectation degree for jackpot. For example, when the reserved display symbol is red at the end, the big hit expectation is high.

  In addition, when three or more start winning commands are stored in the same start winning command buffer (when the first special figure hold memory number or the second special figure hold memory number is three or more), the hold display symbol The display mode of (target) may change. The change of the display mode is performed over a plurality of variable display of decorative symbols.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24A, when the third start winning command is stored in the same start winning command buffer (that is, three in the first special figure or the second special figure). The next variable display (next variation) and the next variable display (next variation) of the decorative display variable display (which may be a special game) executed at the time of occurrence) The display mode of the hold display symbol corresponding to the third start winning command (the target and the display position is shifted to the left each time the variable display is executed) can be changed. Moreover, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the target is executed, the display mode of the hold display symbol (target) displayed in the current display area 5Hc (see FIG. 53 and the like) is also changed. Can do.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 24B, when the fourth start winning command is stored in the same start winning command buffer (that is, four in the first special figure or the second special figure). When the eye hold memory occurs), the next variable display (next variation), the next variable display (next variation) of the variable display of the decorative design (which may be a special game) executed at the time of occurrence In the next variable display (next-order fluctuation), the hold display symbol corresponding to the fourth start winning command (the target, the display position is shifted to the left each time the variable display is executed) The display mode can be changed. Moreover, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the target is executed, the display mode of the hold display symbol (target) displayed in the current display area 5Hc (see FIG. 53 and the like) is also changed. Can do.

  In step S506, the display mode pattern (holding display pattern) of the holding display symbol (target) at the start of target display (at the time of the hold), the next change, the next change, and the next change is determined. In step S506, the hold display pattern is determined with reference to any hold display pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 25 to 44 in accordance with the effect mode, the hold storage number when the hold occurs, and the variation category.

  When the production mode is the normal mode and the target is the third hold memory (that is, when the third hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs), the variable category is the variable category PA1. Alternatively, when it is PA2, the pending display pattern determination table of FIG. 25 is referred to, and when the variation category is the variation category PA3, the suspension display pattern determination table of FIG. 26 is referred to and the variation category is the variation category PA4 or PA5. In some cases, the hold display pattern determination table in FIG. 27 is referred to. When the variation category is the change category PB3, the hold display pattern determination table in FIG. 28 is referred to. When the change category is the change category PB4 or PB5, Refer to the pending display pattern determination table.

  When the production mode is the probability change mode and the target is the third hold memory (that is, when the third hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs), the fluctuation category is the fluctuation category PA1. Alternatively, when it is PA2, the pending display pattern determination table of FIG. 30 is referred to. When the variation category is the variation category PA3, the suspension display pattern determination table of FIG. 31 is referred to, and the variation category is the variation category PA4 or PA5. In some cases, the hold display pattern determination table in FIG. 32 is referred to. When the change category is the change category PB3, the hold display pattern determination table in FIG. 33 is referred to, and when the change category is the change category PB4 or PB5. Refer to the pending display pattern determination table.

  When the production mode is the normal mode and the target is the fourth hold memory (that is, when the fourth hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs), the variable category is the variable category PA1. Or, when it is PA2, the pending display pattern determination table of FIG. 35 is referred to. When the variation category is the variation category PA3, the suspension display pattern determination table of FIG. 36 is referenced, and the variation category is the variation category PA4 or PA5. In some cases, the hold display pattern determination table of FIG. 37 is referred to. When the change category is the change category PB3, the hold display pattern determination table of FIG. 38 is referred to, and when the change category is the change category PB4 or PB5, FIG. Refer to the pending display pattern determination table.

  When the effect mode is the probability change mode and the target is the fourth hold memory (that is, when the fourth hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs), the fluctuation category is the fluctuation category PA1. Alternatively, when it is PA2, the pending display pattern determination table of FIG. 40 is referred to. When the variation category is the variation category PA3, the suspension display pattern determination table of FIG. 41 is referred to, and the variation category is the variation category PA4 or PA5. Sometimes, referring to the hold display pattern determination table of FIG. 42, when the variation category is the change category PB3, reference is made to the hold display pattern determination table of FIG. 43, and when the change category is the change category PB4 or PB5, FIG. Refer to the pending display pattern determination table.

  Each hold display pattern determination table is stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121. The effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the hold display pattern determining random value SR1 updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter. In the hold display pattern determination table, a determination value to be compared with the random value SR1 is assigned to each hold display pattern as a determination result. The effect control CPU 120 refers to any of the hold display pattern determination tables of FIGS. 25 to 44, and displays the hold display pattern assigned to the determined value that matches the random value SR1 for hold display pattern determination. Determine (select) the display pattern. In each figure, the determination ratio of each holding display pattern is described instead of the determination value assigned to each holding display pattern.

  The color described in the column of the occurrence of hold in FIGS. 25 to 44 is the display color of the hold display symbol at the start of displaying the hold display symbol of the target (when the hold storage of the target occurs). The color described in the next variation column is the display color of the reserved display symbol in the next variation. The color described in the column of the secondary variation is the display color of the hold display symbol in the secondary variation. The color described in the column of the secondary fluctuation is the display color of the reserved display symbol in the secondary fluctuation. A column including an arrow indicates that the display color changes. For example, in H3-7, the display color of the reserved display symbol changes from blue to white in the next change. If only one color is listed, it also indicates that the display color does not change.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, there is a hold display pattern (H3-1, H3-4, etc.) in which the blue color, which is the normal mode, does not change from when the hold occurs. When this hold display pattern is selected, the display mode of the target hold display pattern remains in the normal mode and does not change until execution of variable display corresponding to the target.

  The determination ratio in each hold display pattern determination table can be arbitrarily set. However, for the hold display pattern in which the display color of the hold display symbol in the last change column in each hold display pattern (the display color after change when changed) is yellow, green, or red, the jackpot expectation is The determination ratio is set so that yellow is the lowest, green is the next lowest, and red is the highest. For example, in the case of the fluctuation categories PA4, PA5, PB4, and PB5 (may be only in the case of the fluctuation categories PB4 and PB5), the display color of the hold display symbol in the last change column is red. Set the decision ratio so that the pattern, green hold display pattern, and yellow hold display pattern can be selected in this order. Otherwise (in the case of the loss variation category), the last change display is displayed. The determination ratio may be set so that the display color of the symbol is easily selected in the order of the hold display pattern that becomes yellow, the hold display pattern that becomes green, and the hold display pattern that becomes red. The last fluctuation is a secondary fluctuation when the target is the third pending storage, and a secondary fluctuation when the target is the fourth. The display color of the reserved display symbol in the last variation column (the display color after the change if changed) is hereinafter referred to as the final color. The final color is also the last color of the hold display symbol displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha or the second hold display area 5Hb. In the hold display pattern determination table referred to in the case of the variation categories PA4, PA5, PB4, and PB5, there are relatively many hold display patterns whose final color is red or green, and the hold display whose final color is yellow. Since there are relatively few display patterns, basically, the red or green jackpot expectation is high. In addition, since the final color can be red only in the case of the variation categories PA4, PA5, PB4, and PB5, the big hit expectation degree of red is higher than that of yellow or green (the change categories PA4, PA5, PB4). , Because the big hit expectation degree when PB5 is selected is higher than the big hit expectation degree when other variable categories are selected).

  Note that the hold display pattern (J3-48 or the like) in which the final color is rainbow is only when the display result of the variable display of the target is a big hit (that is, when the variation category is the variation categories PB4 and PB5). ) Can be selected. For this reason, when the final color is rainbow, the target is determined to be a big hit.

  The determination ratio in each hold display pattern determination table is a hold display pattern (H3-2, H3-5, H3-7, etc.) including a pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode (yellow, green, red, rainbow) ) Is set higher than the hold display patterns (H3-7, H3-9, etc.) that include a mode in which the display color changes from white to the notice mode. For example, in each hold display pattern determination table, the display color of the notice mode from white is set to be higher than the determination ratio (total value or average value, hereinafter the same as appropriate) of the hold display pattern including the pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode. The determination ratio of the hold display pattern including the aspect that changes to be higher. In addition, the determination ratio in each hold display pattern determination table is from gray to the notice mode rather than the hold display patterns (H3-2, H3-5, H3-7, etc.) including the pattern that changes from blue to the notice color. The hold display pattern (H3-11, H3-12, etc.) including an aspect that changes to the display color is set so that it is easier to select. For example, in each hold display pattern determination table, determination of a hold display pattern including an aspect that changes from gray to the display color of the notice mode rather than a determination ratio of the hold display pattern that includes a pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode Make the percentage higher. As a result, when the hold display symbol is in a special mode, it becomes easier to change to a notice mode than in the normal mode.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, there is a hold display pattern (such as H3-3) in which the display color of the hold display symbol does not change in white since the occurrence of the hold. There is no hold display pattern in which the display color of the symbol remains gray since the time of the hold occurrence. For this reason, even if it is the same special aspect, when the display color is white and when it is gray, the ratio which changes to another display color will differ.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, the hold display pattern (H3-19, H3-20, J3-48) in which the display color of the hold display symbol changes from gray to red or iridescent. Etc.), but there is no hold display pattern that changes from white to red or rainbow. For this reason, even if it is the same special mode, when the display color is white and when it is gray, the selection ratio for changing to another display color is different.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, after the display color of the hold display symbol changes from yellow to gray, the hold from which the changed gray changes to green, red, or rainbow color. There are display patterns (H3-40, H3-47, H3-48, etc.). In addition, after the display color of the hold display symbol changes from green to gray, a hold display pattern (K3-41, K3-42, K3-51, etc.) that changes from the changed gray to green, red, or iridescent is displayed. is there. For this reason, the display mode of the hold display symbol may change from a display mode that can change from the special mode to the special mode, and may change from the special mode to another display mode. And especially the notice mode after changing from a special mode turns into a notice mode in which a big hit expectation is the same or becomes high compared with the mode of notice before change.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, when the target is the fourth hold memory, when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes to white or gray in the next change. Although the final display color is only green (K3-7, K3-11, K3-19, etc.), when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes to gray in the next change, the final display color is red in addition to green. And rainbow colors (K3-13, K3-14, K3-15, K3-22, K3-23, etc.). For this reason, the big hit expectation degree differs according to the timing when the display mode of the hold display symbol becomes the special mode.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, when the target is the fourth hold memory, the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from white or gray in the next-order fluctuation. Sometimes the final display color can be changed to red and iridescent (K3-42, K3-49 to 51, etc.), but when the display mode of the reserved display symbol changes from gray in the next change, the final display color is red or It does not become iridescent (K3-9, K3-18, K3-20, etc.). For this reason, the jackpot expectation differs depending on the timing when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from the special mode.

  The determination ratio in each hold display pattern determination table is the case where the target is the third hold memory (that is, when the third hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs) and the target Is the 4th hold memory (that is, when the 4th hold memory in the 1st special figure or the 2nd special figure occurs), and the hold display pattern becomes a special display form. The determination ratio (average value or total value of determination ratios of the hold display pattern) may be set differently. As a result, the appearance rate of the special mode can be changed according to the reserved storage.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, when the effect mode is the normal mode, the display color of the hold display symbol may be white (H3-3, H3-5, etc.). When the effect mode is the probability change mode, the display color of the hold display symbol is not white. In this way, the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display symbol to the special mode (here, white) is changed according to the effect mode.

  As can be seen with reference to FIGS. 25 to 44, in this embodiment, the display color of the hold display symbol is not changed from white at the start of display (at the time of hold occurrence) to white, such as H3-3. , Selected only in the variation categories PA1 and PA2 selected at the time of losing. On the other hand, the hold display pattern (H3-1, H3-4, etc.) whose final color is blue may be selected when the variation category PB3 is selected at the time of big hit. For this reason, the big hit expectation when the display mode of the reserved display symbol is changed from the beginning to the special mode is lower than when the final color of the held display symbol is set to the normal mode (expected big hit expectation = 0). In particular, when a hold display pattern that does not change the display color of the hold display symbol to white from the start of display is selected, the variable display of the target is not in a reach mode.

  After step S506, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the hold display pattern determined in step S506 does not change the display color of the hold display symbol from the start of display (when the hold occurs) to blue (normal mode) (H3-1). Etc.) (step S507).

  When the display color of the hold display symbol is not changed from the display start time (at the time of hold occurrence) to blue (normal mode) (step S507; No), the setting corresponding to the determined hold display pattern is set to the target flag and the notice buffer. (Step S508). Specifically, the target flag corresponding to a new received command (start winning command) is turned on (by this, the display mode of the corresponding on-hold display symbol can be other than the normal mode) and selected. The contents of the hold display pattern are stored in a notice buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. As shown in FIG. 45, the notice buffer stores the contents of the hold display pattern for each change. The contents of the stored display pattern to be stored may be the display color, the display color before and after the change, or the like. When the display color is not changed in a certain change, the storage area corresponding to the change may be blank (empty). The notice buffer may be set so that the content of the hold display pattern can be understood by looking at the notice buffer.

  After step S508, it is determined whether or not the current effect mode is the probability variation mode (step S509). Whether or not the mode is the probability variation mode may be determined based on whether or not the high-accuracy flag is in an on state. When the high-accuracy flag is off, the current effect mode is the normal mode (step S509; No), so the effect control CPU 120 displays the display color (when the display starts at the start of display) of the determined hold display pattern. The display of the hold display symbol is started with the display color) and the normal mode shape (circle shape) (step S510). The effect control CPU 120 displays a hold display symbol at a display position corresponding to a hold display number corresponding to a new received command by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Start that.

  When the high-accuracy flag is on, the current effect mode is the probability-changing mode (step S509; Yes), so the effect-control CPU 120 displays the display color (when the display starts at the time of display start) in the determined hold display pattern. The display of the hold display symbol is started with the display color) and the shape for the probability variation mode (square mark shape) (step S511). The effect control CPU 120 displays a hold display symbol at a display position corresponding to a hold display number corresponding to a new received command by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Start that.

  If the symbol designating command and the variable category designating command specify “no judgment” (step S503; Yes), the target flag may be in an on state, etc. When any one of the display modes is a display mode other than the normal mode or is scheduled to become a display mode other than the normal mode (step S504; Yes), when three or more start winning prize commands are not stored ( Step S505; No), when the display color of the hold display symbol is a pattern that does not change from the display start time (when the hold occurs) to the blue color (normal mode) (Step S507; Yes), the display mode of the hold display symbol is normal In order not to make it other than the aspect, the CPU 120 for effect control has a display color of blue (normal aspect) and a display of the reserved display symbol. The start (step S512). At this time, if it is currently in the probability variation mode, the hold display symbol is displayed in the shape for the probability variation mode (the shape of the square mark). If the current mode is the normal mode, the hold display symbol is displayed in the normal mode shape (circle shape). The effect control CPU 120 displays a hold display symbol at a display position corresponding to a hold display number corresponding to a new received command by transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Start that.

  If any one of the currently displayed hold display symbols is in a display mode other than the normal mode or is scheduled to be in a display mode other than the normal mode (step S504; Yes), the hold display symbol is displayed. Includes the case that is or is scheduled to become a notice mode. In this way, during the execution period of the pre-reading notice for the hold display design other than the target display display target this time (including the period from the decision to execute the pre-reading notice to the execution of the pre-reading notice) Compared to other cases, the ratio of the display mode of the hold display symbol to the special mode or the notification mode is different.

  Returning to FIG. 20, after step S <b> 162, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the value of the effect process flag (initially “0”) provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) of the RAM 122. Thus, any one of the following processes in steps S170 to S175 is selected and executed.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process is based on whether or not the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command from the main board 11 is received (whether or not each reception flag is in an ON state). Based on this, it includes processing for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5. When the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is received and it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbols on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”. Is done. In other cases, the variable display start waiting process is terminated without updating the value of the effect process flag.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first displays the special figure display result based on, for example, a display result designation command (command stored in the display result designation command storage area) transmitted from the main board 11. Is determined to be “lost” (step S521). When it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S521; Yes), for example, a variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (a command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area). Whether or not the variation pattern specified by the item is a non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1, PA2-1, PA2-2) corresponding to the case of “non-reach” in which the variable display mode of the decorative design is not the reach mode. Is determined (step S522).

  If it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a decorative symbol of a non-reach combination updated by a random counter for performance provided in a predetermined area of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122 is extracted. Then, by referring to a non-reach combination decoration design determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, a finalized design (non-reach combination decoration design) is determined.

  When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of a confirmed decorative symbol that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating random values for determining a decorative combination of a reach combination updated by the random number circuit 124 or an effect random counter is extracted and stored in the ROM 121 in advance. For example, the determined decorative design (the decorative design of the reach combination) is determined by referring to the decorative design determination table of the reach combination.

  When it is determined in step S521 that the special figure display result is not “losing” (step S521; No), the combination of the confirmed decorative symbols that are the final stop symbols constituting the jackpot combination is determined (step S525). As an example, in the process of step S525, first, numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the jackpot determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted. Subsequently, for example, by referring to the jackpot determination symbol determination table prepared and stored in advance in the ROM 121 in accordance with the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11, the image display device 5. The decorative symbols with the same symbol number that are stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are determined.

  After steps S523, S524, and S525, the effect control CPU 120 executes effect control pattern setting processing (step S530). FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control pattern setting process. In the effect control pattern setting process, the effect control CPU 120 reads the start winning command from the start winning command buffer (step S701). When the first symbol variation start designation command is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 receives the start winning command corresponding to the highest “1” among the hold display numbers in the first start winning command buffer. Read the state of the target flag. When the second symbol variation start designation command is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 starts the winning prize command corresponding to the highest “1” among the hold display numbers in the second starting prize command buffer. Read the state of the target flag.

  Next, data of the contents of the hold display pattern stored corresponding to the next change is read from the notice buffer (if blank, nothing is read if no contents are stored in the notice buffer) (step S702). ).

  Next, following step S702, the effect control CPU 120 shifts the stored contents of the start winning command buffer from which the start winning command is read out one by one in step S703. Specifically, the start winning command and the target flag state stored corresponding to the hold display numbers “2” to “5” are shifted to the hold display numbers “1” to “4”, respectively. In step S703, the effect control CPU 120 stores data corresponding to the next change and the next change in the notice buffer in correspondence with the next change and the next change, respectively. In addition, when the data of the content of the hold display pattern is not stored in the notice buffer, the shift may not be performed.

  The effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the notice effect after step S703 (step S704). In step S704, the effect control CPU 120 first extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR2 for determining the notice effect execution that is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, etc., and notifies based on the extracted numerical data. With reference to the effect execution determination table (stored in advance in a predetermined area of the ROM 121), the presence / absence of the execution of the advancement effect and the type of the advancement effect in the case of execution are determined. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the notice effect execution determination table of FIG. 48A when the special figure display result is “lost”. When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the notice effect execution determination table in FIG. 48B is referred to. In the notice effect execution determination table, a determination value to be compared with the random value SR2 is assigned to each of the determination results of no execution, notice effect A, and notice effect B. The effect control CPU 120 determines that the notice effect is not executed when the determined value that matches the random value SR2 is assigned to “no execution”, and the determined value that matches the random value SR2 is “notice effect A”. If it is assigned to, it is determined that the notice effect A is to be executed, and if the determined value that matches the random number SR2 is assigned to “notice effect B”, it is determined that the notice effect B is to be executed. In FIG. 48, the determination ratio is described in place of the determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 48, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio of the notice effect B is the highest, the determination ratio of the notice effect A is the next highest, and the determination ratio of no execution is the lowest. When the special figure display result is “losing”, the reverse is true. Therefore, when the notice effect B is executed, the big hit expectation is high, and when the notice effect A is executed, the big hit expectation is higher than when the notice effect is not executed.

  After step S704, it is determined whether the data read from the notice buffer in step S702 is data that changes the display mode of the held display symbol ((change color before and after display)) (step S705). If it is data of the contents to be changed (step S705; No), it is determined whether or not the notice effect is to be executed (step S706) If the notice effect is to be executed (step S706; Yes), the action effect is not held It is determined to change the display mode of the display symbol (step S707).

  When the notice effect is not executed (step S706; No), it is determined whether or not the effect effect is executed (step S708). In step S708, the effect control CPU 120 first extracts numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the effect of execution, which is updated by the random number circuit 124, the effect random counter, or the like, and operates based on the extracted numerical data. With reference to the effect execution determination table (stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121 in advance), the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect and the type of effect effect in the case of execution are determined. The effect control CPU 120 refers to the action effect execution determination table of FIG. 49A when the special figure display result is “lost”. When the special figure display result is “big hit”, the action effect execution determination table of FIG. 49 (B) is referred to. In the action effect execution determination table, determination values to be compared with the random value SR3 are assigned to the determination results of no execution, action effect A, and action effect B, respectively. When the determined value that matches the random value SR3 is assigned “no execution”, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the effect, and the determined value that matches the random value SR3 is “action effect A”. If the action effect A is determined to be executed, the action effect B is determined to be executed if the determined value that matches the random value SR2 is assigned to the “action effect B”. In FIG. 49, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 49, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio of the action effect B is high, the determination ratio of the action effect A is the next highest, and the determination ratio of no execution is the lowest. When the special figure display result is “losing”, the reverse is true. For this reason, when the action effect B is executed, the big hit expectation degree is high, and when the action effect A is executed, the big hit expectation degree is higher than when the action effect is not executed. That is, the big hit expectation differs depending on the type of action effect.

  If the data read from the advance notice buffer in step S702 is not data (the display color before and after the change) that changes the display mode of the hold display symbol (including the case where no data is stored in the advance notice buffer). .) (Step S705; No) determines whether the target flag read in Step S701 is on (Step S709), and if it is on (Step S710; Yes), it is executed this time. Whether or not the current hold notice is executed is determined for the hold display symbol displayed in the current hold area 5Hc corresponding to the variable display (step S710).

  In step S710, the change display pattern (first hold display area 5Ha (first special figure game of the first special game) corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command and the start winning time command corresponding to the hold data to be digested this time. In the case of execution) or in the second hold display area 5Hb (in the case of execution of the second special figure game), the display mode (the hold display symbol displayed at the leftmost display position) of the current hold display symbol Whether or not to execute the current hold notice is determined on the basis of the current color). Specifically, using a correspondence table (previously stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 121) as shown in FIG. 50, a reference table (previously stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 121) corresponding to the variation pattern and the current color. And the presence or absence of execution of the hold notice this time is determined with reference to the specified reference table.

  In FIG. 50, a row is a variation pattern and a column is a current color. In FIG. 50, the reference table of the table name described in the column where the row corresponding to the current variation pattern and the column corresponding to the current current color intersect is used as the reference table referred to this time. For example, if the current variation pattern is PB5-3 and the current current color is red, the reference table TA7 is specified (selected) as a reference table to be referred to this time. Note that “-” in FIG. 50 indicates that there is no combination of the current variation pattern and the current color in this column.

  Each reference table is shown in FIG. In each table, a determination value to be compared with the random number SR4 for determining the current hold notice execution is assigned to each determination result of no change and each display color after the change. When the reference table to be referred to is specified, the effect control CPU 120 extracts numerical data indicating the random value SR4 updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter, and is specified above based on the extracted numerical data. With reference to the reference table, the presence / absence of execution of the pending notice is determined. The CPU 120 for effect control refers to the reference table identified above, and when the determined value that matches the random value SR2 is assigned “no change”, the on-hold display symbol displayed in the current display area 5Hc. When it is determined that the display color is not changed (that is, the reservation notice is not executed this time) and the determined value that matches the random number SR4 is assigned to each display color such as “green”, the assigned display color is set. Then, it is determined to change the display color of the hold display symbol (current color hold display symbol) displayed in the current display area 5Hc (that is, to execute the hold display advance notice for changing to the assigned display color). In FIG. 51, the determination ratio is described instead of the determination value.

  Referring to FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, the current color is low in the big hit expectation even though the fluctuation pattern is high in the big hit expectation (for example, one specifying super reach or two pseudo-reams). (For example, in the case of a combination of PB5-3 and red, etc.), a reference table (for example, reference table TA-) having a high determination ratio for changing the display color of the held display symbol to a color with a high expectation degree of jackpot. 4 etc.) will be referred to. Thus, in this embodiment, if the current variation pattern has a high jackpot expectation, if the current color of this time is low in the big hit expectation, the current hold notice is executed and the hold display symbol is displayed. It is easy to change the display color to a color with a high expectation level for jackpots.

  Further, in this embodiment, when the current current color is white, the reference table TA-1 is referred to. Since all the determination values of the reference table TA-1 are assigned to “no change”, in this case, the current hold notice is not executed. In other words, when the hold display symbols displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb are in a special mode, the display mode may change to another display mode (see the hold display pattern). When the displayed hold display symbol is in a special mode, it does not change to another display mode. As described above, in this embodiment, when the special-type hold display symbol is displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb, and when it is displayed in the current display area 5Hc. Thus, the display mode changes to another display mode at a different rate (here, one rate is “0”).

  After step S708, after step S707, after step S710, or when it is determined in step S709 that the target flag is off (step S709; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines as determined above. An effect control pattern corresponding to the content is set as a usage pattern to be used this time (step S711). Here, for example, an effect control pattern is prepared for each action effect, a change in display color of the hold display symbol, and a variable display effect (reach effect, variable display effect, or notice effect), and these effect control patterns are appropriately set in step S711. They may be combined and set as one production control pattern.

  In step S711, for example, when it is determined that the action effect A or B is to be executed, the action effect A or B is executed. An effect control pattern for changing the display mode is set. For example, when it is determined to execute the notice effect A or B, an effect control pattern for executing the notice effect A or B is set. When it is determined to execute the current hold notice, an effect control pattern for executing the current hold notice to be changed to the determined display color is set.

  The effect control pattern that is set is an effect control pattern that executes a variable display of a decorative pattern with a change pattern specified by a change pattern specifying command, and an effect that executes an effect during variable display of contents according to the effect mode. It is also a control pattern.

  The effect control pattern to be set is the first hold display area 5Ha (when the first change start specifying command is received because the first change start specifying command reception flag is on) or the second hold. Displayed in the leftmost display position of the hold display symbols displayed in the display area 5Hb (when the second variation start designation command reception flag is received because the second variation start designation command reception flag is in an ON state or the like). When the hold display symbol that has been displayed is moved and displayed in the current display area 5Hc, and the hold display symbol is displayed at another display position in the same hold display area, the hold display symbol is moved to the left one display position. It is also a thing to move and display. This moving display is performed at the time of disclosing the variable display of decorative symbols. In the case of the moving display of the hold display symbol, the display mode is maintained. However, if the content read from the notice buffer in step S702 changes the display mode of the hold display symbol, the content is displayed. Accordingly, when the display is moved, the display color of the hold display symbol is changed to the display color after the change indicated by the content.

  Returning to FIG. 46, after step S530, the effect control CPU 120, for example, corresponds to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 ( An initial value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set (step S531).

  Then, a setting for starting the variation of the decorative design or the like in the image display device 5 (a start setting for effect operation control) is performed (step S533). At this time, for example, the display control unit 123 is controlled based on the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined (set) as the use pattern in step S530, and the “left” provided in the display area of the image display device 5 is controlled. ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be changed. At this time, the movement display of the hold display symbols is also started. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S536), and the variable display start setting process ends.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variable display effect process. In the effect processing during variable display, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time (special drawing change time) corresponding to the change pattern has elapsed, based on the timer value of the effect control process timer, for example. (Step S551). As an example, in the process of step S551, the timer value of the production control process timer is decremented by 1, and it is determined whether or not the data associated with the process timer determination value that is the same value as the timer value decremented by 1 is an end code. By doing so, it is determined whether the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed.

  If it is not the end code, that is, if the special figure fluctuation time has not elapsed (step S551; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present is the notice effect execution period for executing the notice effect. (Step S552). The said period should just be predetermined in the production | presentation control pattern used as a use pattern. The notice effect execution period is indicated by the fact that the data corresponding to the process timer judgment value of the same value as the timer value of the effect control process timer (data included in the effect control pattern) indicates the notice effect execution period. Is determined (step S552; Yes), effect operation control for executing the notice effect is performed (step S553). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the notice effect associated with the process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the effect control process timer in the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) for execution, the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the production image on the image display device 5, or the audio control board. 13 outputs sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals), and turns on the game effect lamps 9 and decoration LEDs by outputting commands (lighting signals) to the lamp control board 14. Production operation control such as turning off / flashing is performed. By executing step S553 repeatedly for each timer interruption, execution of the notice effect is realized.

  After step S553, if it is not the advance notice execution period (step S552; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present hold notice execution period is for executing the current hold notice (step S554). ). The said period should just be predetermined in the production | presentation control pattern used as a use pattern. This pending advance notice execution period, for example, indicating that the data corresponding to the process timer judgment value of the same value as the production control process timer value (data included in the presentation control pattern) is the current pending advance notice execution period. When it is determined that it is (step S554; Yes), the presentation operation control for executing the current hold notice is performed (step S555). For example, the CPU 120 for effect control presently holds the current hold notice associated with the process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the effect control process timer in the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) for executing the image, the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the production image on the image display device 5, or the audio control is performed. Sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are turned on by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14. / Performs production control such as turning off / flashing. By repeatedly executing step S555 for each timer interrupt, execution of the current hold notice is realized.

  After step S554, if it is not the current hold notice execution period (step S554; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present is the action effect execution period for executing the action effect (step S554). . The said period should just be predetermined in the production | presentation control pattern used as a use pattern. The action effect execution period is indicated by the fact that the data corresponding to the process timer judgment value having the same value as the timer value of the effect control process timer (data included in the effect control pattern) is the action effect execution period. If it is determined (step S554; Yes), effect operation control for executing the effect effect is performed (step S555). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the action effect associated with the process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the effect control process timer in the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) for execution, the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the production image on the image display device 5, or the audio control board. 13 outputs sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals), and turns on the game effect lamps 9 and decoration LEDs by outputting commands (lighting signals) to the lamp control board 14. Production operation control such as turning off / flashing is performed. Execution of the effect is realized by repeatedly executing step S557 for each timer interruption.

  After step S557, when it is not the action effect execution period (step S556; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the present is the reach effect execution period for executing the reach effect (step S558). The said period should just be predetermined in the production | presentation control pattern used as a use pattern. The reach effect execution period is indicated by the fact that the data corresponding to the process timer judgment value having the same value as the timer value of the effect control process timer (data included in the effect control pattern) represents the reach effect execution period. If it is determined (step S558; Yes), the production operation control for executing the reach production is performed (step S559). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the reach effect associated with the process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the effect control process timer in the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) for execution, the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the production image on the image display device 5, or the audio control board. 13 outputs sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals), and turns on the game effect lamps 9 and decoration LEDs by outputting commands (lighting signals) to the lamp control board 14. Production operation control such as turning off / flashing is performed. By executing step S559 repeatedly for each timer interruption, execution of reach production is realized.

  After step S559, when it is determined that it is not the reach production execution period (step S558; No), other production operation control is performed (step S560). For example, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect control execution associated with a process timer determination value that is the same as the timer value of the effect control process timer in the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.), the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the effect image on the image display device 5, and the sound control board 13 is instructed (sound effect signal). ) To output sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and to turn on / off / flash the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Perform motion control. By repeatedly executing step S560 for each timer interruption, execution of other effects (for example, a variable display operation of decorative symbols, a moving display of a pending display advance notice, etc.) is realized. After step S560, the effect process during variable display ends.

  When the data corresponding to the timer value decremented by 1 in the process of step S551 is an end code, and the special figure variation time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols (also a special figure game) (step S551; Yes) ), It is determined whether or not a symbol confirmation designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S561). At this time, if the symbol confirmation designation command is not received (step S561; No), the variable display effect process is terminated and waits. If the predetermined time has passed without receiving the symbol confirmation designation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is performed in response to the failure to receive the symbol confirmation designation command normally. It may be executed.

  If a symbol confirmation designation command is received in step S863 (step S863; Yes), for example, a variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 is performed. Then, control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (determined ornament symbol) (determined ornament symbol of the combination determined in step S171) that becomes the variable display result in step S562. At this time, a timer value corresponding to the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set in the effect control process timer (step S563). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S564), and the variable display effect process is terminated.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special chart waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command has been received, for example. When it is determined that the hit start designation command has been received, the effect control pattern for executing the effect corresponding to the big hit gaming state is selected as the use pattern, and further, the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern is executed. A timer initial value corresponding to the time is set in the effect control process timer. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4”.

  If it is determined that no hit start designation command has been received, the timer value of the effect control process timer is decremented by 1. If the timer value obtained by decrementing by 1 is not 0, the special figure waiting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the timer value obtained by subtracting 1 is 0 (when the hit start designation command reception waiting time has elapsed), it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “losing”, and the effect process Update the value of the flag to the initial value “0” (At this time, each reception flag, data stored in each storage area, etc. (things that you do not want to carry over to the next variable display) are reset as appropriate) .

  The hitting process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this hit process, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the timer value of the effect control process timer by 1, and the same value as the timer value after subtracting 1 from the data included in the effect control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, etc.) associated with the process timer determination value, the display control unit 123 is controlled to produce the production image on the image display device 5. Displaying or outputting sound or sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and game effect lamps by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 9 and effect operation control such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the decoration LED. By repeatedly executing step S174 for each timer interruption, the execution corresponding to the big hit gaming state (for example, an effect including fanfare and excluding ending) is realized. In the hit processing, it is further determined whether or not a hit end designation command has been received. If no hit end designation command has been received, all round games have not ended, so the value of the effect control process flag should be updated. The process is terminated without hitting. Further, when the winning end designation command is received, all the round games are ended, and therefore the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to step S175 in order to start the ending effect. Update to 5 ". At the time of this update, an effect control pattern for executing ending is selected as a use pattern, and a timer initial value corresponding to the execution time of the effect control pattern selected as the use pattern is set in the effect control process timer.

  The ending process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending process, the production control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the timer value of the production control process timer, and the same value as the timer value after subtracting 1 from the data included in the production control pattern selected as the usage pattern. Based on the production control execution data (display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, etc.) associated with the process timer determination value, the display control unit 123 is controlled to display the production image on the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And effect operation control such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the decoration LED. The execution of the ending effect is realized by repeatedly executing step S175 for each timer interruption. If the timer value after decrementing by 1 is “0”, or if the data associated with the process timer judgment value that is the same as the timer value after decrementing by 1 is the end code, the rendering process Update the value of the flag to the initial value “0” (At this time, each reception flag, data stored in each storage area, etc. (things that you do not want to carry over to the next variable display) are reset as appropriate) .

  Next, the effect image displayed by the series of processes will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, during the variable display of the decorative symbol, the first hold display area 5Ha displays the hold display symbol H corresponding to the variable display held for the first special game, and the second hold. In the display area 5Hb, a hold display symbol H corresponding to a variable display or the like held for the second special game is displayed. Among these hold display symbols H, a hold display symbol corresponding to the variable display executed this time is displayed. H is displayed in the current display area 5Hc. The hold display symbol H displayed in the display area 5Hc this time is deleted when the variable display ends. In FIG. 53, when the next variable display is performed, the hold display symbol H displayed at the leftmost display position of the second hold display area 5Hb is moved to the current display area 5Hc and displayed (the display color is displayed). Maintained). Further, the other on-hold display symbol H of the second on-hold display area 5Hb moves to the left display area. If there is no hold for the second special figure game, the hold display symbol H displayed at the leftmost display position of the first hold display area 5Ha is moved to the current display area 5Hc at the next variable display execution. (The display color is maintained.) Further, the other on-hold display symbol H of the first on-hold display area 5Ha moves to the left display area. In FIG. 53, an arrow indicates a state in which decorative symbols are variably displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 54, when the notice effect A is executed, for example, the notice effect A is executed when the character C1 appears. As shown in FIG. 55, when the notice effect B is executed, for example, the notice effect B is executed when the tank C2 appears.

  As shown in FIG. 56, when the effect effect A is executed, for example, the boomerang S1 moves toward the target, and the boomerang S1 hits the hold display symbol H of the target (the rightmost symbol of the second hold display region 5Hb). Then, the display color of the held display symbol H that has been hit changes. Even if the effect is performed, the display color of the hold display symbol H may not be changed. In this case, for example, the boomerang S1 disappears in the middle (the image on the right side of the second row in FIG. 56). ).

  As shown in FIG. 57, for example, when the effect effect B is executed, the star S2 moves toward the target, and the star S2 hits the target hold display symbol H (the rightmost symbol of the second hold display region 5Hb). Then, the display color of the held display symbol H that has been hit changes. Even if the effect is performed, the display color of the hold display symbol H may not be changed. In this case, for example, the star S2 disappears in the middle (the image on the right side of the second row in FIG. 57). ).

  As shown in FIG. 58, when the current hold notice is executed, the display color of the hold display symbol H displayed in the current display area 5Hc is changed. The display color may be changed so as to be switched, or may be changed by gradually changing the display color. Further, the display color may be changed after an effect such as an effect is executed. This pending notice may be performed at a predetermined timing before the reach is established, or at a predetermined timing before the variability display result is derived after the reach is established.

  As described above, in this embodiment, there is a hold display pattern (such as H3-3) in which the display color of the hold display symbol does not change white from the time when the hold occurs, but the display color of the hold display symbol is when the hold occurs. There is no hold display pattern that remains gray and has not changed (FIGS. 25 to 44). For this reason, even if it is the same special aspect, when the display color is white and when it is gray, the ratio which changes to another display color will differ. Thereby, the player pays attention to which of the special aspects, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, there are on-hold display patterns (H3-19, H3-20, J3-48, etc.) in which the display color of the on-hold display symbol changes from gray to red or rainbow, but from white There is no on-hold display pattern that changes to red or iridescent (FIGS. 25 to 44). For this reason, even if it is the same special mode, when the display color is white and when it is gray, the selection ratio for changing to another display color is different. Thereby, the player pays attention to which of the special aspects, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, there are on-hold display patterns (H3-40, H3-47, H3-48, etc.) in which the display color of the on-hold display symbol changes from gray to green, red, or iridescent. In addition, after the display color of the hold display symbol changes from green to gray, a hold display pattern (K3-41, K3-42, K3-51, etc.) that changes from the changed gray to green, red, or iridescent is displayed. Yes (FIGS. 25-44). For this reason, the display mode of the hold display symbol may change from a display mode that can change from the special mode to the special mode, and may change from the special mode to another display mode. As a result, the change pattern of the hold display can be embodied, and the interest of the game is improved. And especially the notice mode after changing from a special mode turns into a notice mode in which a big hit expectation is the same or becomes high compared with the mode of notice before change. This can prevent the player from being discouraged.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the current current color is white, the reference table TA-1 is referred to (FIGS. 50 and 51). Since all the determination values of the reference table TA-1 are assigned to “no change”, in this case, the current hold notice is not executed. In other words, when the hold display symbols displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb are in a special mode, the display mode may change to another display mode (see the hold display pattern). When the displayed hold display symbol is in a special mode, it does not change to another display mode. As described above, in this embodiment, when the special-type hold display symbol is displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb, and when it is displayed in the current display area 5Hc. Thus, the display mode changes to another display mode at a different rate (here, one rate is “0”). Thereby, the player pays attention to the special aspect together with the display area of the special display of the hold display symbol, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, in the case where the target is the fourth hold storage, when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes to white or gray in the next change, the final display color is only green. (K3-7, K3-11, K3-19, etc.) However, when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes to gray in the next change, the final display color is also green or red or rainbow (K3). -13, K3-14, K3-15, K3-22, K3-23, etc.) (FIGS. 25-44). For this reason, the big hit expectation degree differs according to the timing when the display mode of the hold display symbol becomes the special mode. Thereby, the player pays attention to the special mode as well as the timing of the special mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the target is the fourth hold storage, when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from white or gray in the next-order variation, the final display color is red, Although it can change to a rainbow color (K3-42, K3-49 to 51, etc.), the final display color does not change to red or rainbow color when the display mode of the reserved display symbol changes from gray in the next change (K3- 9, K3-18, K3-20, etc.) (FIGS. 25-44). For this reason, the jackpot expectation differs depending on the timing when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from the special mode. Thereby, the player pays attention to the change timing from the special mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, the determination ratio in each hold display pattern determination table is the third hold memory in the target (that is, when the third hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs). And when the target is the fourth hold memory (that is, when the fourth hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs), the display form of the hold display symbol is a special form. You may set so that the determination ratio (average determination ratio of the said holding | maintenance display pattern) of the holding | maintenance display pattern which becomes becomes different. Thereby, the appearance rate of the special mode can be changed according to the number of reserved memories. Thereby, the player pays attention to the special mode of the target as well as the number of reserved memories when the target hold display is generated, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio of the action effect B is high, the determination ratio of the action effect A is the next highest, and the determination ratio of no execution is the lowest. When the special figure display result is “losing”, the reverse is true. For this reason, when the action effect B is executed, the big hit expectation degree is high, and when the action effect A is executed, the big hit expectation degree is higher than when the action effect is not executed. That is, the big hit expectation differs depending on the type of action effect. Thereby, the player pays attention to the special aspect as well as the action effect changing from the special aspect, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the effect mode is the normal mode, the display color of the hold display symbol may be white (H3-3, H3-5, etc.), but when the effect mode is the probability change mode. The display color of the hold display symbol is not white (FIGS. 25 to 44). In this way, the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display symbol to the special mode (here, white) is changed according to the effect mode. Thereby, the player pays attention to the special mode as well as the production mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, during the execution period of the pre-reading notice for the hold display design other than the target display display design target this time (including the period from the decision to execute the pre-reading notice to the execution of the pre-reading notice) Compared to other cases, the ratio of the display mode of the hold display symbol to the special mode or the notification mode is different. Thereby, the player can concentrate on the special aspect and pay attention, and the interest of the game is improved.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the hold display pattern (such as H3-3) that does not change the display color of the hold display symbol from white at the start of display (when hold occurs) to white is a variation category selected at the time of loss. Selected only for PA1 and PA2. On the other hand, the hold display pattern (H3-1, H3-4, etc.) in which the final color is blue may be selected in the variation category PB3 selected at the time of big hit (FIGS. 25 to 44). For this reason, the big hit expectation when the display mode of the reserved display symbol is changed from the beginning to the special mode is lower than when the final color of the held display symbol is set to the normal mode (expected big hit expectation = 0). In particular, when a hold display pattern that does not change the display color of the hold display symbol to white from the start of display is selected, the variable display of the target is not in a reach mode. Thereby, the player pays attention to the special aspect, and the interest of the game is improved.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 has, for example, identification information (for example, a game ball or the like) after a game medium (for example, a game ball) has entered a start area (for example, a first start winning opening or a second start winning opening) provided in the game area. The display result is derived by executing variable display of the identification information based on the fact that the start condition for allowing the variable display of the special symbol, the decorative design, etc. to be started is established, and the display result is predetermined. If a gaming machine is in a specific gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous for a player when a specific display result (for example, a special symbol that becomes a big hit symbol or a finalized combination symbol for a big hit combination) is derived. Well, this specific configuration is not limited to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, for example, a holding storage unit that stores holding information for variable display of identification information in which the start condition is not satisfied even though the gaming medium has entered the start area (for example, Variable display executing means for executing variable display of identification information based on the hold information corresponding to variable display of identification information for which the start condition is satisfied, and the like. (For example, the CPU 103 that performs the processes of steps S112 and S113 and the CPU 120 for the effect control that performs the processes of steps S171 and S172). The specific configuration of each unit is the same as that of the above embodiment. It is not limited to the configuration.

  In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays, for example, a specific display (for example, the first hold display area 5Ha, the second hold display area 5Hb, etc.) corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage unit (for example, the first hold display area 5Hb, the second hold display area 5Hb, etc.). , On-hold display symbols, etc.) (for example, the image display device 5 that displays the on-hold display symbols in the first on-hold display area 5Ha and the second on-hold display area 5Hb), and the variable of identification information being executed Corresponding to the display, current display means for displaying the specific display in the current display area (for example, the current display area 5Hc) (for example, the image display device 5 for displaying the hold display symbol in the hold display area 5Hc), What is necessary is just to be provided, and the specific structure of each means is not restricted to the structure of the said embodiment.

  The specific display displayed in the current display area or the hold display area is configured as an image called a hold display symbol in the above embodiment. However, the specific display may be expressed by lighting of a light source such as an LED (in this case, the hold display means and the current display means are light sources provided in a predetermined area that is a hold display area or a current display area. ). The specific display may be another image such as a character. The specific display may be either a moving image or a still image. Note that the hold display symbol may not be displayed in the current display area. That is, the configuration of the current display means may be omitted.

  Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 determines the display color of the hold display symbol by, for example, display mode control means for controlling the display mode of the specific display (for example, referring to the hold display pattern and each table in FIG. 51). And the like, as long as it is equipped with an effect control CPU 120 that performs control to display or change the hold display symbols with the determined display color, and the specific configuration of this means is the same as the configuration of the above embodiment. Not limited. For example, the hold display pattern, the contents of FIG. 50, the contents of each table of FIG. 51, and the like can be changed as appropriate so as to satisfy the conditions of each configuration described below. The specific display to be controlled by the display mode control means may be only the specific display displayed in the hold display area by the hold display means, or the specific display displayed in the hold display area by the hold display means. It may be a specific display displayed in the current display area by the current display means. In the above embodiment, both specific displays are targeted.

  The display mode control means may change the display mode of the specific display from the current display mode to another display mode (for example, change the display color of the hold display symbol). The general configuration is not limited to the configuration of the above embodiment.

  The display mode of the specific display includes, for example, a normal mode (for example, blue), a special mode (for example, white and gray) different from the normal mode, and the normal mode and the special mode. It is only necessary to include a different notification mode (for example, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.) for notifying the proportion of the specific gaming state. The display mode is a display color in the above embodiment, but may be a shape, a size, or the like, for example. For example, the normal mode, the special mode, and the notice mode may have different shapes or different sizes. In addition, changing the display mode includes putting characters or the like in the specific display. For example, when the target is a variable display in which a pseudo-ream is performed (for example, a group of pseudo-reams may be provided in a variable category and notified to the production control board side), a “pseudo” character is displayed, In the case of a variable display in which super reach is performed, the character “SP” is displayed, and in the case of a variable display in which a battle effect in which the character fights is performed (for example, when super reach B is a battle effect). The letter “B” may be displayed. Such a change in display mode using characters may be performed only for the specific display displayed in the reserved area this time.

  For example, there may be other modes as the display mode of the specific display. Moreover, only one kind may be sufficient as a special aspect and a notice aspect. Conversely, there may be a plurality of types of normal modes. The display color as the display mode is not limited to the color used in the above embodiment. When displaying a specific display with a light source such as an LED, for example, the light source can emit light in a plurality of emission colors, and the display color may be changed by changing the emission color.

  Note that changing to another display mode may include changing to another display mode belonging to the same group. For example, it may include changing from white to gray or changing from yellow to green.

  Further, the display mode control means, for example, has a ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the notice mode when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode rather than the normal mode. What is necessary is just to change the display mode of the said specific display to the said notice mode so that it may become high, and this specific structure is not restricted to the structure of the said embodiment.

  The target for changing the display mode of the specific display to the notice mode so that the ratio is high may be only the specific display displayed in the hold display area by the hold display unit, or the hold display unit. May be a specific display displayed in the hold display area and a specific display displayed in the current display area by the current display means. When the target is only the specific display displayed in the hold display area, the above-described condition may be satisfied by adjusting the determination ratio of the hold display pattern as in the above embodiment. . For example, in each of the hold display pattern determination tables of FIGS. 25 to 44, the display color changes from gray or white to the display color of the notice mode rather than the determination ratio of the hold display pattern including the pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode. Each determination ratio (total value or average value) of the hold display pattern including the aspect is set higher. When the target is a specific display displayed in the hold display area by the hold display means and a specific display displayed in the current display area by the current display means, the determination ratio of the hold display pattern or reference to FIG. The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the table decision ratio and the contents of the decision result that can be decided by the reference table. For example, in each of the hold display pattern determination tables of FIGS. 25 to 44, the display color changes from gray or white to the display color of the notice mode rather than the determination ratio of the hold display pattern including the pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notice mode. Each determination ratio of the hold display pattern including the aspect is set to be higher, and a reference table that changes from white to the notice aspect is provided, and the determination ratio that changes from white to the notice aspect is increased (for example, 100%). ) Etc.

  In addition, when the specific display to be changed also includes the specific display displayed in the current display area, the display color (current hold column) of the hold display symbol in the current hold area as shown in FIG. 59 is also specified. 21 is prepared, and in step S506 of FIG. 21, an all-period hold display pattern determination table (for example, for selecting the all-period hold display pattern) is prepared. With reference to the hold display patterns in the tables in FIGS. 25 to 44 replaced with the hold display pattern for the entire period including the display color of the hold display symbols of the current hold area (current hold field), the hold display area and the current You may determine collectively the transition of the display mode of the specific display displayed on a display area. Note that FIG. 59 is an example, and the contents of the all-period hold display pattern are naturally changed according to the purpose, and all-period hold display patterns other than those shown in FIG. 59 are naturally set. In such a case, steps S709 and S710 in FIG. 47 may be omitted. In such a case, the specific display to be changed is the contents of the all-period hold display pattern determination table (the contents and determination of the all-period hold display pattern) as in the case where only the specific display displayed in the hold display area is the target. The ratio may be set to satisfy the above condition. For example, in each all-period holding display pattern determination table, the notification mode of the notification mode is changed from gray or white to the determination ratio (total value or average value) of all-period holding display patterns including a pattern that changes from blue to the display color of the notification mode. It is preferable that the determination ratio of the all-period holding display pattern including the aspect that changes to the display color is higher. Note that this can also be applied to other conditions described below. In other words, regarding the display mode of the specific display described below, when the specific display displayed in the current display area is also targeted, a whole-period hold display pattern is prepared and only the specific display displayed in the hold display area is displayed. The content of the all-period hold display pattern determination table may be set based on the same concept as that for the target. When using the all-period hold display pattern determination table, the notice buffer is provided with a change field (current change field) when the specific display is displayed in the current hold display, and the specific display is displayed in the current hold display. The content of whether to change the display mode of the specific display (the content of the hold display pattern for the entire period) is also stored, and the display mode when the specific display is displayed on the current hold display based on this content is also stored. An effect control pattern corresponding to the change is set.

  As in the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays the variable information display result (display result based on the hold information corresponding to the variable information display of the identification information for which the start condition is satisfied. Predetermining means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes step S239) that determines whether or not to make a specific display result, whether or not to enter a specific gaming state, and the like, and the predetermination The hold information may be any hold information extracted when a game medium (for example, a game ball or the like) enters the start area before the means, or may be hold information temporarily stored in the hold storage means. And may be a hold display held separately from the hold storage means.) Whether the identification information corresponding to the hold information is displayed as a variable display display result (whether the display result is a specific display result) Or a determination means (for example, the CPU 103 that executes step S211) that determines whether or not to enter a specific gaming state, etc. (the specific configuration of each means is the above embodiment) Not limited to.)

  The variable display execution means may execute variable display of the identification information based on the determination result of the prior determination means as in the above embodiment (the CPU 103 that executes the processes of steps S111 and S112, etc. An effect control CPU 120 that executes the processing of step S171 and step S172 based on the effect control command from the main board 11).

  In the above embodiment, the display mode control means determines the hold display pattern for the specific display displayed in the hold display area based on the determination result of the determination means (based on whether or not the big hit. An effect control CPU 120 that determines a hold display pattern (that is, how to control the display mode of the specific display, etc.) based on the determined variation category (variation category designation command). In other words, the display mode control unit controls the specific display displayed in the hold display area based on the determination result of the determination unit. However, for example, whether the display mode of the specific display is the normal mode or the special mode is determined by a table and a random value based on the determination result (for example, one-to-one) and determined to be the normal mode. Refer to the table set so that it is easier to decide when it is changed to the notice mode when it is decided to make it a special form than when it is done, whether to make a notice form based on the judgment result of the judging means or notice You may determine the kind of aspect etc. with a table and a random value.

  Further, the display mode control means determines whether or not to change the specific display based on the determination result of the pre-decision means for the specific display displayed in the display area this time (whether or not it is a big hit) Effect control CPU 120 that determines whether or not there is a hold display notice based on a variation pattern (variation pattern designation command) determined based on the When determining the transition of the display mode of the specific display including the change of the display mode of the specific display to be displayed, the display mode control means determines the display mode of the specific display based on the determination result of the determination means. Transition is decided. That is, the display mode control means controls the specific display displayed in the current display area based on the determination result of the determination means or the determination result of the prior determination means (or may be based on both). Also good.

  In the above embodiment, the transition of the display mode of the specific display is determined based on the variation category and variation pattern (such as the variation category designation command and the variation pattern designation command). It is a decision based on the results and judgment results.) Even if the table to be referenced is decided based on whether or not it is a big hit (design designation command or display result designation command), the transition of the display mode of the specific display can be decided directly Good. Note that the transition of the display mode of the specific display may be determined by determining a table to be referred to based on both the variation category, the variation pattern, and whether or not it is a big hit. Further, the transition of the display mode of the specific display may be determined by determining a table to be referred to according to the jackpot type or the like. For example, even with the same variation category or the like, it is possible to diversify the production by varying the contents and determination ratio of the hold display pattern depending on whether or not the big hit (big hit type). Note that, as the big hit, a 15R big hit gaming state, a 2R big hit gaming state, and the like may be prepared, and a big hit type for specifying each may be prepared.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is further configured as follows. In addition, you may combine the following structures suitably.

  (Configuration 1) The special aspect includes a first special aspect (for example, white) and a second special aspect (for example, gray) different from the first special aspect, and The display mode control means has a ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode depending on whether the display mode of the specific display is the first special mode or the second special mode. Differently, the display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode.

  In the above-described embodiment, the display color of the hold display symbol does not change in white since the occurrence of the hold (such as H3-3) (a hold display pattern that does not change after becoming white) may be used. However, there is no hold display pattern in which the display color of the hold display symbol does not change in gray since the occurrence of the hold (it may be a hold display pattern that does not change after turning gray) (FIGS. 25 to 44). This configuration is realized. That is, here, the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode is 100% (100%) in the second special mode and less than 100% in the first special mode. The content and determination ratio of the hold display pattern may be adjusted so that the ratio in the first special mode is 100%, the ratio in the second special mode may be less than 100%, It is good also as a ratio which is mutually less than 100%. When both ratios are less than 100%, for example, in each determination table for determining a hold display pattern or the like, a determination ratio that satisfies the above one condition (the display mode of the specific display is the first special mode) When the display mode of the specific display is changed to the other display mode, the determination rate of the holding display pattern including the content to change the display mode to the other display mode and the determination rate of the one satisfying the other condition (the specific display) When the display mode is the second special mode, the display rate of the specific display is changed from the display mode of the specific display to the other display mode. You can do it.

  In addition, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-time hold display in the same way as the hold display pattern A pattern determination table (for example, a table in which the hold display patterns in FIGS. 25 to 44 are replaced with the hold display patterns for the entire period. The same applies hereinafter) may be prepared. For example, there is an all-period holding display pattern that does not change in white since the time when the holding occurred (the display color of the holding display pattern may be a whole-period holding display pattern that does not change after becoming white). It is sufficient that there is no full-period hold display pattern (the display color may be a full-period hold display pattern that does not change after turning gray) that does not change in gray since the occurrence of the hold. Similarly to the above, the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode is adjusted by adjusting the content and determination ratio of the all-period holding display pattern, and the ratio in the case of the first special mode is set to 100%. The ratio in the case of 2 special modes may be less than 100%, or both ratios may be less than 100% and may be different from each other.

  In addition, the display color of the display pattern of the hold display has been kept gray since the time of the hold occurrence, and the hold display pattern that does not change has been prepared. By doing so, a pachinko gaming machine that satisfies the above conditions may be configured.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special mode (especially which is a special mode), the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 2) The special mode includes a first special mode (for example, white) and a second special mode (for example, gray) different from the first special mode, and The display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display to any of the other display modes depending on whether the display mode of the specific display is the first special mode or the second special mode. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio is different.

  In the above embodiment, there are on-hold display patterns (H3-19, H3-20, J3-48, etc.) in which the display color of the on-hold display symbol changes from gray to red or rainbow, but from white to red or rainbow This configuration is realized by the fact that there is no pending display pattern that changes to (FIGS. 25 to 44).

  In addition, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-time hold display in the same way as the hold display pattern A pattern determination table or the like may be prepared. For example, there is an all-period holding display pattern in which the display color of the holding display symbol changes from gray to red or rainbow, but there may be no all-time holding display pattern that changes from white to red or rainbow. The contents of the reference table (FIGS. 50 and 51) for the pending notice this time may be adjusted to satisfy the above configuration. Note that the selection ratios are different. The other display modes that can be changed are the same in the first special mode and the second special mode, but the ratio of the other display modes after the change is different. In addition, it includes a case where other display modes that can be changed are different between the first special mode and the second special mode, or are partially common. For example, in the first special mode, it changes to another display mode A at 100% (that is, when it changes, only the other display mode A changes), and in the second special mode, other display mode The mode B may be changed by 50%, and the other display mode C may be changed by 50%. The display modes A to C are all different. Further, in the first special mode, it changes to another display mode A at 100% (that is, when it changes, only the other display mode A changes), and in the second special mode, other display mode The aspect A may be changed by 50% and the other display aspect B may be changed by 50%. Further, in the first special mode, the display mode changes to 50% for the other display mode A and 50% to the other display mode B (that is, when it changes, it changes only to the other display mode A). In the second special mode, the display mode A may be changed to 70% for the other display mode A and 30% to the other display mode B. The same applies to other selection ratios.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special mode (especially which is a special mode), the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 3) The display mode control unit further includes a notification unit configured to perform a predetermined notification when the display mode of the specific display is set to the special mode. The notification unit is configured so that the display mode control unit Different notification is performed when the display mode is the first special mode and when the display mode is the second special mode.

  For example, when the display color of the reserved display symbol is set to white (displayed in the color (here, white) from the beginning) and changed from another display color to that color (here, white). , “Same”), the first voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and when the display color of the hold display symbol is gray, the second voice is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. This configuration is realized. Such a sound should just be prescribed | regulated previously with the production | presentation control pattern.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention with a special aspect with an audio | voice, the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 4) The display mode control means is configured such that the display mode is the second special mode when the display mode of the specific display is the first special mode and the second special mode. Only when it is a mode, the display mode of the specific display is always changed from the second special mode to another display mode.

  In the above embodiment, there is a hold display pattern (such as H3-3) in which the display color of the hold display symbol does not change in white since the occurrence of the hold (such as H3-3) (may be a hold display pattern that does not change after becoming white). However, since there is no hold display pattern (the hold display pattern that does not change after becoming gray) that the display color of the hold display symbol does not change in gray since the occurrence of the hold (FIGS. 25 to 44). Configuration is realized. Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, in the all-time hold display pattern determination table, the hold display pattern There is an all-period hold display pattern that does not change in white since the occurrence of the hold (although it may be a hold display pattern that does not change after becoming white), but the display color of the hold display symbol is held It is sufficient that there is no all-period hold display pattern that does not change in gray since time (it may be a hold display pattern that does not change after turning gray).

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special mode (especially which is a special mode), the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 5) The display mode control means is configured such that the display mode is the second special mode when the display mode of the specific display is the first special mode and the second special mode. Only when it is a mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second special mode to the first specific display mode.

  In the above embodiment, there are on-hold display patterns (H3-19, H3-20, J3-48, etc.) in which the display color of the on-hold display symbol changes from gray to red or iridescent, but from white to red or iridescent. This configuration is realized by the fact that there is no changing hold display pattern (FIGS. 25 to 44). Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, in the all-time hold display pattern determination table, the hold display pattern There is a full-period hold display pattern in which the display color changes from gray to red or rainbow, but there is no full-time hold display pattern that changes from white to red or rainbow.

  According to said structure, the change of a specific display can be diversified and the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 6) The display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display to another display mode at any of a plurality of timings, and the display mode of the specific display when a game medium enters the start area. Determine the timing to change.

  In the above embodiment, this configuration is realized by determining the hold display pattern (or the all-period hold display pattern) in step S162. Note that changing the display mode to another display mode may be performed a plurality of times in one variable display.

  According to said structure, determination of the timing which changes the display mode of specific display can be made easy.

  (Configuration 7) The variable display execution means includes variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display of identification information to be executed, and the display mode control means is configured to execute the variable display of identification information during execution of variable display. When the display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode, an action effect that changes the display mode as a result of the effect is executed, and the display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode. Depending on the variable display pattern of the variable display of the identification information, the effect mode of the effect is varied or the ratio of executing the effect is varied.

  The variable display pattern includes an execution mode of other effects (such as a notice effect) executed during variable display of the decorative symbols, in addition to the decorative pattern change mode. In this embodiment, the above configuration is realized by determining whether or not the action effects A and B are executed in accordance with whether or not the notice effect is executed in step S162. It should be noted that the determination ratio of the type of action effect (effect mode) may be varied depending on whether or not the notice effect is executed.

  According to said structure, the presence or absence and effect aspect of an effect effect can be determined according to the content of the variable display pattern, and the display aspect of a specific display can be changed in a suitable aspect.

  (Configuration 8) The display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display to the second specific display mode only when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode.

  In the above embodiment, there is a holding display pattern (such as J3-48) in which the display color of the holding display symbol changes from gray to rainbow, but the holding display pattern that changes from normal mode or other notice modes to rainbow color is This configuration is realized by the absence (FIGS. 25 to 44). Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, in the all-time hold display pattern determination table, the hold display pattern There is a whole-period hold display pattern in which the display color changes from gray to rainbow, but it is sufficient that there is no full-time hold display pattern that changes from the normal mode or other notice modes to the rainbow color.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 9) When the display mode of the specific display is a predetermined display mode among the display modes that can be changed from the special mode (when the display mode is a predetermined display mode from the beginning When the predetermined display mode is reached, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the special mode.

  In the above embodiment, there is a hold display pattern (H3-40, H3-47, H3-48, etc.) in which the display color of the hold display symbol changes from gray to green, red, or iridescent, and the display of the hold display symbol There are pending display patterns (K3-41, K3-42, K3-51, etc.) that change from gray to green, red, or iridescent after the color changes from green to gray (FIGS. 25 to 44). This configuration is realized.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, gray to green , Red, or iridescent all-period hold display pattern, after the change of the display color of the hold display symbol from green to gray, then change from gray to green, red, or iridescent for all periods There should be a display pattern.

  According to said structure, the change pattern of a specific display can be diversified and the interest of a game improves. The predetermined display mode may be all of the display modes that can be changed from the special mode, or may be a part of the special mode.

  (Configuration 10) The display mode control means is the special mode when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode changed from the predetermined display mode and the special mode not changed from the predetermined display mode. You may make it change the display mode of the said specific display to another display mode so that the ratio which changes the display mode of the said specific display to another display mode changes with time. The percentages to be compared are 80% on one side and 20% on the other side, and 10% (100%) on one side and 0% (0%) on the other side. It may be. When one ratio is 80% and the other is 20%, for example, in each determination table for determining a hold display pattern, etc., the determination ratio (the specific display When the display mode is the special mode changed from the predetermined display mode, the total display rate or the average value of the holding display pattern determination ratio for changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode), and Determination ratio of the condition that satisfies the other condition (when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode not changed from the predetermined display mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode. What is necessary is just to make it different from the total value or average value of the determination rate of a display pattern. Moreover, in order to make one ratio 100% (100%) and the other ratio 0% (0%), for example, the above-mentioned one condition is satisfied in the hold display pattern and the all-period hold display pattern. There is something, but there should be no one that satisfies the other condition. This is the same in the case of making the ratios different, and also in the case of making one ratio higher (or lower) than the other ratio.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, the one or more hold display patterns (including those in the special mode from the beginning) that change the display mode of the specific display from the predetermined display mode to the special mode are included. There is a hold display pattern that does not change from a special mode to another display mode, but one or more on-hold display patterns that change the display mode of a specific display from a predetermined display mode to a special mode. There is no hold display pattern that does not change the mode. Or, the reverse may be applied. For example, there is no hold display pattern that does not change the special display mode from the special display mode to one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display from the predetermined display mode to the special mode. Among the one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode from the predetermined display mode to the special mode, there may be a hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period holding display pattern determination table, one or more all-period holding display patterns (including those in the special mode from the beginning) that change the display mode of the specific display from a predetermined display mode to a special mode. There is a whole-period hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode, but among the one or more all-time hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display from the predetermined display mode to the special mode The whole-period hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode is avoided. Or, as described above, the reverse may be used.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention to a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 11) The display mode control means is the special mode when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode changed from the predetermined display mode and the special mode not changed from the predetermined display mode. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio for changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode is different.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, the one or more hold display patterns (including those in the special mode from the beginning) that change the display mode of the specific display from the predetermined display mode to the special mode are included. There is no hold display pattern that changes from a special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow), but one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode of a specific display from a predetermined mode to a special mode There is a holding display pattern for changing from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow). Or, the reverse may be applied. For example, the display mode of the specific display is changed from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode from the predetermined mode to the special mode. There is a hold display pattern, but one or more hold display patterns for changing the display mode of the specific display from the predetermined display mode to the special mode, and from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) There may be no hold display pattern to be changed.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period holding display pattern determination table, one or more all-period holding display patterns (including those in the special mode from the beginning) that change the display mode of the specific display from a predetermined display mode to a special mode. There is no whole-period holding display pattern for changing from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow), but one or more changing the display mode of the specific display from the predetermined display mode to the special mode The whole-period hold display pattern is changed from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color). Or, as described above, the reverse may be used.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention to a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 12) The notice mode includes a plurality of notice modes having different ratios of entering the specific gaming state to be notified, and the display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display from the notice mode to the special mode. When changing from the changed special mode to the notification mode, the notification mode that changes from the special mode to the ratio of the specific game state that the notification mode that changes to the special mode notifies The display mode of the specific display is changed so that the proportion of the specific gaming state to be notified is likely to be higher.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in the pending display pattern determination tables of FIGS. 25 to 44, the notice mode after changing from the special mode has the same or higher jackpot expectation as compared to the pre-change mode. The first hold display pattern that becomes the notice mode to be prepared is prepared. The notice mode after the change from the special form is the second hold display pattern that is a notice mode having a lower degree of jackpot expectation than the notice mode before the change. This configuration is realized by not preparing. A second hold display pattern may also be prepared. In this case, the determination ratio in the hold display pattern determination table is higher in the first hold display pattern than in the second hold display pattern. To.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, For the notice mode after the change, a first full-period hold display pattern is prepared, which becomes the notice mode in which the degree of jackpot expectation is the same or higher than the notice mode before the change, and the notice after the change from the special mode This configuration is realized by not preparing a second all-period hold display pattern that is a notification mode with a lower jackpot expectation than the notification mode before the change. Note that a second all-period hold display pattern may also be prepared. In this case, the determination ratio in the all-period hold display pattern determination table is the first all-period hold display pattern rather than the second all-period hold display pattern. The display pattern may be higher.

According to said structure, a player's discouragement can be reduced and the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 13) When the display mode of the specific display is a partial display mode among the display modes that can be changed from the special mode, the display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display to the special mode. The display mode of the specific display is not changed to the special mode when the display mode of the specific display is the remaining part of the display modes that can be changed from the special mode.

  For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, when there is a hold display pattern that changes from a special mode to green and yellow, there is a hold display pattern that changes from green to a special mode (for example, gray), but from yellow to a special mode ( For example, there is no hold display pattern that changes to gray). Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, If there is an all-period hold display pattern that changes from green to yellow, there is an all-period hold display pattern that changes from green to a special mode (eg, gray), but all changes that change from yellow to a special mode (eg, gray). There should be no period hold display pattern.

  According to said structure, it can be made to pay attention to the display mode of a specific display, and the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 14) The notice mode includes a plurality of notice modes having different ratios to be notified of the specific gaming state, and the display mode control means is configured to display the specific mode when the display mode is the special mode. When the display mode of the specific display displayed by the display unit this time is the special mode, the ratio of the display mode of the specific display to the specific gaming state to be notified in the plurality of notification modes is set. The display mode of the specific display is changed to the specific notice mode so that the rate of change to the specific notice mode higher than a predetermined threshold is different.

  In the above embodiment, when the current current color is white, the reference table TA-1 is referred to (FIGS. 50 and 51). Since all the determination values of the reference table TA-1 are assigned to “no change”, in this case, the current hold notice is not executed. In other words, when the hold display symbols displayed in the first hold display area 5Ha and the second hold display area 5Hb are in a special mode, the display mode may change to another display mode (see the hold display pattern). This configuration is realized by not changing to another display mode when the displayed on-hold display symbol is in a special mode.

  In addition, when determining the transition of the change of the display mode of the specific display at once using the all-period hold display pattern determination table, for example, the special mode is displayed in red while the specific display is displayed in the hold display area. And a second all-period hold display pattern that changes from a special mode to red and iridescent when a specific display is displayed in the current display area without preparing a first all-period hold display pattern that changes to a rainbow color. The above configuration may be realized by preparing Alternatively, both the first all-period hold display pattern and the second all-period hold display pattern may be prepared so that the above condition is satisfied depending on the determination ratio.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect (especially whether the specific display of a special aspect is displayed on a holding area this time or displayed on a holding display area), the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 15) The display mode control means is more suitable when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the current display unit is the special mode than when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode. The display mode of the specific display is changed to the specific warning mode so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the specific warning mode becomes high.

  For example, when determining the transition of the change in the display mode of the specific display at once using the all-period hold display pattern determination table, for example, while the specific display is displayed in the hold display area, The second all-period holding display pattern that changes from the special mode to red and rainbow when the specific display is displayed in the current display area without preparing the first all-period holding display pattern that changes to the rainbow color. The above configuration may be realized by preparing. Alternatively, both the first all-period hold display pattern and the second all-period hold display pattern may be prepared so that the above condition is satisfied depending on the determination ratio.

  According to said structure, a player can have a feeling of expectation in the specific display of the special aspect currently displayed on the display area, and the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 16) The display mode control means may include the case where the display mode of the specific display is the special mode and the case where the display mode of the specific display displayed by the current display unit is the special mode. Only when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the display means this time is the special mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed to a predetermined notification mode of the plurality of notification modes.

  For example, when determining the transition of the change in the display mode of the specific display at once using the all-period hold display pattern determination table, for example, when the specific display is displayed in the hold display area, The above configuration is realized by preparing a whole-period hold display pattern that changes from a special mode to a rainbow color when a specific display is displayed in the current display area without preparing a whole-period hold display pattern that changes to May be.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the specific display of the special aspect currently displayed on the display area, the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 17) The variable display execution means includes variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display of identification information to be executed, and the display mode control means is the specific display displayed by the current display means. The display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit immediately before the current display unit displays the specific display, the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determination unit, Based on the above, it is changed to one of the plurality of notice modes.

  In the above embodiment, as shown in FIG. 50, this configuration is determined by referring to a reference table corresponding to the variable display pattern and the current color, and determining whether or not the current hold notice is executed and the contents of the current hold notice. Is realized. In the above embodiment, in one variable display, the random value MR3 is not extracted again once extracted. For example, the random value MR3 is extracted once at the time of starting winning. The variable category may be re-determined by extracting MR3 at the start of variable display.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to combine the current hold notice and the variable display, and it is possible to make it difficult for production to be chewed. This is particularly effective when the expectation degree of jackpot of a variation category is greatly different from the expectation degree of jackpot of a variation pattern within the variation category. In addition, for example, the super-reach A with two quasi-continuations has a higher jackpot expectation degree than the super-reach B without the quasi-continuation, and the big hit expectation degree of the fluctuation pattern and the big hit expectation degree of the fluctuation category It is also effective when is different.

  (Configuration 18) The display mode control unit sets the display mode of the specific display to the special mode at any one of a plurality of timings, and sets the display mode of the specific display at the first timing of the plurality of timings. The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of entering the specific gaming state differs between when the special mode is selected and when the special mode is changed at the second timing later than the first timing.

  In the above embodiment, in the hold display pattern in the case where the target is the hold storage fourth, when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes to white or gray in the next change, the final display color is only green. (K3-7, K3-11, K3-19, etc.) When the display mode of the hold display symbol changes to gray in the next change, the final display color becomes green or red or rainbow (K3-13). , K3-14, K3-15, K3-22, K3-23, etc.) (FIGS. 35 to 44), the jackpot expectation of the notice mode of the hold display symbol will be different, so the above configuration is realized. Is done.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the target in the all-period hold display pattern determination table is held. In the hold display pattern in the case of the fourth storage, when the display form of the hold display symbol changes to white or gray in the next variation, the final display color (here, the final color in the current display area (the current hold area) Including the color after changing due to the advance notice.)) Is only green, but when the display pattern of the hold display symbol changes to gray in the next change, the final display color will be red and rainbow colors as well as green Like that.

  Even when the target is the fourth hold storage, the hold display pattern determination table or the all-period hold display pattern determination table may be set so that the above-described condition of the configuration 18 is satisfied (the following configuration) But the same).

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect (especially timing which becomes a special aspect), the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 19) The display mode control means is configured to change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode at a third timing among the plurality of timings and at a fourth timing that is later than the third timing. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display of the special mode to another display mode is different from that when the special mode is changed. The third timing may be the same as or different from the first timing, and the fourth timing may be the same as or different from the second timing (hereinafter referred to as the first to first timings). Same for the fourth timing).

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, among one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next variation, there is a hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode. In the one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next variation, no hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode is set. Alternatively, the determination ratio may be adjusted so that both of the hold display patterns exist.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, the entire period during which the display mode of the specific display is changed from the special mode to another display mode in one or more all-period hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next change. There is a hold display pattern, but one or more all-period hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next variation, the all-period hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode Not to be.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the timing which becomes a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 20) When the display mode of the specific display is set to the special mode at the third timing among the plurality of timings, the display mode control unit is configured to perform the display at the fourth timing that is later than the third timing. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display of the special mode to another display mode is different from when the special mode is changed. Change.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, in one or more hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next variation, the special mode is changed to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color). There is no pending display pattern to be changed, but one or more on-hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next-order variation, from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) There is a hold display pattern to be changed.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, one or more all-period hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next change include other predetermined display modes (for example, There is no holding display pattern to be changed to (rainbow), but one or more all-period holding display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next variation are changed from the special mode to another predetermined display mode. There is a whole-period hold display pattern that is changed to (for example, rainbow).

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the timing which becomes a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 21) The display mode control means sets the display mode of the specific display of the special mode to the first mode only when the display mode of the specific display is set to the special mode at a predetermined timing among the plurality of timings. To a specific display mode.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, one or more hold display patterns for changing the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next-order variation, and other predetermined display modes (for example, rainbow colors) from the special mode There is a hold display pattern to be changed, but in one or more hold display patterns to be changed to a special mode at other timings, a hold to change from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) There should be no display pattern.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, the all-period hold display pattern in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above conditions may be satisfied by adjusting the content, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, one or more all-period hold display patterns that change the display mode of the specific display to the special mode in the next variation are changed from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, There is a whole-period hold display pattern to be changed to a rainbow color), but one or more whole-period hold display patterns to be made special at other timings may include other predetermined display forms (for example, In other words, there is no whole-period hold display pattern to be changed to (rainbow).

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the timing which becomes a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 22) The said display mode control means is provided with the change suggestion effect execution means which performs the change suggestion effect which suggests changing the display mode of the said specific display.

  The change suggestion effect is realized, for example, by an effect of displaying boomerang S1 or the like in the effect effect. Since such a presentation may change the display mode of the specific display, it is suggested that the display mode of the specific display is changed. Note that the change suggestion effect may be one that changes the specific display in addition to displaying an image other than the specific display. For example, although the display color of the specific display is white or gray, an effect that makes the specific display cracked may be used as the change suggestion effect. Further, an operation means such as a push button may be provided so that the change suggestion effect proceeds according to the operation of the operation means. For example, the crack may be increased in accordance with the number of times the push button is repeatedly pressed (however, the timing at which the display mode is actually changed may be determined in advance). The change suggestion effect includes a period suggestion effect described later.

According to the above configuration, since the player pays attention to the change suggestion effect, the interest of the game is improved.
(Configuration 23) The display mode control means changes the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another display mode at any one of a plurality of timings, and changes the display mode of the specific display among the plurality of timings. The specific gaming state is determined when the special mode is changed to another display mode at the first timing and when the special mode is changed to another display mode at a second timing later than the first timing. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the ratio becomes different.

  In the above embodiment, when the target is the fourth hold memory and the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from white or gray in the next-order fluctuation, the final display color can be changed to red or rainbow. (K3-42, K3-49-51, etc.) When the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from gray in the next change, the final display color does not become red or rainbow (K3-9, K3-18, K3-20 etc.) (FIGS. 25 to 44), the above-described configuration is realized.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the target in the all-period hold display pattern determination table is held. In the case of the fourth memory, when the display mode of the hold display symbol changes from white or gray in the secondary change, the final display color can change to red or rainbow, but in the secondary change, When the display mode changes from gray, the whole-period hold display pattern is set so that the final display color does not become red or rainbow.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a specific aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 24) The display mode control means is slower than the third timing and the ratio at which the display mode of the specific display is changed from the special mode to another display mode at the third timing of the plurality of timings. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the ratio of changing from the special mode to another display mode is different at the fourth timing.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in each hold display pattern determination table, the determination ratio (total value or average value) of the hold display pattern that changes the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another display mode in the next variation, and the special mode in the next variation The determination ratio (total value or average value) of the hold display pattern to be changed from one display mode to another display mode is made different.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in each all-period hold display pattern determination table, the determination ratio of the all-period hold display pattern that changes the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another display mode in the next variation, and the special mode in the next variation The determination ratio of the whole-period hold display pattern to be changed to the display mode is made different.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the change timing from a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 25) The display mode control means is configured to select the display ratio of the specific display from the special mode to another display mode at the third timing of the plurality of timings and the third display mode. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio of changing from the special mode to the other display mode is different at a fourth timing later than the above timing.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, there is no hold display pattern for changing the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in the next variation, but the display mode of the specific display is In the next variation, there is a holding display pattern for changing from a special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color).

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period holding display pattern determination table, there is no all-period holding display pattern that changes the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in the next variation. There is a whole-period holding display pattern that changes the display mode from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in the next variation.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the change timing from a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 26) The display mode control means is configured to change the display mode of the specific display from the special mode to another display mode at a predetermined timing of the plurality of timings. Is changed to the first specific display mode.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, there is a hold display pattern that changes the display mode of the specific display from a special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in the next variation, but it is special at other timings. There is no hold display pattern for changing from a mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color).

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period holding display pattern determination table, there is a whole-period holding display pattern that changes the display mode of the specific display from a particular mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in the next variation. At this timing, there is no whole-period holding display pattern for changing from a special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color).

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to the change timing from a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 27) The display mode control means includes period suggestion effect execution means for executing a period suggestion effect that suggests a period until the display mode of the specific display is changed from the special mode to another display mode.

  For example, in step S172, the effect control CPU 120 may execute a period suggesting effect that suggests a period until the special mode is changed to another display mode. The period suggesting effect may be defined by the effect control pattern. For example, a period suggestion is performed by displaying an image as shown in FIG. 60 and displaying “5 more seconds”.

According to the above configuration, since the player pays attention to the period suggesting effect, the interest of the game is improved.
(Structure 28) The display mode control means may store the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means when the hold storage means stores the hold information as new hold information (for example, the new hold information). The holding information is not included in the stored number.) When the first number is different from the first number and when the second number is different from the first number, The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the special mode is different.

  In the above embodiment, the determination ratio in each hold display pattern determination table is the time when the target holds the third hold memory (that is, the third hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs, In the case where the number of stored hold information stored in the hold storage means is 2), the target is the fourth hold memory (that is, the fourth hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure). The display of the hold information stored in the hold storage means is 3), and the display mode of the hold display pattern becomes a special mode at any timing. This configuration is realized by setting the determination ratio (the average or total value of the determination ratios of the hold display pattern) to be different (the contents of the hold display pattern may be changed as necessary). For example, the determination ratio or the like is adjusted so that the ratio in which the fourth direction becomes a special mode is higher.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, the determination ratio and pattern of each all-period hold display pattern determination table When the target is the third hold memory (that is, when the third hold memory in the first special figure or the second special figure occurs) and the target is the fourth hold memory (that is, the first special figure) The determination ratio of the whole-period hold display pattern in which the display mode of the hold display symbol becomes a special mode at any timing when the fourth hold memory in the 1 special figure or the second special figure occurs) This configuration is realized by setting so that (the average or total value of the determination ratios of the hold display pattern) is different. For example, the determination ratio or the like is adjusted so that the ratio in which the fourth direction becomes a special mode is higher.

  According to said structure, since a player pays more attention to a special aspect by paying attention to the number of the hold information which a hold | maintenance memory | storage means memorize | stores, the interest of a game improves.

  (Structure 29) The display mode control means is configured such that when the hold storage means stores the new hold information, the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means is a first specific storage number. When the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is changed to the special mode, the hold storage means stores the new hold information when the hold storage means stores the new hold information. The specific indication displayed in correspondence with the new hold information when the storage number of the hold information is other than the first specific storage number is made more specific than when the special display is set to the special mode. The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of entering the gaming state increases. Note that the first specific storage number may be either the first number or the second number.

  For example, even when the number of stored hold information stored in the hold storage means is one when the hold storage means stores the new hold information, the hold display pattern is determined and the hold display is displayed. In the hold display pattern determination table that can control the mode and is referenced when the number of stored hold information is 1, the hold display pattern of which the rainbow color or red is the final display color is compared to the other stored numbers. This is achieved by increasing the decision rate.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is a specific display displayed in the hold display area and a specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, refer to when the number of stored hold information is one. In the all-period hold display pattern determination table that is displayed, the hold display in which the rainbow color or red becomes the final display color (here, the last color of the display color displayed in the current display area), as compared with other memory numbers. This is achieved by increasing the pattern determination ratio.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  (Structure 30) The display mode control means may be configured such that when the hold storage means stores the new hold information, the hold information stored in the hold storage means is a third number. The hold stored in the hold storage means when the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is in the special mode and when the hold storage means stores the new hold information. When the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is changed to the special mode when the number of stored information is a fourth number different from the third number, You may make it change the display mode of the said specific display to another display mode so that the ratio which changes the display mode of the said specific display to another display mode differs. The third number or the fourth number may be the same as or different from the first number or the second number (hereinafter the same).

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, one or more hold displays that are selected when the number of stored hold information is a third number and that make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode There is no hold display pattern in the pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode, but is selected when the stored number of the hold information is the fourth number, and the specification corresponding to the hold display Among the one or more hold display patterns that make the display mode of display special, there is a hold display pattern that changes from the special mode to another display mode.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, one or more that is selected when the storage number of the hold information is a third number and that makes the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode There is no all-period hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another display mode in the all-period hold display pattern, but is selected when the storage number of the hold information is the fourth number, and Among the one or more whole-period hold display patterns that make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode, there is a whole-period hold display pattern that is changed from the special mode to another display mode.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  (Structure 31) When the display mode control unit stores the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage unit when the hold storage unit stores the new hold information, the display mode control unit is a third number. The hold stored in the hold storage means when the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is in the special mode and when the hold storage means stores the new hold information. When the specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information is changed to the special mode when the number of stored information is a fourth number different from the third number, The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio for changing the display mode of the specific display to another display mode is different.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, one or more hold displays that are selected when the number of stored hold information is a third number and that make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode There is no pending display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) in the pattern, but is selected when the number of stored hold information is the fourth number, and Among the one or more hold display patterns that make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode, a hold display pattern that changes from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color) To be.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, one or more that is selected when the storage number of the hold information is a third number and that makes the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode There is no all-period hold display pattern in the all-period hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color), but the number of stored hold information is the fourth number. Among the one or more all-period holding display patterns that are selected at times and make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display in a special mode, other special display modes (for example, rainbow colors) from the special mode ) So that there is a whole-period hold display pattern to be changed.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  (Structure 32) The display mode control means is configured such that when the hold storage means stores the new hold information, the hold information stored in the hold storage means is a second specific storage number ( When the specific display displayed in correspondence with the new hold information is set to the special mode when the number is the same as or different from the first specific storage number) Corresponding to the new hold information when the stored number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means is a number other than the second specific stored number. The specific display displayed corresponding to the new hold information when the stored number of the hold information is the second specific stored number, when the displayed specific display is in the special mode. Only when the display is in the special mode, The specific display of the display mode of the special embodiment is changed to a first specific display mode.

  For example, the above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the hold display pattern, the determination ratio, etc. in the hold display pattern determination table. For example, in the hold display pattern determination table, one or more hold display patterns that are selected when the number of the hold information stored is a predetermined number and that make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode. There is a holding display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color), but is selected when the stored number of the holding information is other than the predetermined number, and There is no hold display pattern for changing from the special form to another predetermined display form (for example, rainbow color) in one or more hold display patterns that make the display form of the specific display corresponding to the hold display special. To.

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display pattern determination table or the all-period hold The above conditions may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the display pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, one or more all periods that are selected when the number of stored hold information is a predetermined number and that make the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display a special mode When there is an all-period hold display pattern in the hold display pattern that does not change from the special mode to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color), but the number of stored hold information is other than the predetermined number Among the one or more whole-period hold display patterns that are selected and the display mode of the specific display corresponding to the hold display is a special mode, the special mode is changed to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color). Make sure that there is no hold display pattern for the entire period to be changed.

  According to the above configuration, the player pays attention to the number of the hold information stored in the hold storage means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  (Structure 33) When the display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display to the special mode, the display mode control unit executes any one of a plurality of types of effect effects that change the display mode as a result of the effect. The proportion of the specific gaming state differs between when the first action effect of the plurality of types of action effects is executed and when the second action effect different from the first action effect is executed. As described above, the action effect is executed.

  In the above embodiment, when the special figure display result is “big hit”, the determination ratio of the action effect B is high, the determination ratio of the action effect A is the next highest, and the determination ratio of no execution is the lowest. When the special figure display result is “losing”, the opposite is true, so that this configuration is realized. It should be noted that the execution ratio of the effect and the determination ratio of the type may be different depending on which color the display mode of the specific display is changed to. For example, when changing to red or rainbow, the action effect B is easy to be executed, and in other cases, the action effect A is easy to be executed. In addition, it is also possible to make it easier to execute the effect when the expectation level for big hits is greater before and after the change (when it is greater than or equal to a predetermined threshold).

  When the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, the action effect A or B can be executed even in the current hold notice. do it. At this time, the action effect may be executed at the same determination ratio as the action effect in the hold display area.

  According to said structure, since a player pays more attention to a special aspect by paying attention to which action effect changed to a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.

  (Configuration 34) The display mode control means does not change the display mode of the specific display despite the execution of the action effect.

  For example, an action effect (image on the right side of the second stage in FIG. 56) that causes the boomerang S1 to disappear midway may be executed. For example, in step S162, even if there is no change in the display mode, the presence / absence of execution of the action effect is determined. The production control pattern to be set is set. Then, based on this, an action effect may be executed in step S172.

  According to said structure, since a player pays attention to an effect production, the interest of a game improves. Thereby, the execution frequency of the effect presentation can be increased. In addition, when the specific display is in a special mode, the effect is made easier to execute than in other display modes, so that the player can easily expect the change to the notice mode, and the interest of the game is improved.

  (Structure 35) When the said display aspect control means performs the 4th effect production different from the said 3rd effect effect, when performing the 3rd effect effect among the said multiple types of effect effects. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the other display mode after changing to the special mode is different. The third action effect and the fourth action effect may be the same as or different from the first action effect and the second action effect (hereinafter the same).

  For example, in step S162, the effect control CPU 120 checks the data stored in the notice buffer and changes the data read from the notice buffer this time when the display form is changed to the special form this time. The ratio of determining whether to execute one of the effects A and B according to whether or not the special mode of the screen further changes to another display mode and whether or not to change to another display mode The presence or absence of execution of the effect A or B is determined with reference to the tables with different values.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention to an effect production, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 36) When the said display mode control means performs the 4th effect production different from the said 3rd effect effect, when performing the 3rd effect effect among the said multiple types of effect effects. The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the selection ratio for changing the display mode of the specific display after changing to the special mode to another display mode is different.

  For example, in step S162, the effect control CPU 120 checks the data stored in the notice buffer and changes the data read from the notice buffer this time when the display form is changed to the special form this time. It is checked whether the special mode is changed to another predetermined display mode (for example, rainbow color). When the special mode is changed to another predetermined display mode, the action effect A is executed, and the other predetermined display mode is executed. When it does not change, action effect B is executed.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention to an effect production, the interest of a game improves.
(Configuration 37) When the display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display from the normal mode to another display mode, and when the display mode of the specific display changes from the special mode to another display mode The effect production is executed at different rates.

  For example, in step S162, the effect control CPU 120 or the like changes the display mode from the normal mode to another display mode this time, and the data read from the notice buffer changes from the normal mode to another display mode. What is necessary is just to make it determine the decision ratio which performs an effect production by what is to change. The determination ratio of the determination table or the like may be different depending on whether the display mode is changed from the normal mode to another display mode or when the display mode is changed from the special mode to another display mode (one side) May be “0”).

According to said structure, an effect production can be performed suitably and the interest of a game improves.
(Arrangement 38) The gaming machine includes presentation execution means for executing presentation in any of a plurality of presentation modes in response to variable display of identification information executed by the variable display execution section. When the production mode of the production executed by the production execution means is the first production mode among the plurality of production modes, and when the production mode is the second production mode different from the first production mode, The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the special mode is different. In the above-described embodiment, the production mode is different in the probability variation state and the non-probability variation state. For example, the production mode (low accuracy base or high accuracy base and different performance modes in other cases ( Probability latent mode and other modes) may be prepared. Further, a plurality of types of variation pattern tables and variation category tables are provided depending on the mode, and the rendering mode is changed depending on which table is referred to (notification from the CPU 103 to the rendering control CPU 120 by the rendering control command). Also good. The production mode may differ depending on the execution of the pre-reading notice production. In addition, the effect mode may be switched independently on the effect control CPU 120 side without being based on the notification from the CPU 103.

  In the above embodiment, in the hold display pattern determination table, when the effect mode is the normal mode, the display color of the hold display symbol may be white (H3-3, H3-5, etc.), but the effect mode is the probability change mode. In this case, the display color of the hold display symbol is not white (FIGS. 25 to 44). In this way, by changing the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display symbols to the special mode (here, white) according to the production mode (not only 0% and 100%, but also 20% and 80%, etc.) This configuration is realized. Note that the ratio of white and gray may be varied according to the production mode (adjusted by the determination ratio or the like).

  Similarly, when the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the all-period hold display in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the content of the pattern, the determination ratio, and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, when the effect mode is the normal mode, the display color of the hold display symbol may be white (H3-3, H3-5, etc.), but when the effect mode is the probability change mode. The display color of the hold display symbol is not white (FIGS. 25 to 44). In this way, by changing the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display symbols to the special mode (here, white) according to the production mode (not only 0% and 100%, but also 20% and 80%, etc.) This configuration is realized. Note that the ratio of white and gray may be varied according to the production mode (adjusted by the determination ratio or the like).

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 39) In the display mode control means, the effect mode of the effect executed by the effect executing means is a third effect mode (may be the same as the first effect mode) of the plurality of effect modes. The display mode of the specific display is made different between the time and the fourth effect mode (which may be the same as the second effect mode) different from the third effect mode.

  In the said embodiment, this structure is implement | achieved by making the shape of a holding | maintenance display symbol differ according to whether production mode is probability change mode or normal mode. The display mode includes not only the shape but also the size and position. In addition, when the normal mode, the special mode, and the notice mode are expressed in a color other than the display color, the display color may be changed according to the effect mode. When the display position is changed according to the effect mode, for example, the hold display symbols are displayed in a single horizontal row in the normal mode, but may be displayed in a vertical row in the probability change mode. Alternatively, the hold display symbols are displayed in a horizontal row in the normal mode, but may be displayed side by side in the probability changing mode by changing the vertical position. Further, if the production mode is the normal mode, the size of the hold display symbol may be reduced, and if the effect mode is the probability change mode, the hold display symbol may be increased.

According to said structure, an effect diversifies and the interest of a game improves.
(Arrangement 40) It further comprises a game state control means for controlling any one of a plurality of gaming states having different degrees of advantage for the player, and the effect execution means is characterized in that the gaming state control means is one of the plurality of gaming states. The production mode is made different between when controlling to the first state and when controlling to the second state different from the first state.

  In the above-described embodiment, a probability variation state and a non-probability variation state are prepared. When the probability variation state is established, the effect mode is the probability variation mode, and when the probability variation state is established, the effect mode is the normal mode. .

According to said structure, an effect diversifies and the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 41) The variable display execution means includes variable display pattern determination means for determining a variable display pattern for variable display of identification information to be executed, and the display mode control means is configured such that the variable display execution means has a predetermined variable display. When the variable display of the identification information is executed by the pattern, the display mode of the specific display is shifted to a predetermined state that makes it easier to make the special mode than usual.

  For example, each variable display pattern determination table or each whole period reserved display pattern determination table that is referred to in a predetermined state is to be shifted to a predetermined state when a variable display is executed with a variation pattern of reach loss, Each hold display pattern decision that refers to the determination ratio (average value or total value) of the hold display pattern or the whole-period hold display pattern that makes the display mode of the specific display the special mode in a state other than a predetermined state (particularly the normal state) In the table and each all-period hold display pattern determination table, the display mode of the specific display is set higher than the determination ratio (average value or total value) of the hold display pattern or the all-period hold display pattern that makes the special mode. The variable display pattern may be an effect pattern during variable display or a variation pattern. When the variable display of the identification information is executed with the predetermined variable display pattern, for example, when a plurality of variation pattern tables are prepared and the variation pattern table is switched, or when the effect control CPU 120 switches the effect mode. May be. The change of the variation pattern table may be triggered by, for example, the occurrence of a small hit (display result different from the big win). In this case, a reach loss effect is produced and the opening period of the big prize opening is very short. By doing so, it is difficult to recognize that a small hit has occurred, and the game performance is improved.

According to said structure, an effect diversifies and the interest of a game improves.
(Configuration 42) The display mode control means executes a specific effect in which the display mode of the specific display is the notice mode, and the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit is the normal mode. The specific effect is executed so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the notice mode is higher when the special mode is selected, and the execution period of the specific effect and a period other than the execution period The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of the display mode of the other specific display that is not the target of the specific effect displayed by the hold display unit or the current display unit differs from the special mode. . Here, the execution period of the specific effect may be a period including at least one of a period for changing the display mode of the specific display to the notice mode and a period for displaying the specific display of the notice mode.

  In the above embodiment, during the execution period of the pre-reading notice for the hold display symbols other than the hold display symbol that is the target this time (the effect that uses the hold display symbols as the notice mode), the display mode of the hold display symbols is set in the current target. It is forbidden to use anything other than the normal mode (including special modes). It should be noted that this prohibition target may or may not include the specific display displayed in the current display area (this is the target in the above embodiment). Thereby, this configuration is realized. In addition, during the execution period of the pre-reading notice for the hold display symbols other than the target hold display symbols this time (the effect that uses the hold display symbols as the notice mode), the display mode of the hold display symbols is compared to other periods. The ratio of making other than the normal mode may be decreased or conversely increased. In addition, during the current hold notice execution period for hold display symbols other than the hold display symbol that is the target this time, the ratio of prohibiting the display mode of the hold display symbol from being other than the normal mode in the current target is low. Or it may be higher. Moreover, you may prohibit or make a ratio low only about making it a special mode.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Arrangement 43) The gaming machine includes a specific effect executing unit that executes a specific effect for notifying the ratio of the specific game state for the specific display, and the display mode control unit includes an execution period of the specific effect and the specific effect. The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the special mode differs depending on the period other than the execution period.

  For example, a pre-reading notice effect (for example, an effect of changing the background of the display image in the image display device 5) other than changing the display mode of the hold display symbol to the notice mode is executed for the hold display symbol displayed in the hold display area. It is assumed that the presentation control CPU 120 sets the display mode of the hold display symbol other than the normal mode in the current target during the execution period of the pre-reading notice effect for the hold display symbol other than the hold display symbol that is the target this time (special Including the aspect) is prohibited. The prohibited display may include a specific display displayed in the current display area. In addition, during the execution period of the pre-reading notice effect for the hold display symbol other than the target hold display symbol this time, the ratio of changing the display mode of the hold display symbol to something other than the normal mode compared to other periods. You may make it low or conversely high. Moreover, you may prohibit or make a ratio low only about making it a special mode. The pre-reading notice effect may be defined by the effect control pattern.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 44) The display mode control unit or the specific effect executing unit includes an execution determining unit that determines to execute the specific effect, and the execution determining unit performs the specific effect during an execution period of the specific effect. The period from when it is determined to be executed until the specific effect is executed is included.

  For example, in the above embodiment, at the time of starting winning (step S162), the target flag is turned on (step S508) when it is determined that the hold display symbol is other than the normal mode (step S508), and thereafter, the hold is held in step S504. This configuration is realized by prohibiting the display symbol from being other than the normal mode.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Arrangement 45) The display mode control means or the specific effect execution unit may be configured such that the ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on whether the display mode of the specific display is the special mode or not. The specific effect is executed.

  For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines in step S162 whether or not to execute the prefetching notice effect or the prefetching notice. At this time, when the display mode of the other reserved display symbols is a special mode, When it is not an aspect, the ratio to be determined to execute the prefetching notice effect or the prefetching notice is changed. The prefetching notice effect and the prefetching notice may be defined in the effect control pattern.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 46) It comprises a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect for notifying the proportion of the specific game state displayed on the specific display displayed by the hold display means, and the specific effect executing means is a display mode of the specific display. The specific effect is executed so that the ratio of executing the specific effect differs depending on whether the is a special aspect or not.

  For example, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice in step S162. At this time, when the display mode of the other reserved display symbols is a special mode and when it is not a special mode. , The rate at which the pre-reading notice is executed is varied. The pre-reading notice only needs to be specified in the production control pattern.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Structure 47) The display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit to the special mode (other than the case of changing to the special mode from the beginning, and changing the display mode from the middle to the special mode. The display of the specific display displayed by the hold display means when the special mode is not changed to another display mode until the variable display of the identification information corresponding to the specific display is executed. The display mode of the specific display is controlled so that the ratio of the specific gaming state is lower than when the mode is the normal state at the end. Alternatively, the display mode control unit may change the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit to the special mode (in addition to the case of changing to the special mode from the beginning, the special mode from the middle) The special mode is changed to another display mode until a predetermined timing in the variable information display execution period of the identification information corresponding to the specific display (for example, it may be the end of the display period of the specific display). When not changed, the percentage of the specific gaming state is lower than when the display mode of the specific display displayed by the hold display unit and the current display unit is the last normal state. In addition, the display mode of the specific display is controlled.

  In the above embodiment, in the hold display pattern determination table, a hold display pattern (such as H3-3) that does not change the display color of the hold display symbol from white at the start of display (when the hold occurs) to white is selected at the time of loss. It is selected only for the fluctuation categories PA1 and PA2. Alternatively, a hold display pattern that changes from white to white and remains white until the end may be prepared, and the hold display pattern may be selected only in the variation categories PA1 and PA2 selected at the time of loss. On the other hand, the hold display pattern (H3-1, H3-4, etc.) in which the final color is blue may be selected in the variation category PB3 selected at the time of big hit (FIGS. 25 to 44). Thereby, this configuration is realized. The display color of the on-hold display symbol is changed from white at the start of display (at the time of the on-hold) to white (may be gray) so that the on-hold display pattern that is not changed is selected even at the time of big hit, and the specific gaming state is determined at a determined rate. The ratio may be changed. That is, one ratio may not be “0” (the same applies hereinafter).

  When the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the contents of the all-period hold display pattern in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the determination ratio and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, the all-period hold display pattern that does not change the display color of the hold display symbol from white at the start of display (at the time of hold occurrence) to white is displayed in the variation categories PA1 and PA2 selected at the time of the loss. On the other hand, the hold display pattern that is selected only when the final color is blue may be selected when the variation category PB3 is selected when the big hit. The predetermined timing in the execution period of the variable display of the identification information may be an appropriate timing such as before the start of reach, after the start of reach, or before the derivation of the variable display result. Note that a whole-period hold display pattern that changes to white from the middle and remains white until the end is prepared, and the all-period hold display pattern is selected only for the variable categories PA1 and PA2 selected at the time of loss. Also good.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Configuration 48) When the variable display of the identification information executed by the variable display execution unit does not reach the reach mode and the display result does not become the specific display result, the display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display. After the special mode, the display mode is not changed. When the variable display does not become a specific mode such as a pseudo-ream, the display mode of the specific display may be changed to the special mode and not changed to another display mode. In addition, when the display mode of the specific display is not changed to another display mode after changing to the special mode (for example, it may be specified based on the hold display pattern determined at the time of starting winning), the target is held. Regardless of the variation pattern at the time of variable display corresponding to the display symbol, variable display may be executed so as not to reach the reach mode (or specific mode) (such an effect control pattern is set).

  In the above-described embodiment, in the hold display pattern determination table, the hold display pattern is selected so that the display color of the hold display symbol is changed to white from the start of display only when the variable categories are PA1 and PA2. When the display color of the target is changed to white from the start of display and is not changed, the variable display of the target is not in the reach mode. Thereby, this configuration is realized. Alternatively, a hold display pattern that changes from white to white and remains white until the end may be prepared, and the hold display pattern may be selected only in the variation categories PA1 and PA2 selected at the time of loss.

  When the specific display subject to the above configuration is the specific display displayed in the hold display area and the specific display displayed in the current display area, for example, the contents of the all-period hold display pattern in the all-period hold display pattern determination table The above condition may be satisfied by adjusting the determination ratio and the like. For example, in the all-period hold display pattern determination table, only when the variable category is PA1 and PA2, the all-period hold display pattern that does not change the display color of the hold display symbol to white from the start of display is selected. When the display color of the hold display symbol is changed to white from the start of display and is not changed, the variable display of the target is made not to reach the reach. Thereby, this configuration is realized.

According to said structure, since a player pays attention by a special aspect, the interest of a game improves.
(Configuration 49) The pachinko gaming machine 1 includes suggestion effect execution means for executing an suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display is changed from the special mode to another display mode.

  The change suggestion effect is realized, for example, by an effect of displaying boomerang S1 or the like in the effect effect. Since such a presentation may change the display mode of the specific display, it is suggested that the display mode of the specific display is changed.

  According to the above configuration, the player expects the display mode of the specific display to change from the special mode due to the suggestion effect, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  (Configuration 50) The specific gaming state is a state in which a predetermined gaming value can be given more than usual, and the gaming machine has the display mode control unit set the display mode of the specific display to the special mode. Provided with a privilege granting means for granting a player a privilege different from the game value when not changing to another display mode.

  For example, when a hold display pattern that does not change the display color of the hold display pattern to white from the start of display is selected in the hold display pattern determination table, or the display color of the hold display pattern is displayed in the all-period hold display pattern determination table When a whole-period hold display pattern that is white and does not change from the start is selected, points such that a premium image can be viewed may be given to the player after the timing at which the hold display may change (for example, FIG. 61). For example, the effect control CPU 120 stores the points in the RAM 122 and outputs the accumulated points as a two-dimensional code or the like at a predetermined timing. A player can view a premium image or the like by reading the two-dimensional code with a mobile phone or the like.

  According to said structure, even if the display mode of a specific display does not change from a special mode, the interest of a game can be maintained.

  (Modifications) The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may not have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment and the like, and the one described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. The structure of the part may be provided. Below, the modification of the said embodiment is shown. You may combine at least one part about each of the following modification.

  Note that the change in the display mode of the specific display displayed in the hold display area may be determined for each change. For example, the display mode change of the specific display may be determined with reference to commands stored in the first start winning command buffer or the second starting winning command buffer.

  What is necessary is just to satisfy | fill said each structure by adjusting the determination ratio of the hold display pattern of each hold display pattern determination table of FIGS. 25-44, and the determination ratio of each table of FIG.

In the above-described embodiment, in order to notify the effect control board 120 of the change pattern indicating the change mode such as the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence or absence of the pseudo-continuous,
Although an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 120 by two or more commands. Specifically, in the case of notifying by two commands, the gaming control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to indicate whether there is a pseudo-continuity, whether there is a slip effect, etc. before reaching reach (so-called if not reach). A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop) is transmitted, and the second command has reached the reach such as the type of reach and presence / absence of re-lottery effect (if the reach does not reach, the so-called first You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time and fluctuation | variation aspect (after 2 stop). In this case, the effect control board 120 may perform the effect control in the change display based on the change time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the change time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 120 selects the specific change mode executed at each timing. Also good. When sending two commands, two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt. After sending the first command, a certain period of time has passed (for example, the next timer interrupt). The second command may be transmitted. Note that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. In this way, by notifying the variation pattern by two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In addition, the image display operation in the image display device for executing the device configuration and data configuration of the gaming machine, the processing shown in the flowchart, the sound output operation in the speaker, and the lighting operation in the game effect lamp and the decoration LED Various production operations including the above can be arbitrarily changed and modified without departing from the gist of the present invention. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, and is scored based on the occurrence of winnings by enclosing gaming media It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that gives

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to a computer device included in the gaming machine such as the pachinko gaming machine 1. Alternatively, it may be distributed in a pre-installed manner in a storage device such as a computer device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  With regard to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, it has been described that processing (information output processing) for outputting information (data) related to the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the information output circuit to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described. Information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by such information output processing may include a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes for the game balls (game balls).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a first start winning opening (ordinary winning ball apparatus 6A), a second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B), and a large winning opening (special variable winning ball apparatus 7) are provided. There are multiple types of winning holes. Then, the winning of the game balls in the winning holes is detected by a winning detection switch such as the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, and the count switch 23, and the detection signal is a microcomputer for game control. 100 is input.

  The game control microcomputer 100 can perform processing for counting and storing the number of game balls (winning number) won in each winning port during a predetermined period based on a detection signal input from the winning detection switch. It is possible, and by performing such processing, winning information that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes that the game ball has won during a predetermined period is stored. Then, the game control microcomputer 100, based on such winning information, every time a predetermined period elapses, a winning information signal that can identify the winning mouth and the winning number that the game ball has won in each predetermined period. Is output from the information output circuit to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The number of winnings specified by the winning information signal that can be counted and stored in the gaming control microcomputer 100 and the winning opening and the winning number that the game ball has won can be specified is, for example, every predetermined elapsed time such as every 10 minutes. Information on the number of winnings (output every predetermined elapsed time), information on the number of winnings for each period required to generate one big hit gaming state (output every time a big winning gaming state occurs), each day Information regarding the number of winnings since the power was turned on (output every predetermined elapsed time), and information regarding the number of winnings for each player (when the player can be specified by player specifying information such as game card information) In addition, any information may be output when the end of the game is selected by each player.

  In addition, as the winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the winning number that the game ball has won, the winning opening and the winning number (one piece) that are output every time the gaming ball wins any of the winning holes, and May be a winning information signal that can identify the

  Further, as another example of outputting the winning information signal to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, in order to perform an operation test on a part of the output terminals of the main board 11 with a test device provided outside the pachinko gaming machine 1. These connection parts may be connected, and a winning information signal indicating the latest winning information in the current gaming state may be output from the gaming control microcomputer 100 to the outside via the connecting portion.

  In this way, a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning points of the game balls is output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the winning opening where the gaming balls have won outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output. It is possible to recognize winning information that can specify the number of winnings.

[Second Embodiment]
As the second embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine having the game control as an example of the game control, such as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the first embodiment, is configured as an enclosed circulation pachinko machine (pachinko gaming machine). An example of a system for managing the pachinko machine and the card unit will be described. Note that the gaming machine, card unit, and system for managing them described as the second embodiment below may be applied to any of the gaming machine and card unit described as the first embodiment.

  The present invention shown by the embodiment described below is a gaming machine represented by, for example, a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, and includes a first control means and a second control means that communicate with each other, It relates to a game board and a game frame.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, for example, it includes a first control means communicably connected to an authentication information management apparatus and a second control means communicably connected to the first control means, and the first control means and the second control A means is disclosed as a pair authentication information, and a second control means is disclosed as a gaming machine in which one of the pair authentication information is stored in advance (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-1000076).

  Conventionally, for example, there is one that performs transmission / reception of ciphertexts using a common key cryptosystem between a main CPU that controls the gaming state of a gaming machine and a sub-CPU that controls, for example, a variable display device (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2004-124) -89701).

  In the gaming machine, when the first control means and the second control means communicate with each other, there is a possibility that the communication between the two control means is interrupted and the communication between the two becomes impossible. Assuming such a situation, it is necessary to predetermine a return procedure after communication between the two becomes impossible. In this case, if the predetermined information that has been generated on the one hand and is scheduled to be transmitted to the other side has not reached the other side, a return process in which the predetermined information is transmitted to the other side must be determined upon return.

  However, if such a return process is included in the user program executed by the control means, the control burden on the control means executing the user program increases.

  The present invention has been conceived in view of such circumstances, and its purpose is to reduce the control burden related to the return processing after the communication between the first control means and the second control means becomes impossible. That is.

(1) A gaming machine (P stand 2F) including first control means (main control part 161F) and second control means (payout control part 171F) communicating with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
User program areas that can store user programs (main control storage unit 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF),
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF, 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88, etc.) for storing the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control units 600F, 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and the return process On the condition (SF292 in FIG. 90: a flag indicating the completion of recovery is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F in FIG. 90), the generation of the predetermined information by the execution of the user program is performed. 90 (SF293 in FIG. 90: A signal for starting the processing of the user program is transmitted, or the processing of the user program stopped by the stopping unit is canceled and the processing of the user program is restarted).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(2) In (1) above,
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control unit and the second control unit include the user program area and the communication control circuit, the processing is appropriately restarted in both the first control unit and the second control unit. be able to.

(3) In the above (1) or (2),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuit (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).
When transmitting the predetermined information, the communication control circuit also transmits arrival confirmation information that is updated according to a predetermined update pattern in order to confirm the arrival of the predetermined information (FIG. 93: to the payout control unit 171F) Send the power-on notification command including the serial number sent last time (main control serial number = n + 1)),
The communication control circuit of one of the first control means and the second control means resends the arrival confirmation information transmitted last time when returning from the communication disabled state (FIG. 93: power supply for power-on notification command) Send response of input / output)
The first control means or the second control means including the other communication control circuit includes the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the communication disabled state and the arrival confirmation information received before communication is disabled. Is not based on the predetermined information (FIG. 93: main control sequence number = n + 1 and payout control sequence number = n do not match) based on the predetermined information transmitted by the one communication control circuit by the return processing. An information update process (FIG. 93: execute recovery process) is executed.

  According to the above configuration, when the arrival confirmation information received when returning from the communication disabled state and the arrival confirmation information received before the communication is disabled are not in a predetermined relationship, one communication control is performed by the return process. Since the information updating process based on the predetermined information transmitted by the circuit is executed, the communication burden between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced.

(4) In the above (1) to (3),
The information storage unit includes a nonvolatile storage area (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88) and a volatile storage area (for example, a register other than the transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87). And registers other than the data reception register 713F shown in FIG.

  According to the above configuration, since the information storage unit has the nonvolatile storage area and the volatile storage area, it is possible to suppress the amount of data required in the recovery process when communication is resumed.

(5) In the above (1) to (4),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set a valid period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written in the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner has expired (FIG. 88: main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting) The register 719cF sets an effective time during which the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written into the data reception register 713F after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is cut off. ).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit can set a valid period during which the predetermined information can be written to the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner expires. It is possible to reliably store the necessary information even after. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between nails of the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the predetermined information is continuously displayed. By setting an effective period writable in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information that the floating ball has won.

(6) A game board (game board 26F) provided with first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means includes
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (payout control unit 171F) included in the game frame (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87) that stores the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control unit 600F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined manner (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 161bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the return process. 90 (SF293 in FIG. 90: a flag indicating recovery completion is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F), the generation of the predetermined information by executing the user program is resumed (SF293 in FIG. 90: user program). A signal for starting the above process is transmitted, or the process of the user program stopped by the stopping means is canceled and the process of the user program is resumed).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(7) A game frame (front frame 5F) provided with second control means (payout control part 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control part 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F). ,
The second control means includes
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88) for storing the predetermined information;
Information transmitting means (encrypted communication control unit 700F) for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit in a predetermined mode (for example, an aspect such as encryption);
When the communication control circuit recovers from the communication disabled state (recovery function of the communication control circuit 171bF), the communication control circuit executes a return process for transmitting the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit, and ends the return process. 90 (SF293 in FIG. 90: a flag indicating recovery completion is written in the recovery request / completion register 718F), the generation of the predetermined information by executing the user program is resumed (SF293 in FIG. 90: user A signal for starting the program processing is transmitted, or the processing of the user program stopped by the stopping means is canceled and the processing of the user program is resumed).

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(8-1) A gaming machine (P stand 2F) including first control means (main control unit 161F) and second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with each other,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is:
User program areas that can store user programs (main control storage unit 161cF, payout control storage unit 171cF),
Communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF, 171bF) for transmitting predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88, etc.) for storing the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF);
Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF) for transmitting encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means,
At least one of the first control means and the second control means is a decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information transmitted by the other (for example, the communication control circuit 161bF decrypts the information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF). including.

  According to the above configuration, at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit encrypts the information stored in the information storage unit by the encryption unit of the communication control circuit and transmits the information transmitted by the other decryption unit. Since the information is decrypted, the processing of the encrypted communication performed between the first control means and the second control means can be reduced, and the contents of the encrypted information can be prevented from leaking and the security from being lowered. it can.

(8-2) In the above (8-1),
Both the first control unit (main control unit 161F) and the second control unit (payout control unit 171F) include the user program area and the communication control circuits (communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF).

  According to the above configuration, since both the first control unit and the second control unit include the user program area and the communication control circuit, the encrypted communication process is performed in both the first control unit and the second control unit. In addition to mitigation, it is possible to prevent the content of encrypted information from leaking and reducing security.

(8-3) In the above (8-1) or (8-2),
The communication control circuit is configured to generate an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when power is turned on (for example, an encryption key and a decryption key are generated by an authentication sequence performed when the power is turned on shown in FIG. 90); The encryption communication using the encryption key and the decryption key generated by the process is executed (after the authentication sequence shown in FIG. 90, the encryption communication can be performed using the generated encryption key and the decryption key).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit executes a process of generating an encryption key and a decryption key used for encryption communication when the power is turned on, and a process of performing encryption communication using the encryption key and the decryption key generated by the process Therefore, it is possible to reduce the encryption communication process performed between the first control unit and the second control unit, and to appropriately restart the process in at least one of the first control unit and the second control unit. .

(8-4) In the above (8-1) to (8-3),
In the communication control circuit, it is possible to set a valid period in which the predetermined information can be continuously written in the information storage unit after the authentication with the communication partner has expired (FIG. 88: main control unit transmission buffer write valid time setting) The register 719cF sets an effective time during which the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F can be written into the data reception register 713F after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is cut off. ).

  According to the above configuration, the communication control circuit can set a valid period during which the predetermined information can be written to the information storage unit continuously after the authentication with the communication partner expires. It is possible to reliably store the necessary information even after. For example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between nails of the game area 27F) when authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the predetermined information is continuously displayed. By setting an effective period writable in the information storage unit, it is possible to reliably store and protect information that the floating ball has won.

(8-5) A game board (game board 26F) provided with first control means (main control unit 161F),
The first control means includes
It is possible to communicate with the second control means (payout control unit 171F) included in the game frame (front frame 5F),
A user program area (main control storage unit 161cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a transmission data buffer 613F shown in FIG. 87) that stores the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 161bF);
The second control including decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, information encrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF is decrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF) Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 161bF) for transmitting to the means.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(8-6) A game frame (front frame 5F) provided with second control means (payout control unit 171F) communicating with the first control means (main control unit 161F) included in the game board (game board 26F). There,
The second control means includes
A user program area (payout control storage unit 171cF) capable of storing a user program;
A communication control circuit (communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting the predetermined information generated by the execution of the user program,
The communication control circuit includes:
An information storage unit (for example, a data reception register 713F shown in FIG. 88) for storing the predetermined information;
Encryption means for encrypting information stored in the information storage unit (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 171bF);
The first control including decryption means for decrypting the encrypted information encrypted by the encryption means (for example, information encrypted by the communication control circuit 171bF is decrypted by the communication control circuit 161bF). Encryption information transmitting means (encrypted communication function of the communication control circuit 171bF) for transmitting to the means.

  According to the above configuration, when returning from the communication disabled state, the communication control circuit does not regenerate and transmit the predetermined information that has not been transmitted due to the communication disabled by executing the user program. Since the predetermined information stored in the information storage unit is transmitted, it is not necessary to execute the user program in order to recover from the incommunicable state, and the control burden can be reduced accordingly.

(9-1) The present invention is connected to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and the gaming machine is communicatively connected, and uses the valuable value possessed by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming machine is
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 65: game ball counter);
Count that counts the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 71). Count request transmitting means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 72: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P stand 2F sends a status information response command including information of counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
The gaming device is:
Based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means, counting processing means for counting the gaming points to the points (FIG. 72: CU3F is requested when receiving a status information response including information of counting request = ON. The number of counting balls is added to the number of holding balls)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 62: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 72: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F) for processing the points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 72: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notifying means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 72: CU3F is ready to return a card when the card can be removed) Information on status OFF and card waiting for card removal is notified to P stand 2F.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-2) The present invention is communicably connected to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a winning occurs, and uses the valuable value possessed by the player to play a game in the gaming machine. A gaming device (CU3F) that enables
Count processing means for counting the gaming points based on the counting request from the gaming machine (FIG. 72: When the CU3F receives a status information response including information of counting request = ON, the requested counting ball And add the number to the number of balls.)
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 62: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
Recording medium processing means (FIG. 72: CU3F is inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F) for processing the points counted by the counting processing means so as to be specified by the recording medium received by the recording medium receiving means. Memorize the number of balls in the card.),
Recording medium return means for returning the recording medium processed by the recording medium processing means (FIG. 72: CU3F returns a card storing the number of possessed balls);
Removal waiting state notifying means for notifying the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting to be removed (FIG. 72: CU3F is ready to return a card when the card can be removed) The P table 2F is notified of information indicating that the state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed.).

  According to the above configuration, the removal waiting state notifying means notifies the gaming machine that the recording medium returned by the recording medium returning means is waiting for removal, so that the gaming machine removes the recording medium from the player. Can be notified, and forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-3) The present invention is connected to a gaming device (CU3F) that enables a game using a valuable value possessed by the player so as to be able to communicate, and a gaming machine that gives a predetermined game point when a winning occurs ( P stand 2F)
Game point storage means for storing the game points (FIG. 65: game ball counter);
Count that counts the game points stored in the game point storage means based on an operation for counting the game points to a predetermined score (for example, pressing the “count” button shown in FIG. 71). Count request transmitting means for transmitting a request to the gaming device (FIG. 72: When there is a counting ball payout request at the start of counting, the P stand 2F sends a status information response command including information of counting request = ON to CU3F To send to
When the points counted based on the counting request from the counting request transmission means are processed in a manner that can be specified by the recording medium received by the gaming device, and the recording medium is returned, the recording medium is awaiting removal. (FIG. 72: When the card 2F is ready for card removal, the CU 3F notifies the card return preparation state OFF and card removal waiting ON information from the CU 3F. Receive.)

  According to the above configuration, since the game device receives a notification that the recording medium returned by the recording medium return means is in a removal waiting state, the game machine prompts the player to remove the recording medium. This makes it possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium. In addition, it is possible to call attention to prevent theft caused by forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-4) In the above (9-1) to (9-3),
The gaming device includes notification means (for example, a display 312F shown in FIG. 62) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to notify the gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, so that it is possible to prevent forgetting to remove the recording medium.

(9-5) In the above (9-1) to (9-3),
The gaming machine includes display means (for example, a variable display device 278F shown in FIG. 62) for notifying that the recording medium is waiting to be removed based on the notification from the gaming device.

  According to the above configuration, since it is possible to visually notify the gaming machine that the recording medium is waiting to be removed, forgetting to remove the recording medium can be prevented.

(9-6) In the above (9-1) or (9-2),
The removal waiting state notification means notifies the gaming device or a device connected to the gaming machine (for example, a hall computer, a call lamp on P units) that the recording medium is waiting to be removed. .

  According to the above configuration, it is possible to prevent the user from forgetting to remove the recording medium by notifying a device other than the gaming machine or gaming device that the recording medium is waiting to be removed.

(9-7) The present invention relates to a gaming machine (P stand 2F) that gives a predetermined gaming point when a prize is generated, and is connected to the gaming machine in a communicable manner, and uses the valuable value owned by the player. A gaming system comprising a gaming device (CU3F) that enables gaming on a machine,
The gaming device is:
A recording medium receiving means (FIG. 62: a card insertion / discharge port 309F for receiving a card) for receiving a recording medium capable of specifying a valuable value owned by the player;
When the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means, a game hall specifying information notifying means (FIG. 68) for notifying the gaming machine of game hall specifying information capable of specifying the game hall in which the gaming device is installed. When the card is received at the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including the “store code” added by the security board 325F to the P unit 2F.
The gaming machine is
Game hall identification information storage means for storing the game hall identification information notified by the game hall identification information notification means (FIG. 68: P stand 2F stores “store code” included in the insertion notification command). ,
The game room specifying information newly notified by the game hall specifying information notifying means when the communication is restored after recovering from the communication incapable state where the gaming machine and the gaming device cannot communicate, and the game hall specifying When a recovery request including a “store code” is transmitted from the CU 3F to the game hall specifying information comparing means to be compared with the game hall specifying information stored in the information storage means, the “store code” ”And the stored“ store code ”are determined to match.)
Game prohibition means for prohibiting continuation of the game when the game hall identification information is determined to be inconsistent by the game hall identification information comparison means (P store 2F stores “store code” from CU3F. If the store code does not match, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  According to the above configuration, if the newly notified game hall specifying information and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means do not match, the continuation of the game is prohibited. It is possible to prevent fraud in which the store is moved in the stored state.

(9-8) In the above (9-7),
The gaming device is:
A device capable of specifying a game control device (for example, security board 325F shown in FIG. 63) included in the game device when the recording medium is received by the recording medium receiving means and when the communication is restored. Device specific information notifying means for notifying the gaming machine of specific information (SC board ID) (FIG. 68: When the card is received at the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the CU 3F receives the “SC board ID” added by the security board 325F. And a card insertion notification command including:
The gaming machine is
Device specifying information storage means for storing the device specifying information notified by the device specifying information notifying means (FIG. 68: P base 2F stores “SC board ID” included in the insertion notification command);
When the communication is recovered, the device specifying information comparing unit (P 2F) compares the device specifying information newly notified by the device specifying information notifying unit with the device specifying information stored in the device specifying information storing unit. Further compares “SC board ID” from CU3F with the stored “SC board ID”),
The game prohibiting means prohibits continuation of the game when the device specifying information comparing means determines that the device specifying information is inconsistent (in the case of mismatch, prohibiting continuation of the game).

  According to the above configuration, when the newly notified device identification information and the device identification information stored in the device identification information storage means do not match, the game is prohibited from being continued, so the counting balls are stored in the game medium. Unauthorized movement of the gaming machine in the state can be prevented.

(9-9) In the above (9-7) or (9-8) above,
The gaming machine is
A game hall identification information reading means for reading the game hall identification information added to the game medium used for the game (for example, a sensor is provided in the collection ball passage path of the P stand 2F, and the sensor is provided in the game ball. Read certain identification information (such as surface markings).
The game hall specifying information comparing means includes the game hall specifying information added to the game medium read by the game hall specifying information reading means, and the game hall specifying information stored in the game hall specifying information storage means. Compare (by the read identification information, it is determined whether or not it matches the identification information of the game ball of the own store. To do.)

  According to the above configuration, if the game hall identification information added to the game medium read by the game hall identification information reading means and the game hall identification information stored in the game hall identification information storage means do not match, the game medium It is possible to notify that game balls from other stores are mixed.

  Hereinafter, a second embodiment (hereinafter simply referred to as “embodiment”) will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Configuration of pachinko machine>
First, the configuration of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In each amusement island (not shown) arranged in a plurality of game halls (halls), an enclosed circulation pachinko machine as an example of a game machine (hereinafter also abbreviated as a game machine, a pachinko machine, or a P machine). 2F is attached. Note that a card unit (hereinafter also abbreviated as CU) 3F, which is an example of a gaming device, is installed in a one-to-one correspondence with the P table 2F at a side position on a predetermined side of the P table 2F. Yes.

  The P stand 2F encloses a pachinko ball (game ball) as an example of a game medium, and the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F to drive the launch motor 18F (see FIG. 63) and enclose it. Each ball is shot one by one into the game area 27F on the front of the game board 26F so that a game can be played. Specifically, a touch sensor is provided around the hitting operation handle 25F, and the player's hand touches the touch sensor while the player is operating the hitting operation handle 25F. Is detected by a touch sensor, and the firing motor 18F is driven. In this state, the hitting momentum is adjusted according to the amount of turning operation of the hitting operation handle 25F by the player, and the ball is shot into the game area 27F.

  A key hole 10F is provided above the hitting operation handle 25F, and the front frame 5F (see FIG. 63) is unlocked (for example, rotated clockwise) by inserting a key possessed by a game attendant. The frame 5F is opened, and the glass door 6F is opened by an unlocking operation (for example, counterclockwise rotation) of the glass door (front member) 6F.

  62 is a so-called first type pachinko machine, and a variable display device (hereinafter also referred to as a special symbol) 278F is provided at the center of the game area 27F. In addition, the game area 27F is provided with a plurality of types of winning holes through which the inserted pachinko balls can be won. In the game area 27F shown in FIG. 62, one large winning opening (variable winning ball apparatus) 271F, three normal winning holes 272F, 273F, 274F, and three start winning holes 275F, 276F, 277F are shown. ing. In particular, the start winning opening 276F is configured by an electric tulip that can be changed between a first state (for example, an open state) that is advantageous to the player and a second state (for example, a closed state) that is disadvantageous to the player. .

  The variable display device 278F variably displays based on the detection signal of the start winning ball won in each start winning opening 275F, 276F, 277F. When the display result of the variable display device is a combination of specific identification information (for example, a glance), a big hit state is established and the big prize opening 271F is opened.

  In addition, since the display result of the variable display device is a combination of predetermined special identification information (for example, a combination of probability variation symbols such as 777) out of a combination of jackpot symbols (grooves), the probability variation big hit state is A probability variation state (probability variation state) in which the occurrence probability of the jackpot is improved after the occurrence of the jackpot state is generated.

  Pachinko balls that have been struck into the game area 27F are won at any of the winning openings or are collected at the out opening 154F without winning. The pachinko balls won in the winning opening and the pachinko balls collected in the out mouth 154F are again returned to the hitting ball launch position through the collection path (not shown) in the P stand 2F. Then, when the player operates the hitting operation handle 25F, the pachinko ball at the hitting position is again shot into the game area 27F.

  An indicator 54F is provided at a position below the game area 27F in the P stand 2F. The display 54F is composed of a liquid crystal display device. 62, the display 54F is formed integrally with the CU 3F and is fitted to the front surface of the P base 2F even when the display 54F is attached to the P base (pachinko machine) 2F independently of the CU (card unit) 3F. It is also possible to use a configuration that combines them. If the display unit 54F of the CU3F is fitted to the front surface of the P base 2F, the CU3F and the P base 2F can be more strongly connected, and thus fraud can be further prevented.

  A 7-segment display 50F is provided below the display 54F. The 7-segment display 50F includes a 7-segment LED display, and is controlled by a payout control unit 171F described later. The 7-segment display 50F displays the number of game balls to be described later, an error number of an error that has occurred, and the like.

  Further, a counting button 28F for counting from game balls to holding balls is provided at the left position of the hitting operation handle 25F on the P platform 2F. As will be described in detail later, when the count button 28F is pressed once, for example, 100 balls are counted from the game ball to the holding ball, and when pressed for a long period of time (long press), the game ball currently held is considered. Then, the number of game balls is counted from the number of balls corresponding to the number of balls pressed.

  Thus, since the counting button 28F is provided on the P base side, the operability of the player sitting facing the P base can be improved as compared with the case where the counting button 28F is provided on the CU side.

  A game ball number display 29F for displaying the number of game balls is provided at the upper right of the counting button 28F. The game ball number display 29F is a 7 segment type display. The game ball number display 29F may be configured by a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, or other display.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 2F is a game machine that performs game control like the pachinko machine 1 described above as an enclosed circulation pachinko machine, and the basic game control and effect control are performed by the pachinko machine 2F. Controls similar to those of the gaming machine 1 (for example, variable display control based on hold storage information, big hit game control based on hold storage information, and probability change control based on hold storage information) are performed.

<Configuration of card unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the configuration of the CU3F according to the present embodiment will be described. This CU3F is a visitor card (hereinafter also referred to as a general card) having a prepaid function, which is a game recording medium issued to a general player who has not registered as a member, and a member who has registered as a member in the game hall. Receive a membership card, which is a game recording medium issued to a player. Visitor cards and membership cards are composed of IC cards.

  The CU3F that accepts these cards has a function of converting the game value (for example, the card balance, the number of possessions, the number of accumulated balls, etc.) owned by the player specified by the record information of the card into “game data”. . In the P stand 2F, a ball game corresponding to the number of balls specified by the game ball data is made possible. That is, “game ball data” is data indicating the number of remaining fireable shots. In the following description, “game ball data” is simply referred to as “game ball” in the same manner as a stored ball and a holding ball.

  On the front side of the CU3F, a bill insertion slot 302F for inserting bills, a protruding portion 305F formed to project forward from the front of the device, a card insertion / discharge port 309F for inserting a membership card or a visitor card, etc. Is provided. The member card or visitor card inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F is received by a card reader / writer (not shown), and information recorded on the card is read.

  In the protrusion 305F described above, on the surface facing the player, the display device 312F, the membership card ID recorded on the membership card (hereinafter also simply referred to as the card ID) and the member when the membership card is received. An IR (Infrared) photosensitive unit 320F receives an infrared signal from a replay button 319F for executing a replay game using the number of stored balls specified by the card ID, and a remote control (not shown) possessed by a game attendant. Thus, an IR light receiving unit that converts the electronic signal into an output is provided.

  The display 312F displays a prepaid balance (hereinafter also referred to as a card balance or simply a balance) recorded on the inserted game recording medium (card), and displays the number of game balls and other various information. In addition to being able to display, the surface is configured with a transparent touch panel, and various operations can be input by touching various display items displayed on the display unit of the display 312F with a finger.

  When the replay button 319F is operated and the number of possessed balls acquired by the player is recorded on the inserted card, a part of the number of possessed balls is withdrawn and converted into a game ball, and the converted game ball Based on this, it becomes possible to play a game by the P stand 2F. On the other hand, if the inserted card is a membership card and the number of possessions is not recorded and the stored balls are recorded in the hall management computer, etc., a part of the stored balls is withdrawn and converted into game balls Thus, a game by the P stand 2F becomes possible. That is, when both the stored ball and the holding point are stored in association with the inserted card, the holding ball is withdrawn preferentially. In addition to the replay button 319F, a dedicated ball payout button for withdrawing the ball may be provided, and the replay button 319F may be a button dedicated to the withdrawal of the stored ball.

  Here, the “storing ball” is a game medium deposited in a game hall, and is generally managed by a hall management computer or other management computer installed in the game hall.

  “Number of possessed balls” is the number of balls that the player possesses as a result of the player playing the game with the gaming machine on the card, and the number of balls that have not yet been deposited in the game hall That is. Generally, the number of balls that the player has acquired on the day of the game hall is called “mochidama”, and the number of balls that the player has acquired before the previous day and that has been deposited in the amusement hall is “save ball”. Say.

  The “game ball” is data on the number of balls that can be fired by the gaming machine. As described above, this data is generated in exchange for withdrawing the balance of the prepaid card, the holding ball, or the stored ball.

  Note that the number of possessed balls may be managed by a management device for managing the number of possessed balls set in the game hall. In short, the difference between “sold balls” and “mochidama” is the number of balls that have been deposited in the amusement hall as a result of a storage operation for depositing in the amusement hall, or is still deposited in the amusement hall. It is a point whether it is the number of balls of the stage which is not.

  In the present embodiment, the stored ball data is not recorded directly on the membership card, but is stored in association with the membership card number in the hall server 801F (see FIG. 64) installed in the game hall such as the hall management computer. It is comprised so that the corresponding storage ball can be searched based on. On the other hand, Mochitama records directly on the card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and both may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. In the case of a visitor card, Mochitama is recorded directly on the visitor card. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the ball may be stored in the hall server 801F in association with the card number. When storing the hall server 801F in association with the card number, data that can specify the time stored in the hall server 801F may be written on the card (member card, visitor card) and discharged. Also, the prepaid balance is directly written on a card (member card, visitor card) and discharged.

  Note that the timing for storing the holding ball in the card (member card, visitor card) or the hall server 801F is, for example, stored in real time every time the counting button 28F is operated and the counting process is performed. For example, it may be memorized, or it may be memorized in a lump when the card is returned.

  The banknote inserted into the banknote insertion slot 302F is taken in by a currency discriminator (not shown), and its authenticity and banknote type are identified.

  A ball lending button (hereinafter also referred to as a lending button) 321F and a card return button 322F are further provided on the front side of the CU3F. The ball lending button 321F is a button for performing an operation (conversion operation to a game ball) for withdrawing the balance recorded on the inserted card and using it for a game by the P stand 2F. The card return button 322F is operated when the player ends the game, and the number of game balls determined at the end of the game on the inserted card (the number of balls at the time of card insertion-the number of conversions to game balls + count) This is an operation button for memorizing and discharging the number of possessed balls counted by the operation.

<Configuration of card unit and pachinko machine>
FIG. 63 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the card unit and the pachinko machine. With reference to FIG. 63, the outline of the control circuit of CU3F and P stand 2F is demonstrated.

The CU 3F is provided with a CU control unit 323F composed of a microcomputer or the like. Although not shown, the CU control unit 323F includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like. A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as an area, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  The CU control unit 323F is provided with an external communication unit (not shown) for communicating with a hall management computer and a hall server 801F (see FIG. 64) for security management, A security board 325F is provided for communicating with the payout control board 17F while ensuring security. The CU3F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the P stand 2F side, and the P stand 2F is provided with a connection portion (not shown) to the CU3F side. These connection parts are constituted by connectors, for example.

The security board 325F on the CU side and the payout control board 17F on the P platform side are connected to each other via this connector and connection wiring so as to be communicable. The security board 325F is provided with a communication control IC 325aF for controlling communication between the security board 325F and the payout control board 17F, and a security chip (SC) 325bF for monitoring the security of the P base 2F. Although not shown, the security chip (SC) 325bF includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU, control data, and the like. A RAM (Random Access Memory) functioning as a work area, an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided. Further, the SC 325bF includes a fraud detection unit 1325F, and the fraud detection unit 1325F performs fraud detection by monitoring the game ball addition request information notified from the CU control unit 323F to the P stand 2F. The server 800F (see FIG. 64) is notified. Also, the setting value (constant) for fraud detection is notified from the key management server 800F as board control information. Although not shown, the communication control IC 325aF includes a central processing unit (CPU) as a control center, a read only memory (ROM) that stores programs and control data for operating the CPU, and a work area for the CPU. A functioning RAM (Random Access Memory), an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices, and the like are provided.

  Each RAM of the CU control unit 323F, the security chip (SC) 325bF, and the communication control IC 325aF is configured by a backup RAM whose stored data is not erased even when the power is turned off. Note that an EEPROM may be used instead of the backup RAM.

  The authenticity and type of the banknote are identified by the above-described money classifier, and the identification result signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the IR photosensitive unit 320F receives infrared rays emitted from a remote controller owned by a game attendant, the received light signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. The card reader / writer reads the information recorded on the inserted card, and the read information is input to the CU control unit 323F, and the data to be written to the inserted card from the CU control unit 323F to the card reader / writer. When transmitted, the card reader / writer writes the data to the inserted card.

  The CU control unit 323F manages and stores the player's possession balls when the player is playing. Data such as a balance or the number of game balls is output from the CU control unit 323F to the display control unit 350F, and is converted into display data by the display control unit 350F. The display data converted by the display control unit 350F is output to the display 312F, and the display 312F displays the output display data. Further, when the player operates the touch panel provided on the surface of the display 312F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F via the display control unit 350F. When the player operates the ball lending button 321F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. Note that the ball lending button 321F is not limited to the configuration provided on the CU 3F, and may be configured to be provided on the P base 2F and to input an operation signal to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the replay button 319F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F. When the player operates the card return button 322F, the operation signal is input to the CU control unit 323F.

  The P base 2F includes a main control board 16F that controls the progress of the game of the P base 2F, a payout control board 17F that manages and stores game balls, and a launch motor 18F that drives and controls the launch motor 18F based on commands from the payout control board 17F. A control board 31F, a variable display device 278F (see FIG. 62), and the like are provided. In FIG. 63, a display control board (also referred to as an effect control board) that controls display of the variable display device based on a command from the main control board 16F is omitted.

The main control board 16F is provided on the game board 26F. The main control board 16F is equipped with a game control microcomputer which is a main control unit 161F. The game control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) storing a program for operating the CPU and control data, and a RAM (RAM) functioning as a work area of the CPU. Random Access Memory) and an input / output interface for maintaining signal consistency with peripheral devices. The main controller 161F is connected to a winning sensor 162F and a radio wave sensor 163F provided on the game board 26F. For example, a field-programmable gate array (FPGA) substrate is used for the game control microcomputer of the main controller 161F. The game board 26F is further provided with a display control board (effect control board) for controlling the variable display device 278F and the like.

The payout control board 17F is provided in the front frame 5F (game frame). On the payout control board 17F, a payout control microcomputer which is a payout control unit 171F is mounted. The payout control microcomputer includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) as a control center, C
ROM (Read Only Memory) that stores programs and control data for operating the PU, RAM (Random Access Memory) that functions as a work area for the CPU, and input to maintain signal consistency with peripheral devices An output interface and the like are provided. For example, an FPGA board is used for the payout control microcomputer of the payout control unit 171F.

  Also, for the payout control board 17F, a shot ball detection switch (not shown), an out ball detection switch 701F, a foul ball detection switch 330F, a counting button 28F, a radio wave sensor 173F, a glass door opening detection switch 12F, a front frame opening detection switch 13F is provided in an electrically connected state. The radio wave sensor 173F is for detecting an illegal act of illegally transmitting radio waves and mainly turning on the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. A detection signal of the radio wave sensor 173F is input to the payout control unit 171F via an input port (not shown) of the payout control board 17F. As described above, the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF detects the launch of a game ball by changing from on to off, and the payout control unit 171F subtracts “1” from the number of game balls based on the detection. To do. Therefore, when the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on due to unauthorized radio waves, the number of game balls is not subtracted no matter how many balls are fired. Such radio fraud is detected by the radio wave sensor 173F. In addition, there is a possibility that not only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF but also the shot ball detection switch may be subject to fraud by radio waves. In other words, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by the improper radio wave, the shot of the ball is not detected, while the ball that has actually been shot is collected and detected by the shot detection switch The number of fired balls and recovered balls (out-balls) is wrinkled, an abnormality is detected, and the fraud detection information “number of fired / OUT mismatched balls” is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. Become. However, by sending unauthorized radio waves to the fired ball detection switch to make it undetectable, there is a problem that the fraud detection information of the “number of fired / OUT mismatched balls” is not transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. . In this embodiment, since the radio wave sensor 173F also detects the unauthorized radio wave transmitted to such a shot ball detection switch, the above-described inconvenience can be prevented.

  The number of times the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F are opened is counted by a counter not shown. The counting counter is equipped with a CPU, ROM, RAM, etc., and can be operated by a backup power supply even when the power supply of the P stand 2F is interrupted. And the count value can be transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Here, the backup power source is, for example, a capacitor or a storage battery provided in the P stand 2F.

  The 7-segment display 50F is connected to the payout control unit 171F, and the 7-segment display 50F displays the number of times the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F are opened in accordance with the display control signal from the payout control unit 171F.

  Main control board 16F to payout control board 17F, main chip ID (main control security chip ID), winning opening information, round information, connection confirmation signal, winning detection signal, starting winning opening winning information, error information, symbol confirmation Number of times, jackpot information, manufacturer-specific jackpot information, etc. are transmitted.

  The main chip ID is a chip ID recorded on the main control board 16F of the P base 2F, and is information transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P base 2F is turned on. The winning opening information is information including the type of winning opening (start winning opening, ordinary winning opening, large winning opening) and the number of winning balls (the number of balls to be paid out when a game ball enters the winning opening). This is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the table 2F is powered on. For example, in the prize opening information, the type of the prize opening includes three balls in the big prize opening 271F (see FIG. 62), and information on requesting the dispensing control board 17F to pay 300 balls as the number of prize balls, Each of 275F and start winning opening 277F (see FIG. 62) includes information for entering one ball and requesting the payout control board 17F to pay out 20 balls as the number of winning balls. In addition, after a ball enters a winning port such as the normal winning port 272F and winning port information requesting the paying out of the winning ball is transmitted to the payout control board 17F, the authentication with the communication partner is disconnected due to power interruption or disconnection. In such a case, the payout control board 17F has already received the winning opening information, and the winning ball can be paid out based on the winning opening information. However, after the authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, etc., if a floating ball caught in a nail or the like of the game area 27F and not falling enters a winning opening such as the normal winning opening 272F, payout The control board 17F cannot receive the winning opening information and cannot pay out the winning ball. For this reason, the prize mouth information is continuously displayed so that even if the floating ball enters the prize opening such as the normal prize opening 272F after the authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the prize ball can be paid out. An effective period in which the payout control board 17F can receive (write to the information storage unit) is set. As a result, even if the floating ball enters the winning opening such as the normal winning opening 272F after the authentication with the communication partner is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the payout control board 17F displays the winning opening information if it is within the valid period. It is possible to receive award balls based on floating balls. The round information is information on the number of rounds when a big hit is made, and is transmitted to the payout control board 17F when the power of the P unit 2F is turned on.

  The connection confirmation signal is a signal for confirming that the main control board 16F and the payout control board 17F are connected, and a signal of a predetermined voltage is constantly supplied from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F is configured to control the operation on the condition that the payout control board 17F receives the predetermined voltage signal. The winning detection signal is a detection signal of a pachinko ball that has won a winning opening other than the starting winning opening. Upon receiving this detection signal, the payout control board 17F performs control to add the number of balls to be given to one winning ball to the number of game balls and the number of added balls.

  The start winning award winning information is information indicating that a pachinko ball has won a winning winning opening 1 or a starting winning opening 2. The error information is information for notifying the payout control board 17F that an error has occurred while the main control board 16F is performing game control.

  The symbol determination number of times is information on symbols determined as display results of the variable display device for winnings at each start winning opening.

  The jackpot information is information indicating that a jackpot has occurred. The breakdown includes common jackpot information indicating a jackpot common to each manufacturer and manufacturer-specific jackpot information indicating a manufacturer-specific jackpot. The common jackpot information is a jackpot commonly used by each gaming machine manufacturer, such as 15 round jackpots, and includes probability variation information when a probability change occurs with the jackpot. When the time-short state (control state for shortening the variable display time of the variable display device) occurs, the time-shortage information is included. The manufacturer-specific big hit is a big hit state that is adopted only by a certain gaming machine manufacturer, such as sudden probability change (surprise).

  A health check command and a prize ball number acceptance command are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the main control board 16F. The health check command is a command for checking whether or not the main control board 16F is operating normally. The prize ball number acceptance command is a command indicating that the additional number of balls has been accepted.

  An out ball detection signal is input from the out ball detection switch 701F to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F to which this out ball detection signal has been input subtracts and updates the number of in-game balls (the number of floating balls floating in the game area 27F), as will be described later. In the payout control board 17F to which the foul ball detection signal is input from the foul ball detection switch 330F, as will be described later, the addition ball number and the game ball number are added and updated, and the in-game ball number is subtracted and updated. A shot detection signal is input from the shot detection switch to the payout control board 17F. The payout control board 17F, to which this shot ball detection signal has been input, subtracts and updates the number of balls in game.

  The security board 325F of the CU 3F and the payout control board 17F of the P stand 2F are electrically connected, and a recovery request, a recovery request 2, a communication start request, Various commands such as a communication end request, a status information request, a card insertion notification, a card return notification, and a communication test request are transmitted.

  The recovery request is a command that requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. The payout control board 17F receives the recovery request and notifies the CU 3F of the recovery information of the P base 2F. The command of the recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2F. The communication start request is a command for requesting the P base 2F to start communication. The payout control board 17F receives the communication start request and responds to the CU3F with the communication start. The communication end request is a command for requesting the P unit 2F to end communication. The payout control board 17F receives the communication end request and returns a communication end response to the CU3F.

  The status information request is a command for requesting notification of status information to the P platform 2F. The payout control board 17F receives the status information request and notifies the CU 3F of the status information of the P platform 2F. The card insertion notification is a command for notifying the P unit 2F that a card has been inserted. The payout control board 17F receives the card insertion notification and responds to the CU3F that the card has been inserted. The card return notification is a command for notifying the P unit 2F that the card has been returned. The payout control board 17F receives a card return notification and responds to the CU3F that the card has been returned. The communication test request is a command for notifying test data to the P base 2F. The payout control board 17F receives the communication test request and returns test data to the CU 3F.

  Various responses such as a recovery response, a recovery response 2, a communication start response, a communication end response, a status information response, a card insertion response, a card return response, and a communication test response are transmitted from the payout control board 17F to the security board 325F.

  The front frame 5F (game frame) is provided with a launch control board 31F and a launch motor 18F. The firing control board 31F emits an excitation output to the firing motor 18F when an input signal of a touch ring (hereinafter also referred to as a touch sensor) for detecting that the player is touching the hitting operation handle 25F is input, The firing motor 18F is driven.

  A firing control signal and a firing permission signal are output from the dispensing control board 17F to the firing control board 31F. Upon receiving this, the firing control board 31F outputs a signal for exciting the firing motor 18F. Thereby, the pachinko ball is in a state of being bullet-launched into the game area 27F.

  An indicator 54F is provided in the front frame 5F (game frame). The display 54F receives display data from the display control unit 350F of the CU3F and displays a display screen. As described above, in this embodiment, the P-side display 54F is configured to be controlled on the CU side, but instead, the display 54F is controlled to be displayed on the P-side. A display control substrate may be provided. In this case, the display control board controls the display of the display 54F based on a command from the payout control unit 171F.

<Notification processing of operation / non-operation information from pachinko machine>
FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a process of notifying operation / non-operation information from a pachinko machine. 64 is connected to the CU 3F, the hall server 801F, the key management server 800F, and the history management center 800AF. Here, the key management server 800F is a key management server that stores the SID and authentication key of the CU communication control unit in association with each serial ID (hereinafter also referred to as SID) of the electronic component inside the CU3F. is there. The key management server 800F is a server that can communicate with the main control board 16F. The machine history management center 800AF associates the information of the front frame 5F with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F, and the semiconductor provided on the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. It includes a history management system that stores information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the chip and manages the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F.

  When the manufacturer (game machine manufacturer) ships the front frame 5F and the game board 26F and installs them in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, as shown in FIG. 64, the game machine installation information (operation information) is obtained from the P stand 2F. ) Is notified to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF includes, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F, and the security of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F. The chip ID and the security chip ID of the opponent when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are combined are included. Note that the security chip ID cannot be changed or deleted after registration in the history management center 800AF.

  On the other hand, shipment information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F shipped by the manufacturer is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the shipping information is input to the machine history management center 800AF from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line or the like. The machine history management center 800AF stores the input shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided therein, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is compared with the installed gaming machine information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. As an error notification, for example, an error notification is performed by an error notification lamp or a display 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, Error notification may be performed by the hall management computer or the hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed. The information stored in association with the front chip 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID cannot be changed after the shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF. Further, it is desirable that the shipping information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is registered in the machine history management center 800AF one day before installation in the hall.

  Similarly, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) installed in the hall is removed and stored in the warehouse, the P stand 2F becomes inactive. As shown in FIG. 64, the non-operating information is notified from the P base 2F to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the non-operating information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is information that the front chip 5F of the P platform 2F and the security chip ID of the game board 26F that have been installed are not transmitted.

  On the other hand, the history information management center 800AF receives the removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F removed by the hall or warehouse company. Then, the history management center 800AF stores the input information on the removal of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided to each of them, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is checked against the inactive information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

  Further, when the second-hand dealer resells the game board 26F to another hall and installs it in the hall, when the P stand 2F is operated, as shown in FIG. 64, the game machine installation information (operation information) is obtained from the P stand 2F. The history management center 800AF is notified. Specifically, in the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified to the machine history management center 800AF, for example, the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the main control board 16F, the security chip ID of the combined front frame 5F, etc. It is included.

  On the other hand, movement information (resale information) of the game board 26F resold by the secondhand dealer is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF stores the input movement information of the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in the game board 26F, and is notified from the stored information and the P base 2F. Check against game machine installation information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

  Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) installed by the disposal contractor is discarded, the P stand 2F is in a non-operating state. Thus, the non-operating information is notified from the P base 2F to the machine history management center 800AF. Specifically, the non-operating information notified to the machine history management center 800AF is the security chip of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) of the installed P stand 2F. This is information due to the fact that the ID is not transmitted.

  On the other hand, removal information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (only one of the front frame 5F or the game board 26F) discarded by the discarder is input to the machine history management center 800AF. Then, the history management center 800AF stores the input information on the removal of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided to each of them, and notifies the stored information and the P table 2F. Is checked against the inactive information. The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation.

<Transmission / reception mode between card unit side and pachinko machine side>
Next, FIG. 65 is a schematic diagram showing main data among various data stored on the CU 3F side and the P stand 2F side, and the transmission / reception mode thereof. With reference to FIG. 65, main ones of various data stored on the CU3F side (card unit side) and the P stand 2F side (pachinko machine side) and the transmission / reception mode thereof will be described.

  In this embodiment, the fluctuation of the number of game balls is calculated on the P stand 2F side, and the current latest game ball number is stored and managed. The current number of game balls is also calculated and stored on the CU3F side, but the number of game balls is based on information transmitted from the P stand 2F side. On the other hand, the number of balls (the number of cards), the number of balls, and the card balance (balance) are managed and stored on the CU3F side.

  FIG. 65 shows the RAM storage data provided in the CU control unit 323F on the CU3F side and the RAM storage data mounted on the payout control board 17F on the P stand 2F side. First, when the power is turned on for the first time when the P platform (pachinko machine) 2F and the CU (card unit) 3F are electrically connected for the first time after they are installed in the game hall, the payout control board 17F on the P platform 2F side Receives the main chip ID (main control security chip ID) from the main control board 16F, transmits the main chip ID to the CU3F side, and also issues the payout chip ID ( The payout control security chip ID) is transmitted to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted main chip ID and payout chip ID are stored. Next, the connection time, that is, the data at the time when the communication is started after the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side are connected is transmitted from the CU 3F side to the P stand 2F side, and the transmitted connection time is transmitted on the P stand 2F side. Remember.

  In this state, three pieces of information of the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the connection time identified on the CU3F side are stored on the CU3F side and the P stand 2F side. When the power is turned on thereafter, the three pieces of information, that is, the main chip ID, the payout chip ID, and the previous connection time data are transmitted from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the CU3F side, the transmitted data and the already stored data are collated, and it is determined whether or not the same P stand 2F as that of the previous time is connected. The connection time data is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P unit 2F side by sending new connection time data from the CU3F side when communication between the CU3F side and the P unit 2F side is started. Time data is stored on the P platform 2F side.

  Each time a command and response is transmitted between the CU 3F side and the P base 2F side, the serial number is incremented by “1”, and the serial number is stored on the CU 3F side and the P base 2F side. This serial number is a communication number for confirming whether or not communication is properly performed by updating the number every time data is transmitted / received between the CU 3F and the P base 2F. CU3F (primary station) counts up (+1) and transmits the serial number received at the time of transmission, and P-unit 2F (secondary station) transmits the received serial number as it is. Note that the CU3F does not count up the serial number at the time of retransmission, and makes no response if the serial number continuity is not established. The previous last transmission serial number is a communication number updated at the previous transmission / reception and is a number to be backed up.

  A specific mode of serial number backup in the CU 3F and the P stand 2F in this embodiment will be described. The CU 3F counts up the serial number (+1) and transmits the command to the P platform 2F. The P base 2F backup-stores the serial number of the received command as the previous last transmission serial number. Then, the P base 2F transmits a response to the received command to the CU 3F while keeping the serial number of the received command. The CU3F backs up and stores the serial number of the received response as the previous last transmission serial number. The CU 3F and the P base 2F repeat such processing every time a response from the P base 2F is transmitted to the CU 3F.

  For example, a certain command is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side, and the serial number n at that time is transmitted. When the response is returned from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side, the P base 2F side stores the transmitted serial number n as the last final transmission serial number and transmits the response with the serial number n as it is. On the CU3F side, the returned serial number n is stored as the last final transmission serial number. Next, when a certain command is transmitted from the CU 3F side to the P stand 2F side, the serial number is incremented (+1) and the serial number n + 1 is transmitted. When the response is returned from the P base 2F side to the CU3F side, the P base 2F side stores the transmitted serial number n + 1 as the last final transmission serial number, and transmits the response while maintaining the serial number n + 1. On the P base 2F side, since the serial number n + 1 transmitted is incremented by 1 from the serial number n of the previous last transmission serial number that has already been stored, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally, and the response is sent to the P base 2F side. Reply to the CU3F side. On the CU3F side, the serial number n + 1 returned is incremented by 1 from the serial number n of the previous last transmission serial number that has already been stored. Therefore, it is determined that data communication has been performed normally, and the serial number is sent the next time a command is sent. Count up (+1) and send the command of serial number n + 2 to the P platform 2F side.

  The latest game machine information (game machine information being counted) is transmitted from the P machine 2F side to the CU 3F side. This latest game table information is stored in the latest game table information storage area of the RAM in the payout control unit 171F (see FIG. 63) on the P table 2F side. Specifically, information on the added ball number counter, information on the subtracted ball number counter, and information on the counted ball number counter are included. The number of game balls is not included in the latest game table information, and is transmitted from the P table 2F side to the CU 3F side as the count value of the game ball number counter as will be described later.

  Information on these counters is collectively transmitted to the CU side as a response. The added ball number counter is a counter that counts the added ball number. The added ball is the sum of “the number of winning balls × the number of winning balls” and “the number of back balls”. The back ball is a foul ball. That is, the addition ball indicates the number that the addition ball counter should add to the game ball. The subtraction ball number counter is a counter that counts the number of subtraction balls. The subtraction ball is the “number of fired balls”. That is, the number of balls detected by the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF. Note that the “number of balls to be subtracted” does not include the “number of balls to be counted”. The counting ball counter is a counter that counts the counting balls. The counting ball is “the number of balls converted from game balls to holding balls by the counting operation”.

  When a back ball is generated, the back ball is returned to the hitting ball launching position and the ball hitting operation is performed with the ball feeding to the hitting ball launching position being stopped so that all the back balls are fired into the game area. Even if a back ball is generated, the back ball may be controlled not to be counted as an additional ball. In this case, “addition balls = number of winning balls × number of winning balls”.

  For example, when a pachinko ball placed in the game area 27F wins and the winning information is transmitted from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F, the adding ball to which the gaming ball is added based on the winning information The added ball number counter counts the number, and the value (added ball number) of the added ball number counter is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. Moreover, the subtraction ball counter counts the number of shot balls as the number of subtraction balls based on the output change from on to off of the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF due to the pachinko ball being shot in the game area 27F, The value of the subtraction ball number counter (the number of subtraction balls) is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  Alternatively, the payout control unit 171F counts the number of game balls as the number of counting balls by pressing the counting button 28F, and transmits the value of the counting ball number counter (counting ball number) from the P stand 2F side to the CU3F side.

  On the P stand 2F side, every time the values of the addition ball counter, the subtraction ball counter, and the counting ball counter are transmitted to the CU 3F side, the count values are stored in the previous game machine information storage area (the RAM of the payout control unit 171F). Etc.) are stored (rewritten) as backup data, and the values of the added ball counter, subtracted ball counter, and counted ball counter as the latest game table information are cleared to 0 (excluding the game ball counter). In the present embodiment, “clear” has the same meaning as “initialization”.

  As a result, in the storage area of the previous game table information (game table information transmitted immediately before), data of the number of added balls, the number of subtraction balls, and the number of counted balls, which are the game table information transmitted to the CU3F side immediately before, are backed up. Stored as data. When the latest gaming machine information is not transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side, this backup data includes not only the value of each counter of this time but also the value of each previous counter that has not been sent at the next transmission. It is intended to enable transmission.

  In addition, the payout control board 17F updates the value of the game ball counter in response to the occurrence of a prize, the firing of a ball, the occurrence of a back ball, and the occurrence of a counting ball (conversion from a game ball to a holding ball), The updated value of the game ball counter is transmitted to the CU3F side as the number of game balls.

  On the CU3F side, in the accumulated data storage area in the RAM, the number of game balls, the number of cards held (hereinafter also simply referred to as the number of balls), the number of stored balls, the balance, the total number of added balls (total number of added balls), the total The number of subtracted balls (cumulative number of subtracted balls) and the number of balls held at the time of card insertion are stored. The number of cards possessed is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the number of possessed balls paid out (the number of balls converted from the number of cards possessed to the number of game balls) from the number of balls possessed when the card is inserted, and adding the counted number of balls. That is, the card possession number is the number of possession possessed by the player at the present time.

  The total number of added balls is added based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) transmitted from the P stand 2F side, and the number of balls is updated. Further, the number of balls is updated by subtracting the total number of subtraction balls based on the value of the subtraction ball counter (the number of subtraction balls) transmitted from the P stand 2F side. Further, the number of cards held is added and updated based on the value of the counting ball counter transmitted from the P platform 2F. Thus, the CU3F can manage the latest information by updating the total added ball number, the total subtracted ball number, and the card holding ball number with the latest game table information transmitted from the P table 2F one by one. It becomes possible.

  As shown in the figure, the CU 3F has an area for storing game balls, and also receives a count value of a game ball counter (hereinafter also referred to as game ball number or game ball total number information) from the P stand 2F side. Yes. The CU3F updates the area for storing game balls in the following procedure. That is, the CU3F stores the value based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number), the value of the subtracted ball number counter (number of subtracted balls), and the value of the counted ball number counter transmitted from the P side. The number of game balls being updated is updated, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the game ball counter transmitted from the P platform side at the same timing matches the updated number of game balls. If they match, the game is allowed to continue, but if they do not match, control to shift to an error state is performed.

  As a result, for example, an error notification is performed by the abnormality notification lamp or the indicator 312F, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or the hall server 801F (in this case, the hall Error notification may be performed by the management computer or the hall server 801F). As a result, a predetermined notification that prompts an artificial response by a staff member is performed.

  Instead of shifting to an error state and stopping the game, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side is replaced with the count value of the game ball number counter transmitted from the P unit 2F side. Also good. Alternatively, it may be corrected to an average value of the number of game balls managed on the CU3F side and the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the number of game balls is also stored on the CU3F side, but it is determined whether or not the number of game balls matches the number of game balls managed and stored on the P unit 2F side. (CU3F side function). Therefore, even if a situation occurs in which the number of game balls stored on the P stand 2F side does not match the number of game balls stored on the CU 3F side due to fraud or other circumstances, it can be checked. Here, the determination function is provided on the CU3F side. For example, the number of game balls stored on the CU3F side and stored on the P unit 2F side by the hall server 801F or hall management computer connected to the CU3F. The number of game balls being played may be received, and it may be determined whether or not the two match.

  As shown in FIG. 63, the CU3F has a storage area for storing the number of cards held and the number of stored balls, a storage area for storing the card balance of the received (inserted) card, and the total number of added balls (the number of added balls). (Cumulative total), the total number of subtracted balls (total number of subtracted balls), and a storage area for storing balls when the card is inserted. The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 63) stores a stored ball in response to an input requesting the use of the stored ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU 3F (when there is no holding ball)). Subtract a certain number of balls from the area.

  The CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 63) is an input requesting the use of the holding ball (for example, pressing input of the replay button 319F provided on the CU3F when the holding ball is present (however, when the holding ball is present)) Accordingly, a predetermined number of balls are subtracted from the storage area for storing balls. Further, the CU control unit 323F (see FIG. 63) subtracts a predetermined value from a storage area for storing the card balance in response to an input requesting the use of the card balance (for example, pressing input of the ball lending button 321F).

  When a player performs an operation to deduct the value from the player's own gaming value (for example, prepaid balance, number of balls, or number of stored balls) and use it for the game, the number of balls for the withdrawal The number of balls to be added to the number counter is transmitted from the CU3F side to the P stand 2F side. In response to this, the P stand 2F side adds and updates the game ball counter.

  On the other hand, in the gaming system according to the present embodiment, it is possible to accept a so-called wagon service order in which the gaming value owned by the player is withdrawn and exchanged for a drink or the like. However, access to wagon services with game balls is restricted, and wagon services can only be received with holding balls. This is an image of prohibiting the use of the ball before counting remaining in the dish by hand and using it for the wagon service in the conventional enclosing circulation pachinko machine in which each counter is provided.

  For this reason, in the present embodiment, when the operation for performing the wagon service is executed, if the number of possessed balls is less than the number corresponding to the desired menu of the wagon service, the player is prompted to perform the counting operation. ing. When the player performs a counting operation at that time, the number of counting balls based on the operation is transmitted from the P stand 2F side to the CU 3F side. On the CU3F side, in response to this, the number of game balls is subtracted and the number of cards held is added and updated.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the CU and the P platform>
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the CU (card unit) 3F and the P unit (pachinko machine) 2F will be described.

  FIG. 66 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named recovery request is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P unit 2F. This recovery request command is for requesting recovery information to the P base 2F. A response named a recovery response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this recovery response notifies the CU3F of recovery information.

  A command named recovery request 2 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. The command of this recovery request 2 notifies the added recovery information to the P unit 2F. In response to this recovery request 2, a response named recovery response 2 is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the recovery response 2 notifies the processing result of the added recovery information to the CU 3F. These recovery request 2 and recovery response 2 are basically transmitted / received only when the recovery process is executed. Specifically, the CU 3F transmits the recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F only when the CU 3F that has received the recovery response determines that the recovery process is to be executed based on the information of the recovery response. However, even when it is determined not to execute the recovery process, when the recovery request 2 is sent, it may be determined again whether or not the recovery process is executed on the CU 3F side. The recovery process needs to be executed when a power failure occurs in the CU 3F or P stand 2F and a communication line disconnection is detected. In this embodiment, the recovery process is executed even when the power is turned on at the start of business at the amusement hall. However, when the power is turned on at the start of business, the recovery process is not performed, and the power is cut off at the CU3F or the P stand 2F. Control may be performed so that the communication line disconnection is detected.

  A communication start request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication start request command requests the P base 2F to start communication. A response of a communication start response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This communication start response is a response to the CU3F to start communication.

  A communication end request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication end request command requests the P unit 2F to end communication. A response of a communication end response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of the communication end response is a response to the CU3F for the communication end.

  A status information request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This status information request command is for requesting the status of the CU 3F to the P base 2F. The CU 3F periodically checks the state of the P stand 2F using this command. The status information request command includes the number of balls to be added from the CU side to the P platform side shown in FIG.

  A response of a status information response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. This response of the status information response notifies the CU 3F of the information / status of the P platform 2F. The response of the information response includes the latest game table information and the number of game balls shown in FIG.

  A card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card insertion notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of card insertion. A response of a card insertion response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card insertion response is a response to card insertion to the CU3F.

  A card return notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F. This card return notification command is for notifying the P unit 2F of the card return. A response of a card return response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response to the card return to the CU3F.

  A communication test request command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F. This communication test request command notifies the P unit 2F of test data. A response of the communication test response is transmitted from the P stand 2F to the CU 3F. The response of this card return response is a response of test data to the CU3F.

<Main sequences processed between CU and P>
Next, based on FIGS. 67 to 73, processing is performed between the CU 3F and the P base 2F by processing executed by the CPU mounted on the CU control unit 323F and the CPU mounted on the payout control board 17F. The main sequence will be described.

<< Power-on >>
Next, connection sequence processing at power-on will be described. The sequence process shown in FIG. 67 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F is normally completed. More specifically, it is executed when communication is resumed after the power of the CU3F is turned off while the card is not inserted. A typical example is a case where the power supply is turned off at the amusement hall after one day of business is finished, and the power supply is turned on at the start of business the next day.

  First, power is turned on. When the power is turned on, the P base 2F stops the firing motor 18F to stop the game, and then starts communication. Thereafter, an authentication sequence is started, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F. The CU3F sends the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server, asks whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered, and has the result returned. . If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the previous last transmission sequence number and the previous last transmission count sequence number to the P unit 2F, and requests recovery information from the P unit 2F. The P base 2F refers to the previous last transmission count serial number notified from the CU 3F and executes the count recovery process. Specifically, the P base 2F refers to the last transmission count sequence number last time, and if the CU 3F has not performed the counting process, it is assumed that no counting request has been made, and if the CU 3F has already performed the counting process, Subtract the number of balls from the previous number of game balls to determine the game balls.

  After executing the count recovery process, the P table 2F returns the game information recovery data backed up inside the P table 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F) to the CU 3F as a response (recovery response). The recovery information includes a previous last transmission sequence number, a previously inserted card ID, a previous card insertion time, a previous last transmission addition sequence number, a previous game machine information, and the like.

  In the CU3F that has received the recovery response, if the previous last transmission addition serial number process included in the recovery information has not been executed, the CU3F additional recovery process is performed using the previous game machine information included in the recovery information. When performing the addition ball recovery process, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F and transmits recovery data to the P unit 2F. This recovery data includes the previous last transmission serial number and the number of additional balls.

  In response to this, the P base 2F executes an addition recovery process based on the received recovery data, and returns the result as a response to the CU 3F (recovery response 2). In addition, when the P stand 2F cannot receive the additional number of balls, a recovery process NG is returned as a recovery result.

  This recovery process is a process for recovering the consistency of each other's data between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F, and is executed not only when the power is turned on, but also when a trouble occurs and is recovered. Executed.

  The CU3F counts up the serial number each time a command such as a recovery request is transmitted. However, it does not count up when retransmitting a command. When the P unit 2F receives a command having the same serial number as the previously received serial number, it determines that a communication failure has occurred and the CU 3F has retransmitted the command. The CU 3F transmits a command, and backs up the sequence number when a response with the same sequence number is notified from the P unit 2F. When transmitting a response corresponding to the received command, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the received serial number as it is. The P base 2F backs up the serial number when the response is transmitted.

  After the authentication sequence is completed, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request command to the P platform 2F with the serial number “1”. The P platform 2F returns the received serial number “1” as it is to the CU 3F as a response to the recovery response. Further, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request 2 command to the P unit 2F with a serial number “2”. The P platform 2F returns the response of the recovery response 2 to the CU 3F as it is with the received serial number “2”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F counts up the serial number to “3”, and transmits a communication start request command to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F does not transmit the recovery request 2, the serial number is “2” which is one countdown (−1). In response to this, the P unit 2F clears the recovery data. Then, the P platform 2F returns a response to the communication start response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “3”. Thereafter, a status information request command and a status information response response are transmitted and received between the CU 3F and the P stand 2F.

  The CU 3F counts up the serial number to “4” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F updates the game table information, the game information, and the previous last transmission serial number, and backs up the updated data every time a response of the status information response is transmitted. Then, the P platform 2F returns the response of the status information response to the CU 3F with the received serial number “4”.

  In response to this, the CU3F updates the previous last transmission sequence number, and backs up the updated data every time a response to the status information response is received.

  Thereafter, the CU3F counts up the serial number to “5” and transmits a status information request command to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F sends the response of the status information response to the CU3F with the received serial number “5”. Reply to

<< Card insertion >>
Processing of the CU 3F and the P stand 2F when a card is inserted will be described. The CU 3F shown in FIG. 68 transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n and a card return ready state = OFF to the P unit 2F before card insertion. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n and game prohibition to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, in the CU3F, when a card is inserted, the card reader / writer outputs a command signal for taking the card into the card reader / writer, and the card reader / writer reads information (card ID, etc.) recorded in the taken-in card. A process at the time of card insertion, such as receiving the read information, is executed. Note that information (card ID or the like) recorded on the card read by the card reader / writer may be stored in the CU3F.

  The CU3F is in a card information inquiry state for a predetermined period after the card is inserted. This is in the midst of verifying whether the inserted card is appropriate, whether it is a membership card registered at the game hall, or inquiring the hall server 801F, for example, holding balls, storage balls, and the remaining amount of the card. This means that the process of displaying the fact on the display 312F and displaying on the display 54F on the P platform 2F side is being executed.

  Since the CU 3F does not authenticate the inserted card while displaying that the inserted card is being inquired on the display 312F, the status information request including the serial number = n + 1 and the card return ready state = OFF. Is sent to the P platform 2F. In response to this, the P unit 2F returns a response of the status information response including serial number = n + 1 and game prohibition to the CU 3F. The display 54F on the P platform 2F side is controlled by the display control unit 350F of the CU 3F to display that the card is being inquired.

  After that, when the inserted card is authenticated, the CU 3F stores the card ID and the card insertion time of the card in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F, and the serial number = n + 2, the card ID, the card insertion time, and the store code. And a card insertion notification command including the SC board ID is transmitted to the P base 2F. The store code and the SC board ID are information added to the command when the card insertion notification command passes through the security board 325F. In response to this, the P unit 2F backs up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM of the payout control unit 171F, and a response to the card insertion response including the serial number = n + 2 Is returned to CU3F. Also in CU3F, the card ID of the inserted card is stored in the RAM or the like of CU control unit 323F.

  In response to this, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including a serial number = n + 3 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F, thereby notifying the P unit 2F that the card is being inserted. . The P unit 2F receives the notification that the card is being inserted, permits the game, and returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n + 3 and the game permission to the CU3F. To notify.

  While the card is being inserted, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 4 and a card return ready state = ON to the P unit 2F. The P unit 2F responds with a status information response including a serial number = n + 4 and a game permission. Is returned to CU3F.

  Further, a case where a card insertion notification command is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P platform 2F during card insertion will be described. First, the CU 3F transmits a card insertion notification command including a serial number = n + x, a card ID, a card insertion time, a store code, and an SC board ID to the P unit 2F. When a card insertion notification command is transmitted during card insertion, the transmitted card ID and card insertion time are often different from the card ID and card insertion time of the card being inserted, and are stored in the P base 2F. There is a high possibility that fraud that intentionally changes the current card ID or the card insertion time has been performed.

  In response to this, the P table 2F does not back up the received card ID, card insertion time, store code, and SC board ID data to the RAM or the like of the payout control unit 171F. Whether or not the card is being inserted in the P stand 2F can be easily determined based on the card return preparation state = ON information included in the state information request command.

  Next, the P base 2F returns a response of the card insertion response including the serial number = n + x to the CU 3F without performing backup of the received card ID, card insertion time, and the like. Note that the CU3F does not store the card ID, the card insertion time, and the like transmitted by the card insertion notification command in the RAM of the CU control unit 323F.

<< Prepaid loan >>
Next, a process for lending a game ball from the prepaid balance of the inserted card will be described. In the sequence process shown in FIG. 69, the prepaid balance recorded on the inserted card is 500 yen, and the number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  Thereafter, when the player performs a lending operation (ball lending operation) in which the “lending” button is pressed once, the CU 3F lends the remaining amount of 500 yen, that is, 125 balls. When the ball lending button (lending button) 321F is pressed, the CU 3F confirms prepaid consumption for 500 yen and backs up the data of the number of added balls = 125. In this way, the remaining amount consumption is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the lending operation is performed. Thereafter, the CU3F is being displayed for addition. During this addition display, the display unit 54F displays that 125 balls have been withdrawn from the remaining amount and are being added to the game balls.

  Next, the CU 3F makes a game ball addition request to the P stand 2F. Therefore, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including the serial number = n + 1, the game ball addition request = ON, the number of additional balls = 125, and the addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F. The serial number is incremented to “n + 1” and the addition number of game balls is requested, so that the additional serial number is also incremented to “m + 1”. The CU 3F counts up the addition sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission addition sequence number to “m + 1”, and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Since the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F of the number of game balls = 175 and the game ball addition result = OK, the serial number = n + 1, the number of addition balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK, and the addition serial number = m + 1. The response of the status information response including it is returned to CU3F. Since it is a response to the game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and is set to “m + 1” as it is.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 5, the number of additional balls = 175, and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F. When the game ball addition request is OFF, the status information request and the status information response count up the serial number, but do not count up the additional serial number.

≪Mochitama payout and savings ball payout (replay) ≫
Next, the process of paying out and holding the balls and replaying them will be described. In FIG. 72, the initial number of game balls is 50 balls. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a game ball addition request = OFF, and an addition serial number = m to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 50, and the additional serial number = m to the CU 3F. In this way, the addition sequence number is not updated while the addition request is not generated.

  After that, when the player presses the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F in a state where there is a holding ball or a storage ball, the CU 3F determines the consumption of 125 balls from the holding ball or the storage ball. As described above, the consumption of the holding balls or the storage balls is determined on the CU3F side alone at the stage where the operation of pressing the holding ball payout button or the replay button 319F is performed. In addition, when both the holding ball and the storage ball exist, consumption of the holding ball is given priority.

  In place of the control to prioritize the holding ball, a storage ball replay button and a holding ball replay button are provided, and the player can select and operate either the storage ball consumption or the holding ball consumption by operating the selection. You may do it. In other words, the replay button is used to obtain a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) and a game ball (game point) from a stored ball (stored medal) replay button. You may comprise two with a holding ball (pointing) replay button.

  CU3F notifies the addition request | requirement of the number of additional balls = 125 to the P stand 2F after confirming the consumption from a holding ball or a storage ball. Specifically, the CU 3F displays that a game ball addition process is in progress, and sends a status information request command including serial number = n + 1, game ball addition request = ON, number of additional balls = 125, and addition serial number = m + 1. Transmit to P platform 2F. In order to make a game ball addition request, the serial number is counted up to “n + 1”, and the additional serial number is also counted up to “m + 1”. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. In response to this, the P stand 2F updates the number of game balls to the number of game balls = 50 (current number of game balls) +125 (number of additional balls) = 175, and updates the last transmission addition serial number to “m + 1”. Back up the data. Then, the P stand 2F returns a response of the state information response including the serial number = n + 1, the number of additional balls = 175, the game ball addition result = OK and the additional serial number = m + 1 to the CU 3F. Since this is a response to a game ball addition request, the addition serial number is not counted up and remains “m + 1”.

  Thereafter, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n + 2, a game ball addition request = OFF and an addition serial number = m + 1 to the P unit 2F, and the P unit 2F has a serial number = n + 2, an additional ball number = 175 and A response of the status information response including the addition serial number = m + 1 is returned to the CU3F.

<< Game Ball Count (Normal) >>
Next, the normal counting process of counting and subtracting a part of the game balls will be described. FIG. 71 shows a case where the counting button is pressed without detecting a card return operation. Therefore, all the bits in the card return ready state transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F are OFF (= 0). For this reason, description of the bits in the card return preparation state is omitted below.

  In FIG. 71, the number of balls specified by the inserted recording medium (member card or visitor card) is “0” balls, and the initial number of game balls is “800” balls. Yes.

  Here, an example will be described in which counting in units of 100 points continues while the operation of the counting button is detected, and the counting operation ends when the operation of the counting button is no longer detected.

  First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a card return ready state = OFF, a counting serial number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  For the serial number n transmitted from the CU 3F, the serial number n + 1 is returned from the P stand 2F. In response to the counting sequence number m transmitted from the CU 3F, the same counting sequence number m is returned from the P stand 2F. This is because the counting sequence number is a special sequence number that is updated when a counting request is generated, and is updated when the counting is completed.

  Thereafter, the player presses the counting button 28F. In FIG. 71, immediately after an operation of pressing the count button 28F once, a command for status information request including a serial number = n + 1, a card return ready state = OFF, a count serial number = m, and a count response = OFF is sent from the CU3F. It is transmitted to the P platform 2F.

  When the operation of the count button 28F is detected, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 1 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 as a response to the command of the status information request to the CU 3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Since this status information response is a message indicating a counting request, the counting sequence number is counted up to “m + 1”. At this time, the P unit 2F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and backs up the updated last transmission count sequence number and the count request state ON data.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 1 adds the number of balls equivalent to the requested number of balls and updates the display of balls to 100. That is, the CU control unit 323F transmits a count display command to the display control unit 350F. In response to the instruction, the display control unit 350F controls the display 54F on the P platform 2F side. As a result, the display 54F displays an image in which the number of game balls is counted and the number thereof decreases, while the number of holding balls increases.

  In this case, it is conceivable to perform an effect display such that game balls are guided and counted by each counter one by one. Another example of the effect display may be a display in which the number of game balls is converted to the number of balls in time. For example, the data for the number of balls and the data for the number of balls are shown in a bar graph, and the number of balls in the game ball number is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is increased while the number of balls in the game ball is decreased. The display to move to the bar graph may be repeated. In addition, as another example of the effect display, the current game ball number data and the number of possession balls data are digitally displayed as they are, and the number of possession balls is increased while decreasing the number of game balls, or a part of the number of game balls It is possible to repeat the display for moving the number of balls to the number of balls, and various display effects.

  Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 1” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 2, a count serial number m + 1, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  Receiving this status information request, the P platform 2F finally subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of balls counted = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 800 to 700. At this stage, although the count request state of the P base 2F is OFF, since the count button is continuously pressed, the P base 2F transmits a second count request to the CU 3F. That is, a status information response of serial number n + 2 in which the count request value is specifically set to 100 is transmitted to CU3F. However, even at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the status information response of the serial number n + 2, the number of game balls = 700. Since this status information response is a message transmitted as a new count request, the count sequence number is incremented to “m + 2”, the previous last transmission count sequence number is updated, and the updated last transmission count sequence number is updated. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  CU3F which received the status information response of serial number n + 2 adds the ball | bowl equivalent to the number of count balls requested | required, and updates the display of a ball | bowl to 200. Further, the CU 3F updates the previous last transmission count sequence number to “m + 2” and backs up the data. Subsequently, the CU 3F transmits a status information request with a serial number n + 3, a count serial number m + 2, and a count response = ON to the P platform 2F to notify that the requested count has been completed.

  The P table 2F that has received this status information request subtracts the number of game balls by the number corresponding to the number of counting balls = 100, and updates the display of the game ball number display 29F from 700 to 600. However, at this stage, the player's hand is separated from the counting button, and the counting operation is completed. For this reason, the P base 2F notifies the CU 3F of the completion of counting with a status information response of serial number n + 3. That is, with the current number of game balls = 600, a status information response of count request = OFF and count ball count = 0 is transmitted to the CU 3F. In addition, since all the counting operations corresponding to the counting request have been completed, the counting sequence number included in this status information response remains m + 2 and is not updated.

  CU3F which received this status information response determines with completion of counting. Although not shown, the CU 3F transmits a status information response of serial number n + 4, counting serial number m + 2, card return preparation state = OFF, and counting response = OFF to the P base 2F.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the information state response for notifying the number of balls to be counted is transmitted from the P cars to the CU, the game balls for the counting balls are subtracted quickly on the P cards side. In the stage where the information status response for notifying the number of balls is transmitted and the receipt confirmation is received from the CU, the P machines subtract the game balls.

<< Game Ball Count (Card Return) >>
Next, the game ball counting process when returning the card will be described. FIG. 72 is a sequence diagram for explaining the counting process when the player performs the card return operation. In FIG. 72, the number of cards possessed by the inserted recording medium (member card or the like) is 0, and the initial number of gaming balls is 800. First, the CU 3F transmits a status information request command including a serial number = n, a CU opening state = ON, a card return preparation state = OFF, a counting sequence number = m, and a counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of the status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 800, the counting serial number = m, the counting ball number = 0, and the counting request = OFF to the CU 3F.

  Thereafter, when the player stops the game or moves to another game table, the player presses the “card return” button. However, when the player presses the “return card” button, the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls, and the CU 3F determines that the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is not zero. Further, since the player presses the “card return” button, the CU3F sets the card return ready state = ON, and the state information request including the serial number = n + 1, the CU opening state = ON, the counting sequence number = m, and the counting response = OFF. A command is transmitted to P unit 2F. Note that the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of the card return preparation state = ON notification for 10 seconds. Furthermore, since the number of game balls in the P stand 2F is 800 balls and not 0 balls, the CU 3F displays a display for prompting a counting operation on the display 54F or the like as a card return standby.

  In response to the display prompting the counting operation, the player presses the counting button 28F to perform an operation of converting the game ball into a holding ball. The P stand 2F determines that the counting operation for pressing the counting button 28F is a counting operation with the card return ready state = ON, and processes the counting in a lump instead of counting in units of 100 balls, for example.

  In order to notify the CU3F of a counting acceptance number of 800 balls, and a counting acceptance number request for 800 gaming balls, the P stand 2F has a serial number = n + 1, a gaming ball number = 800, a counting serial number = The response of the status information response including m + 1, the number of counting balls = 800 and the counting request = ON is returned to the CU3F. However, at this stage, the P base 2F does not execute counting for the counting request. For this reason, in the state information response of the serial number n + 1, the number of game balls is still 800. Further, since this status information response is a count request message, the P unit 2F counts up the count sequence number to “m + 1”, updates the previous last transmission count sequence number, and updates the previous last transmission count sequence number. Back up data with counting request status ON.

  In response to this, the CU3F adds the counted number of 800 balls to the number of held balls, and subtracts the counted number of 800 balls from the gaming ball number of 800 balls to 0 balls. Further, the CU3F backs up the updated data of the last transmission count sequence number last time. Then, in order to notify the receipt of the counting ball, the CU 3F sends a command for status information request including serial number = n + 2, CU store opening state = ON, card return ready state = ON, counting serial number = m + 1 and counting response = ON. Send to.

  In response to the response from the CU 3F, the P stand 2F subtracts the counting ball number 800 from the gaming ball number 800 and displays the gaming ball number 0 on the display 54F or the like. Further, the P stand 2F notifies the CU 3F that the number of game balls is 0 and counting is completed, so that the sequence number = n + 2, the number of game balls = 0, the count sequence number = m + 1, the count ball number = 0, and the count request = OFF. A response of the status information response including is returned to the CU3F. Since the counting request is turned OFF, the counting sequence number remains m + 1 and is transmitted to the CU 3F without counting up.

  The CU3F counts the number of game balls by pressing the count button 28F and counting the number of game balls in a lump before 10 seconds have elapsed since the player pressed the card return button 322F, that is, in the card return preparation state. Card is returned to 0, so card return processing is executed. That is, the CU 3F transmits a card return notification command including the serial number = n + 3 to the P unit 2F. In response to this, the P stand 2F returns a response of a card return response including the serial number = n + 3, the card ID held on the payout control board 17F, and the card insertion time to the CU 3F. After returning the card ID and the card insertion time to the CU 3F, the card ID and the card insertion time data held in the payout control board 17F are cleared.

  In response to this, the CU 3F performs a match determination between the card ID stored in the inserted card and the card ID received from the P stand 2F, and if it matches, returns the inserted card. If they do not match, error processing is performed and reported to the hall server 801F or the like. When the card IDs match, the CU 3F stores the number of balls 800 in the card (inserted card) that has been inserted into the card insertion / discharge port 309F and returns the card to the player. In addition, when the player starts the game by depositing without inserting the card into the card insertion / discharge slot 309F, the card (stock card) stocked in the card stock section provided in the CU3F Store the number of balls 800 and return the card to the player. When the inserted card or stock card is returned, the CU3F transmits the card ID of the card and the data of the number of balls to the hall server 801F, and the hall server 801F associates the card ID of the card with the data of the number of balls. May be stored.

  Thereafter, since the card returned from the CU 3F can be removed from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, a part of the card is held in a state of protruding from the card insertion / discharge port 309F (card removal possible state). The CU 3F has a sensor that can determine whether or not the card can be removed in the vicinity of the card insertion / ejecting port 309F. If the sensor signal is in the ON state, the CU 3F is determined to be in the card removal possible state. If it is in the OFF state, it is determined that the card removal is complete.

  When the card return process is executed and the card can be removed, the CU 3F notifies the P stand 2F of information indicating that the card return ready state is OFF and the card is waiting to be removed. Therefore, the CU 3F sends a status information request command including the serial number = n + 4, the CU opening state = ON, the card return ready state = OFF, waiting for card removal = ON, the counting serial number = m + 1, and the counting response = OFF to the P unit 2F. Send. In response to this, the P stand 2F displays “Please remove the card” on the variable display device 278F to the player in order to prevent forgetting to remove the card. Moreover, in order to notify the card removal, the P base 2F may turn on the LED or output a voice message “Please remove the card” with a speaker. Further, the P stand 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 4, a game ball number = 0, a count serial number = m + 1, a count ball number = 0, and a count response = OFF to the CU 3F. The CU3F not only notifies the P stand 2F that the card can be removed, but also a hall computer that is a device connected to the CU 3F or the P stand 2F, a call lamp mounted on the P stand 2F. The device may be notified that the card can be removed. Thereby, it is possible to further prevent the user from forgetting to remove the card (removal of the recording medium) by notifying other than the CU 3F and the P stand 2F that the card can be removed.

  If the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is in an ON state, the CU 3F transmits a command for requesting a state information including “Waiting for card removal = ON” to the P base 2F. However, when the player removes the card from the card insertion / discharge port 309F, the sensor attached in the vicinity of the card insertion / discharge port 309F is turned off, so that the CU3F is waiting for the serial number = n + 5 and the card removal = OFF A command for requesting the status information including is transmitted to the P base 2F.

  In response to this, the P base 2F stops displaying “please remove the card” displayed on the variable display device 278F, and terminates the card removal notification. The notification of card removal is continued until a status information request command including ON card waiting = ON is received until a status information request command including OFF card waiting = OFF is received. Further, the P platform 2F transmits a status information response command including a serial number = n + 5 to the CU 3F.

  The sequence of the game ball counting process when returning the card described with reference to FIG. 72 is not limited to when the card is returned, and the same process can also be applied during simple leaving and meal breaks. Here, the simple leaving means that the game is interrupted for a short time of about 5 to 10 minutes in order to allow the player to make a small use. A meal break is a meal or break that is interrupted by a game such as 30 minutes longer than a simple leave.

<< Abnormal sequence >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, a description will be given of the recovery processing of the number of game balls when the status information request has not been reached due to power interruption / communication line interruption. In particular, FIG. 73 shows that there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the P base 2F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the status information request has not arrived (from CU3F to the P base 2F). FIG. 11 is a sequence diagram for explaining a counting process in a case where a command has not arrived) and communication partners after recovery match.

  Referring to FIG. 73, before the power interruption occurs in the game, CU 3F transmits a status information request including serial number = n to P unit 2F. In response to this, the P table 2F sends a status information response including the serial number = n, the number of game balls = 480, the number of added balls = 3 and the number of subtracted balls = 23 to the CU 3F in order to notify the CU 3F of the game table information. To do. The P table 2F updates the previous last transmission serial number as the previous game table information to “n”.

  CU3F receives the status information response of serial number = n, updates the previous last transmission serial number to “n”, and backs up. Further, based on the information of the number of game balls = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtracted balls = 23, the number of game balls, the number of added balls, and the number of subtracted balls stored therein are updated.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the P stand 2F during the game, when a status information request including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the CU 3F to the P stand 2F, the P stand 2F is in a power cut off state. Status information request cannot be received. After that, since the status information response from the P stand 2F is not transmitted, the CU 3F performs control to detect and stop the communication line disconnection after 3 seconds. From the time when the P table 2F transmits a response of the status information response to the CU 3F until the power is cut off, the game is continued in the P table 2F and the game table information is changed, the number of game balls = 450, the number of additional balls = 6. Number of balls to be subtracted = 36, which is the latest game table information. On the other hand, the game table information of the number of game balls already transmitted = 480, the number of additional balls = 3, and the number of subtraction balls = 23 is the previous game table information.

  Thereafter, the power failure of the P base 2F is restored, and the P base 2F starts to operate. When the P base 2F starts operation, first, an authentication sequence is started between the CU 3F and the P base 2F, and information including the main chip ID and the payout chip ID is transmitted from the P base 2F to the CU 3F. The The CU3F transmits the received main chip ID and payout chip ID to the upper management server (the key management server 800F via the hall server 801F), and whether the main chip ID and the payout chip ID are properly registered. Ask them to check whether they have returned the results. If it is properly registered, an appropriate authentication result is obtained.

  After the authentication sequence, the CU 3F transmits a recovery request including the serial number = 1, the last transmission serial number = n, the store code, and the SC board ID to the P unit 2F. That is, the CU 3F requests the P unit 2F to notify the recovery information. In response to this, the P stand 2F first receives the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F, and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P stand 2F. Are matched, and if they match, the following processing is performed. In the P unit 2F, whether or not the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request matches the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F). Determine whether. If they match, it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P platform 2F to the CU 3F before the communication disconnection has reached the CU 3F. In this case, the status information response is included in the status information response. The game information is updated on the CU3F side based on the game information to be played. For this reason, in this case, the P table 2F returns a recovery response (serial number = 1) to the CU 3F as no game information storage (specifically, no previous game table information). If the previous last transmission sequence number = n of the received recovery request does not match the previous last transmission sequence number = n backed up inside the P unit 2F (specifically, the payout control board 17F), the communication is interrupted. Since it can be determined that the status information response last transmitted from the P-unit 2F to the CU3F before the CU3F has not reached the CU3F, in such a case, the game information is stored (specifically, the previous game table information A recovery response (sequence number = 1) including game information is returned to the CU3F. Note that the “store code” and “SC board ID” notified from the security board 325F of the CU 3F and the “store code” and “SC board ID” held by the P board 2F are inconsistent with the P board 2F. In this case, continuation of the game is prohibited.

  In FIG. 73, CU3F does not perform addition recovery processing because there is no game information stored in the recovery response. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the recovery response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted from the P machine 2F as the recovery response is an appropriate value. The first check process is executed. Since no game information is stored, the CU 3F transmits a communication start request including serial number = 2 to the P unit 2F without transmitting the recovery request 2 to the P unit 2F. When the CU 3F transmits a communication start request command to the P platform 2F, the counting sequence number is cleared to “0” (initial value). The P unit 2F receives the communication start request and transmits a communication start response including the serial number = 2 to the CU 3F. Further, after receiving the communication start request, the P base 2F clears the recovery data (game information) and clears the counting sequence number to “0” (initial value).

  When communication with the P base 2F is started, the CU 3F transmits a status information request including a serial number = 3 to the P base 2F. Upon receiving this, the P table 2F notifies the CU 3F of unreported game table information (the number of game balls as the latest game table information = 450, the number of added balls = 6, the number of subtracted balls = 36) as a status information response. Update the last transmission serial number and back up the data. Specifically, the status information response includes transmission sequence number = 3, number of game balls = 450, number of added balls = 6, and number of subtracted balls = 36. CU3F receives a status information response including unreported gaming machine information, updates the last transmission number last time, and backs up the data. The CU control unit 323F of the CU3F that has received the status information response checks whether or not the number of game balls included in the gaming machine information transmitted as the status information response is an appropriate value. Execute the process.

<Management of gaming machines>
Next, a system for managing the history of gaming machines from shipment to disposal will be described. FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining a flow of history information (machine history information) from shipment to disposal of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment. Here, the target of the gaming machine that manages the history is not limited to the above-described enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P 2F), and includes a conventional CR gaming machine. Of course, the target gaming machine includes not only pachinko gaming machines but also S machines (slot machines) 2SF corresponding to P machines 2F described later, conventional pachislot machines, and the like.

  Referring to FIG. 74, when a gaming machine is shipped from a gaming machine maker to Hall A, the gaming machine maker's server (not shown) displays shipping information regarding the shipped gaming machine through a communication line. The information is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the input shipping information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 75 is a diagram showing details of a flow until shipping information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 75, when ordering a gaming machine from a gaming machine maker, Hall A sends a sales contract to the gaming machine maker. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives the sales contract sent from Hall A, it confirms the order of the gaming machine according to the sales contract. When the gaming machine manufacturer confirms the order, it sends a copy of the warranty card and the certification notice to Hall A and starts production of the gaming machine. The gaming machine manufacturer ships the produced gaming machine to Hall A from the gaming machine manufacturer (delivered to Hall A). In addition, after a gaming machine to be shipped to Hall A is delivered to a carrier, the gaming machine manufacturer's server inputs shipping information regarding the gaming machine to the machine history management center 800AF via a communication line. When the history management center 800AF receives the input of the shipping information, it registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing an example of specific contents of the shipping information. Specifically, FIG. 76A is a diagram showing items registered as shipping information. FIG. 76B is a diagram showing registration classifications included in the registration type.

  Referring to FIG. 76 (a), the shipping information includes registration type, game board manufacturing number, main board management number, main control chip ID number (main chip ID), main control product code, and gaming machine. It includes a frame manufacturing number, a payout board management number, a payout control chip ID number (payout chip ID), a payout control product code, a shipping date, a company code, a hall code, and a cancellation flag.

  The registration type indicates whether the gaming machine to be shipped is a conventional CR gaming machine, an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P stand 2F), a gaming board with a replaced part, or a gaming machine frame. This is information to specify. Specifically, in FIG. 76B, when the registration type number is “11” to “14”, the gaming machine to be shipped is a CR gaming machine, and when “21” to “25”. Indicates that the gaming machine to be shipped is P 2F. Furthermore, the registration type numbers “11” to “14” indicate that the game board, the gaming machine frame, the gaming board + the gaming machine frame, and the gaming board (parts replacement) are replaced. Also, the registration type numbers “21” to “25” indicate that they are replaced gaming boards, gaming machine frames, gaming boards + gaming machine frames, gaming board parts, gaming machine frame parts, respectively. When replacing the board of the game board or the board of the gaming machine frame, the board management number after replacement is set and registered when the base is replaced. In addition, replacement of parts in which the production numbers of the game board and the gaming machine frame are changed is registered as a new shipment. Note that the name of the gaming machine manufacturer and the model name of the gaming machine are specified by the registration type.

The game board production number and main board management number are information according to a two-dimensional code.
The main control chip ID number is information read by an ID reader, and is set only in the case of the P unit 2F (setting is not necessary in the conventional CR gaming machine). The main control product code is the product code of the main control chip (setting is not necessary in the conventional CR gaming machine).

  The gaming machine frame manufacturing number and the payout board management number are information according to a two-dimensional code. Note that the payout board management number does not need to be set in a conventional CR gaming machine.

  The payout control chip ID number is information read by an ID reader, and is set only in the case of the P unit 2F (setting is not necessary in the CR gaming machine). The payout control product code is a product code written in the payout control chip (setting is not necessary in the CR gaming machine).

  The shipment date is the date when the gaming machine is shipped, and is the date when shipment is confirmed. The business operator code is information for specifying the name of the carrier. The hole code is information for identifying the hall name of the delivery destination. The cancellation flag is set to “0” when shipping information is registered, and “1” when canceling registered shipping information. When the gaming machine manufacturer has registered incorrect shipping information in the machine history management center 800AF, the gaming machine manufacturer sets a cancellation flag for the incorrect shipping information to “1” and registers it again in the machine history management center 800AF.

  When the history management center 800AF receives the shipping information with the cancellation flag set to “1”, the history management center 800AF cancels the registration of the shipping information with the same content as the received shipping information and the cancellation flag set to “0”. That is, the shipping information having the same content as the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” is deleted from the storage area of the history management center 800AF. Therefore, the history management center 800AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to “1” (ON state).

  Further, the machine history management center 800AF can accept the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” until a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the shipping information having the same contents as the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” cannot be registered in the history management center 800AF.

  Here, examples of the predetermined condition include time and period. Therefore, the machine history management center 800AF can be set to accept the shipping information including the cancellation flag set to “1” until 8:00 pm on the day when the shipping information to be canceled is registered. Therefore, the history management center 800AF can easily cancel the shipping information by setting the cancellation flag to “1” (ON state), and after a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, after 8:00 pm on the registration date) ) Can be prevented from tampering with shipping information.

  If the gaming machine is an enclosed circulating gaming machine (P 2F), the main control chip ID number or the payout control chip ID number serves as identification information for identifying the individual gaming machine, and the gaming machine has a conventional CR In the case of a gaming machine, at least one number of a gaming board manufacturing number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame manufacturing number, and a payout board management number is identification information for identifying an individual gaming machine.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 76 (a), the shipping information is the same format regardless of whether the gaming machine is an enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P 2F) or a conventional CR gaming machine. In the management center 800AF, the history of the enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F) and the conventional CR gaming machine can be managed in a unified manner.

  Referring to FIG. 74 again, when a gaming machine is delivered to hall A from a gaming machine manufacturer and the gaming machine is installed in hall A, a server (not shown) in hall A is connected via a communication line. Installation information regarding the installed gaming machine is input to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF associates the input installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping and registers them in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 77 is a diagram showing details of the flow until installation information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 77 (a) is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer (not shown) installed in the hall A and the history management center 800AF are not configured to be communicable. . In FIG. 77 (a), the conventional CR gaming machine is mainly used, and the conventional CR gaming machine is installed in Hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by a communication line. The case is assumed.

  FIG. 77 (b) is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. In FIG. 77 (b), this is mainly the case of the enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F), and the P stand 2F is installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line. Is assumed.

  Referring to FIG. 77 (a), when a gaming machine is delivered from hall A to Hall A, a copy of the gaming machine delivery form is sent from Hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives a copy of the gaming machine delivery form, the gaming machine installation information is input from the gaming machine manufacturer to the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line, and the input installation information is stored in the storage area of the server. be registered. When installation information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF, the registration result is output via a communication line or as a document. In Hall A, when a jurisdiction implementation inspection is conducted and a change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined location in Hall A.

  Referring to FIG. 77 (b), when a gaming machine is delivered from hall A to hall A, a copy of the gaming machine delivery form is sent from hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. Thereafter, in Hall A, a jurisdiction implementation inspection is performed, and when a change approval notification is made, the delivered gaming machine is installed at a predetermined location in Hall A. Since the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be connectable via a communication line, when the gaming machine installed in the hall A is turned on, the history is automatically transferred from the hall computer. Installation information is transmitted to the management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF associates the received installation information with the shipping information registered at the time of shipping and registers them in the storage area.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the installation information input to the history management center 800AF in FIG. 77 (a). Referring to FIG. 78, the installation information includes a registration type, a game board production number, a main board management number, a gaming machine frame production number, an installation date, a hall code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame production number, hole code, and cancellation flag are the same as those described in FIG. 76, detailed description thereof will not be repeated. .

  As described above, in the case of FIG. 77 (a), it is assumed that a conventional CR gaming machine is mainly installed in Hall A. Therefore, the registration type numbers are “11” to “14”. Become. The installation date is, for example, the planned opening date of the warranty card.

  From the above, in the case of FIG. 77 (a), the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, model name, gaming board production number, main board management number, as installation information input from the gaming machine manufacturer. A game frame serial number, installation date, and installation hall name are registered.

  In the case of FIG. 77 (b), the machine history management center 800AF provides the machine information management machine 800AF as installation information automatically transmitted from the hall computer, as a gaming machine manufacturer name, model name, installation date, installation destination hall name, The main control chip ID and the payout control ID are registered. The history management center 800AF may receive the above-mentioned part of information as installation information, and register information that is common with the shipping information with reference to the shipping information.

  Referring to FIG. 74 again, when the gaming machine installed in hall A is removed, the removal information from hall A is described in a document and the like, and the document is sent to history management center 800AF. Based on the removal information sent to the machine history management center 800AF, the removal information is registered in the storage area of the server by inputting necessary information from the input means (terminal not shown) of the machine history management center 800AF. If the document is not sent to the machine history management center 800AF, it is determined that the gaming machine has been removed from the hall A when second-hand movement information or disposal information described later is registered in the machine history management center 800AF. The removal information may be registered.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a flow until removal information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 79A is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer installed in the hall A and the history management center 800AF are not configured to be communicable. In FIG. 79 (a), it is assumed that a conventional CR gaming machine is mainly installed in Hall A where the hall computer and the machine history management center 800AF are not connected by a communication line.

  FIG. 79B is a diagram showing the flow when the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to be communicable. In FIG. 79 (b), it is assumed that the P unit 2F is mainly installed in the hall A where the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are connected by a communication line.

  Referring to FIG. 79 (a), when a gaming machine installed in hall A is removed, the gaming machine is removed based on the issued change approval application. When the gaming machine is removed, a document including removal information is sent from the hall A to the machine history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the removal information in the storage area based on the sent document.

  79B, since the hall computer and the history management center 800AF are configured to communicate with each other, the history management center 800AF is based on the installation information registered in the storage area. If a certain period of time (for example, one month) has passed and no communication with the gaming machine that should have been installed in Hall A, it is determined that the gaming machine has not been operated and has been removed. Then, the removal information is registered in the storage area. Similarly to FIG. 79 (a), the history management center 800AF may register the removal information in the storage area based on the document sent from the hall A.

  When a conventional CR gaming machine is to be removed, the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, a game board production number, a main board management number, a game frame production number, a removal date, and removal as removal information. The hall name is registered. In addition, when the P stand 2F is removed, in the machine history management center 800AF, a removal control board management number is further registered as removal information in addition to each information registered in the case of a conventional CR gaming machine. Is done.

  Referring to FIG. 74 again, when the gaming machine removed from Hall A is received in the seller's warehouse and the received gaming machine is delivered to another Hall B, the seller will enter the application documents. The used movement information is entered and sent to the machine history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF registers second-hand movement information in the server from the input means of the machine history management center 800AF based on the sent application documents. When the history management center 800AF and the management computer owned by the dealer are configured to be communicable, the management computer inputs the used movement information to the history management center 800AF via the communication line. Also good.

  When the gaming machine delivered from the dealer is delivered to another hall B and the gaming machine is installed in another hall B, the installation is performed in the other hall B as shown in FIG. Information is registered in the server of the machine history management center 800AF. Also, when the gaming machine installed in Hall B is removed, the removal information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF in the flow described with reference to FIG.

  Next, when the gaming machine removed from Hall A is collected by the processing company and the collected gaming machine is discarded, the disposal information is entered in the application document from the processing company, and the document is recorded. It is sent to the management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the discard information in the storage area by inputting necessary information from the input means in the own device. When the history management center 800AF and the management computer of the processing company are configured to be communicable, the management computer can input the discard information to the history management center 800AF via the communication line. Good.

  Further, when the gaming machine traded in from the hall A by the gaming machine maker is discarded, the hall computer inputs the discard information regarding the gaming machine to be discarded via the communication line to the history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF registers the input discard information in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a flow until discard information is registered in the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment.

  Referring to FIG. 80, when a gaming machine manufacturer gives a notice of acceptance of trade-in of a gaming machine to hall A, the gaming machine is delivered from hall A to the gaming machine manufacturer. When a gaming machine maker collects and stores the gaming machine and then discards it, it requests the disposal company (disposal company) to dispose of it. When the gaming machine manufacturer receives a notification from the processing company that the disposal of the gaming machine has been completed (processing details, etc.), the gaming machine manufacturer's server sends the disposal information about the gaming machine via the communication line. Input to the management center 800AF. When the history management center 800AF receives the input of the discard information, it registers it in the storage area of the server.

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of the discard information input to the machine history management center 800AF.

  Referring to FIG. 81, the discard information includes registration type, discard date, game board manufacturer code, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame manufacturer code, and gaming machine. It includes a frame manufacturing number, a payout board management number, a company code, and a cancellation flag. Since the registration type, game board production number, main board management number, gaming machine frame production number, and cancellation flag are the same as those described with reference to FIG. 76, detailed description thereof will not be repeated.

  The discard date is the date when the gaming machine is discarded. The game board manufacturer code is information for identifying the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactured the game board. The gaming machine frame manufacturer code is information for identifying the gaming machine manufacturer that manufactured the gaming machine frame. The business operator code is information for identifying the business operator that has performed the disposal process. Typically, it is the operator code of the processing company (disposal company), but when it is discarded by the gaming machine manufacturer, it becomes the operator code of the gaming machine manufacturer.

  When a conventional CR gaming machine is discarded, the machine history management center 800AF has a gaming machine manufacturer name, a gaming board production number, a main board management number, a gaming frame production number, a disposal date, and processing as disposal information. The trader name is registered. In addition, when the P unit 2F is discarded, in the machine history management center 800AF, in addition to each information registered in the case of a conventional CR gaming machine, a payout control board management number is further registered as discard information. Is done.

<Management of front frame and game board>
In the machine history management center described above, the configuration for managing the history of the gaming machine (P machine 2F) has been described. However, since the P machine 2F is formed by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, the front frame 5F and the game It is also possible to manage the history separately for the board 26F. Therefore, machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be described below.

FIG. 82 is a schematic diagram for explaining history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F according to the present embodiment. The machine history management center 800AF shown in FIG. 82 associates the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided on the payout control board 17F connected to the front frame 5F with information on the front frame 5F and the main control board 16F connected to the game board 26F. The information of the game board 26F is stored in the table shown in FIG. 83 in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in FIG. 83, and the history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is managed. The history management center 800AF includes a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 8001F as a control center, a ROM (Read Only Memory) 8002F that stores operation programs and control data of the CPU 8001F, and a RAM that functions as a work area for the CPU 8001F. A (Random Access Memory) 8003F, an I / O port (Input / Output Port) 8004F, and a mass storage device 8005F such as an HDD (Hard Disk Drive) are provided.

  FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram of a table that stores information on the front frame 5F and information on the game board 26F in order to manage the machine history of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. In the table shown in FIG. 83, a payout-side table (FIG. 83 (a)) that stores information on the game board 26F in association with the security chip ID of the payout control board 17F, and a security chip ID of the main control board 16F. A main control side table (FIG. 83 (b)) for storing information on the game board 26F is included.

  Hereinafter, the machine history management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. First, at the time of shipment and installation, (1) the semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F manufactures the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF and ships it to the frame manufacturer 191F, which is the manufacturer of the front frame 5F. (2) The semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F manufactures the main control semiconductor chip 16aF and ships it to the game board manufacturer 192F, which is the manufacturer of the game board 26F. The payout control semiconductor chip 17aF and the main control semiconductor chip 16aF are not limited to the case where they are manufactured by the same semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F, and may be manufactured by different semiconductor chip manufacturers 190F.

  (3-1) The semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F notifies the history management center 800AF of the payout control security chip ID of the manufactured payout control semiconductor chip 17aF, and inputs the payout control security chip ID into the payout side table. Update the payout table. Similarly, (3-2) the semiconductor chip manufacturer 190F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the main control security chip ID of the manufactured main control semiconductor chip 16aF, and the main control side security chip ID is sent to the main control side table. To update the main control table.

  (4) The frame maker 191F incorporates the payout control semiconductor chip 17aF into the front frame 5F to manufacture the front frame 5F. Further, the frame maker 191F ships and installs the manufactured front frame 5F to the hall 193F. (5) The frame maker 191F notifies the history management center 800AF of information specifying the front frame 5F installed in the hall 193F, and updates the payout side table so as to be stored in association with the payout control security chip ID. As information for specifying the front frame 5F, as shown in FIG. 83 (a), the front frame manufacturing number, the delivery board management number, the product code for delivery control, the carrier code, the hall code, the shipping date, and the installation Date and time are included. Further, the information specifying the front frame 5F may include a frame format name, a product code, and a manufacturer code.

  (6) The game board maker 192F incorporates the main control semiconductor chip 16aF into the game board 26F to manufacture the game board 26F. Further, the game board maker 192F ships the manufactured game board 26F to the hall 193F and installs the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in combination. (7) The game board maker 192F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of information specifying the game board 26F installed in the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. To do. As information specifying the game board 26F, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), the model name of the gaming machine, product code, manufacturer code, game board production number, main control board management number, product code for main control , Carrier code, hall code, shipping date, and installation date and time.

  (8) The hall 193F operates the P stand 2F formed by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. When driven, the P base 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the payout control security chip ID and the main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P machine 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P machine 2F, and transmits the necessary secret key to the P machine 2F. (9) The key management server 800F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the gaming machine installation information, and pays out so as to store a pair (combined) main control security chip ID in association with the payout control security chip ID. The side table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store a pair (combined) payout control security chip ID in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF includes the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F, the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the semiconductor chip maker 190F, the frame maker 191F, and the game board maker 192F. Is matched.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the status of the front frame 5F in which information such as the shipping date (information (3-1) and (5) shown in FIG. 83A) included in the payout side table is updated. (Status) is “Shipment”, and the management status of the front frame 5F in which the information of the paired main control security chip ID (information (9) shown in FIG. 83A) included in the payout table is updated ( (Status) is determined as “installation”. Note that the management state (status) of the front frame 5F may be stored in the payout side table or in another storage area. In the case of initial failure after shipment registration, re-shipment is not performed.

  Similarly, the machine history management center 800AF includes the game board 26F in which information (such as (3-2) and (7) shown in FIG. 83 (b)) included in the main control table is updated. The game board 26F in which the management state (status) is “shipped” and the information on the security chip ID for payout control of the pair included in the main control side table (information (9) shown in FIG. 83B) is updated. The management state (status) is determined as “installation”. Note that the management state (status) of the game board 26F may be stored in the main control side table or in another storage area. In the case of initial failure after shipment registration, re-shipment is not performed.

  Next, at the time of storage, (10) When the hole 193F is replaced with a new front frame 5F and game board 26F, the installed front frame 5F and game board 26F are removed and stored in the warehouse. (11) The warehouse operator 194F notifies the history management center 800AF of the storage information of the front frame 5F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the warehouse trader 194F notifies the history management center 800AF of the storage information of the game board 26F removed from the hall 193F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 83, the storage information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes the manufacturer of the gaming machine, the installation source hall, the removal date, the storage date, and the storage location.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed from the hall 193F, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that non-operating information has been transmitted to the key management server 800F from the removed front frame 5F and game board 26F. The non-operating information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the history management center 800AF. The machine history management center 800AF collates the non-operation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the warehouse operator 194F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as storage dates (information (11) shown in FIG. 83) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. (Status) is determined as “Storage”. When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are removed, it is not always necessary to remove the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be removed and removed. In this case, the history management center 800AF updates only the information (11) (see FIG. 83) of either the payout side table or the main control side table.

  Next, at the time of resale, (12) the hall 193F requests the second trader 195F to resell the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored by the warehouse trader 194F. The used trader 195F resells the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F to another hall and installs them in the hall. (13) The used trader 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the resale information on the resold front frame 5F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. In addition, the used trader 195F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the resale information of the resold game board 26F, and updates the main control side table so as to store it in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 83, the resale information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes the installation source hall, the removal date, the installation date, and the sales company name.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are resold, they are installed in different halls, and the P frame 2F is operated by combining the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. When driven, the P base 2F transmits gaming machine installation information (operation information) including the payout control security chip ID and the main control security chip ID to the key management server 800F. The key management server 800F authenticates the P machine 2F based on the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the P machine 2F, and transmits the necessary secret key to the P machine 2F. Further, the key management server 800F notifies the machine history management center 800AF of the gaming machine installation information, and stores the pair (combined) main control security chip ID in association with the payout control security chip ID. The table is updated, and the main control side table is updated so as to store a pair (combined) payout control security chip ID in association with the main control security chip ID. The machine history management center 800AF collates the gaming machine installation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the second-hand trader 195F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. Also, the machine history management center 800AF manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as sales company names (information (13) shown in FIG. 83) included in the payout side table and the main control sales table is updated. (Status) is determined to be “resale”, and the front frame 5F and the game in which the information of the pair security chip ID (information (9) shown in FIG. 83) included in the payout side table and the main control side table are updated The management state (status) of the panel 26F is determined as “installation”. When reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not always necessary to resell the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be resold. In this case, the history management center 800AF updates only the information (13) (see FIG. 83) of either the payout side table or the main control side table. Further, when reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not necessarily limited to reselling the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse, but the front frame 5F and the game board 26F installed in the hall. May be resold. In addition, we do not re-ship at the time of resale.

  Next, at the time of disposal, (14) the hole 193F requests the disposal company 196F to discard the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F. The discard trader 196F discards the stored front frame 5F and game board 26F by an appropriate method. (15) The discarder 196F notifies the history management center 800AF of the discard information of the discarded front frame 5F, and updates the payout side table so as to store it in association with the payout control security chip ID. Further, the discarder 196F notifies the history management center 800AF of the discard information of the discarded game board 26F, and updates the main control side table so as to be stored in association with the main control security chip ID. As shown in FIG. 83, the discard information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F includes an installation source hall, a take-off date, and a discard date.

  When the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, the operation information is not transmitted to the key management server 800F. That is, it can be considered that the non-operation information is transmitted from the discarded front frame 5F and the game board 26F to the key management server 800F. The non-operating information transmitted to the key management server 800F is further transmitted to the history management center 800AF. The history management center 800AF collates the non-operation information transmitted from the key management server 800F with the contents of the payout side table and the main control side table updated by the discarder 196F.

  The machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality if it is abnormal as a result of the collation. The history management center 800AF also manages the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the discard date (information (15) shown in FIG. 83) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. (Status) is determined to be “Discard”. When discarding the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, it is not always necessary to discard the front frame 5F and the game board 26F as a set, and either one may be removed and discarded. In this case, the history management center 800AF updates only the information (15) (see FIG. 83) of either the payout side table or the main control side table. Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are discarded, the front frame 5F and the game board 26F installed in the hall 193F are not necessarily limited to the case where the front frame 5F and the game board 26F stored in the warehouse are discarded. 26F may be discarded.

<Abnormality judgment of machine history management center>
If the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal as a result of comparing the gaming machine installation information and the non-operating information with the updated information as described above, the machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality. Specifically, a process for determining whether or not the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 84 is a flowchart for explaining abnormality determination processing for management of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F by the machine history management center 800AF. FIG. 85 is a diagram for explaining a table referred to in the flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, the machine history management center 800AF determines the management state (status) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F based on information included in the payout side table and the main control side table (SF211). Specifically, the machine history management center 800AF includes the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which information such as the disposal date (information (15) shown in FIG. 83) included in the payout table and the main control table is updated. The management state (status) is determined as “discard”.

  Next, the history management center 800AF checks whether or not the transition from the previously determined management state to the currently determined management state is included in the transition prohibition table (SF212). As shown in FIG. 85A, the transition prohibition table shows a management state in which transition is prohibited from the management state determined last time. Specifically, when the frame maker 191F manufactures and ships the front frame 5F, the front frame 5F is not discarded or resold. Therefore, in the transition prohibition table, the management state changes from “shipment” to “discard”. Transition to “resale” is prohibited. In addition, since the front frame 5F once installed, stored and resold is not shipped from the frame maker 191F, in the transition prohibition table, the management status is “installed”, “storage” and “resale” to “shipment”. ”Is prohibited. Further, since the discarded front frame 5F is not shipped, installed, stored, and resold, the management status is changed from “discarded” to “shipped”, “installed”, “stored”, and “resolded” in the transition prohibition table. ”Is prohibited. In the above-described transition prohibition table, the front frame 5F has been described as an example, but the same applies to the game board 26F.

  Next, when the change to the management state determined this time is not included in the transition prohibition table (SF212: N), the machine history management center 800AF, based on the information from the key management server 800F, the front frame 5F and the game board The operating state of 26F is determined (SF213). Specifically, the machine history management center 800AF determines that the gaming machine installation information is transmitted from the key management server 800F, and determines that the machine is operating, and when the non-operation information is transmitted from the key management server 800F (gaming machine installation information). Is not transmitted), it is determined as a non-operating state.

  Next, the machine history management center 800AF checks whether or not the management state determined this time in SF211 and the operation state determined in SF213 are included in the update abnormality table (SF214). As shown in the update abnormality table, FIG. 85 (b), the operating state prohibited in the management state determined this time in SF211 is shown. Specifically, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed, they are in an operating state if they are within business hours, but are normally inactive if they are out of business hours. When the status is “Installation”, it is determined as abnormal if “Operates outside business hours”. Further, when the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are not installed, the operation status is always inactive. Therefore, in the update abnormality table, the management status is “shipment”, “storage”, “resale”, and “discard”. When it becomes “operation”, it is determined as abnormal.

  Next, when the determined operating state is included in the update abnormality table (SF214: Y), the machine history management center 800AF notifies the abnormality (SF215). The means for notifying the abnormality in SF 215 may be any means such as displaying the abnormality on the display device of the history management center 800AF or outputting an alarm sound from the audio output device. The history management center 800AF also reports an abnormality (SF215) when the transition to the management state determined this time is included in the transition prohibition table (SF212: Y).

  The machine history management center 800AF ends the process when the determined operating state is not included in the update abnormality table (SF214: N).

  As described above, the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment uses the payout side table that stores the history information of the front frame 5F in association with the payout control security chip ID and the history information of the game board 26F for main control. The main control side table stored in association with the security chip ID is included in the mass storage device 8005F, and the management status of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F based on the information stored in the payout side table and the main control side table by the CPU 8001F Judge abnormalities. Therefore, the history management center 800AF according to the present embodiment can manage the history by associating the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that may be distributed separately with each security chip ID.

<Communication between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F in the P stand 2F will be described in more detail. First, in the P stand 2F shown in FIG. 63, communication between the main control board 16F provided on the game board 26F and the payout control board 17F provided on the front frame 5F is performed by the main control provided on the main control board 16F. This is performed between the portion 161F and the payout control portion 171F provided on the front frame 5F. FIG. 86 is a schematic diagram for explaining communication performed between the main controller 161F, the payout controller 171F, and the communication control IC.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F shown in FIG. 86 will be described below as being configured with one chip, but the same function may be configured with a plurality of chips. The main control unit 161F includes a main control circuit 161aF, a communication control circuit 161bF, and a main control storage unit 161cF. The main control circuit 161aF performs various processes in the main control unit 161F (for example, a process of counting winning balls based on a signal from the winning sensor 162F or detecting fraud based on a signal from the radio wave sensor 163F). Is a circuit for executing a control program for The communication control circuit 161bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The main control storage unit 161cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, and data to be executed by the main control unit 161F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory) of a nonvolatile memory. . Note that since the main control storage unit 161cF includes FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  On the other hand, the payout control unit 171F includes a payout control circuit 171aF, a communication control circuit 171bF, and a payout control storage unit 171cF. The payout control circuit 171aF controls the various processing (the firing motor 18F via the firing control board 31F by the payout control unit 171F, or from the game ball to the holding ball to the CU3F based on the signal from the counting button 28F. A circuit for executing a control program for performing a process of requesting conversion). The communication control circuit 171bF is a circuit for performing cryptographic communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and cryptographic communication between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. The payout control storage unit 171cF is a storage device for storing a user program, a control program, data, and the like to be executed by the payout control unit 171F, and includes, for example, a FeRAM that is a nonvolatile memory. Since the payout control storage unit 171cF includes the FeRAM, the information stored in the FeRAM does not need to be backed up by an external power source.

  Further, the communication control circuits 161bF and 171bF will be described in detail. FIG. 87 is a block diagram for explaining the configuration of a communication control circuit 161bF for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. First, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the payout control unit 171F in the front frame 5F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. Further, the encryption communication function can periodically pass information of the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F and receive information of the payout control unit 171F by setting a communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the payout control unit 171F in the encryption communication control unit 600F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 161bF can set a timeout time for communication response and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 87, the communication control circuit 161bF has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the main control circuit 161aF, and cryptographic communication for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 600F is provided.

  Examples of the registers included in the communication control circuit 161bF include an authentication status register 611F, an authentication interrupt setting register 612F, a transmission data buffer 613F, a transmission data number register 614F, an information transmission clear register 615F, a main control game information register 616F, and a payout control game. An information register 617F, a recovery communication completion register 618F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 619F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 611F indicates whether the chip ID of the main control unit 161F has been authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 612F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 613F is a buffer for writing game information to be transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the game information is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Written. Also, by configuring the transmission data buffer 613F with a non-volatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and is written in the buffer that has not been transmitted due to communication failure. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the transmission data buffer 613F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is eliminated. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the transmission data buffer 613F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 613F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 614F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted to the main control unit 161F payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 613F. The information transmission clear register 615F is a register for writing a request to clear data in the transmission data buffer 613F.

  The main control game information register 616F is a register into which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 616F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F and transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control game information register 617F is a register in which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 617F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 600F.

  The recovery communication completion register 618F is a register in which information indicating whether recovery communication is completed between the main control unit and the payout control unit is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 619F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 600F communicating with the payout control unit 171F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  The communication control circuit 171bF is divided into a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F and a configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. The communication control circuit 171bF performs communication control on a portion of the configuration for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. A configuration part for performing cryptographic communication with the circuit 171b1F and the communication control IC 325aF will be described below as a communication control circuit 171b2F.

  First, FIG. 88 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b1F for performing cryptographic communication with the main control unit 161F. First, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of functions, for example, an authentication communication function, an encryption communication function, an interrupt function, a recovery function, and the like.

  The authentication communication function is a function for mutual authentication with the main control unit 161F of the game board 26F and mutual authentication with the communication control IC 325aF of the CU3F. The encryption communication function is a function for encrypting and decrypting a message between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. The encryption communication function can be automatically inserted into a tamper-proof code message, or a code for detecting a communication error can be automatically inserted. In addition, the encryption communication function can periodically pass the information of the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F and receive the information of the main control unit 161F by setting the communication interval.

  For example, the interrupt function notifies an interrupt after completion of decryption of a message, or notifies an interrupt when the authentication state changes. The recovery function is a function for performing recovery communication with the main control unit 161F and the communication control IC 325aF in the encryption communication control unit 700F in response to a request from the user. Further, the communication control circuit 171b1F can set a communication response time-out time and can set a communication interval between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 88, the communication control circuit 171b1F has a plurality of registers that perform input / output with the control program executed by the payout control circuit 171aF, and encryption communication for performing cryptographic communication with the payout control unit 171F. A control unit 700F is included.

  The registers included in the communication control circuit 171b1F include, for example, an authentication status register 711F, an authentication interrupt setting register 712F, a data reception register 713F, a reception data number register 714F, an information reception clear register 715F, a payout control game information register 716F, and a main control game. An information register 717F, a recovery request / completion register 718F, an encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 719F, and the like are included.

  The authentication status register 711F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 712F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The data reception register 713F is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which the game information transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and the buffer is a FIFO (First In, First Out) game. Information is written. In addition, by configuring the data reception register 713F with a nonvolatile memory, communication information is written between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Is retained after return. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of the user program to generate game information written in the data reception register 713F becomes unnecessary, and the processing load of the main control unit 161F is reduced. Can be reduced. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Since the data reception register 713F is composed of a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the data reception register 713F are composed of a volatile memory.

  The reception data number register 714F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the main control unit 161F and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 713F. The information reception clear register 715F is a register in which a request for clearing data in the data reception register 713F is written.

  The payout control game information register 716F is a register into which data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the main control unit 161F is written. The data written in the payout control game information register 716F is encrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F and transmitted to the main control unit 161F. The main control game information register 717F is a register in which data transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is written. The data written in the main control game information register 717F is data decrypted by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  The recovery request / completion register 718F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the main control unit and the payout control unit and information indicating whether or not the recovery communication is completed is written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 719F is information requesting to clear data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the main control unit 161F, and that the data has been deleted. This is a register in which information indicating (clear completion) is written.

  In addition, the communication control circuit 171b1F includes a communication timeout time setting register 719aF, a communication interval time setting register 719bF, and a main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF.

  After the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F expires, the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF transfers the data in the transmission data buffer 613F of the main control unit 161F to the data reception register 713F. This register sets the valid time that can be written. By setting the register, writing to the data reception register 713F can be performed even after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired (for example, from 5 seconds to 15 seconds). About seconds). As a result, for example, even if there is a floating ball (a ball that has not been dropped by being caught between the nails of the game area 27F) when authentication is cut off due to power interruption or disconnection, the floating ball has won a prize. It is possible to securely store and protect the information. Even in the case of a gaming machine having a stage with a long ball residence time, it is assumed that the effective period can be set long so that the information that the floating ball has won can be reliably stored.

  Originally, information cannot be written in the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F from the viewpoint of security after the authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. However, in the data reception register 713F, for example, it is necessary to write information indicating that the floating ball has won after authentication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F has expired. Therefore, the communication control circuit 171b1F sets an effective time in the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF, and this setting is performed in the encryption communication control unit 700F, whereby the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F. Information can be written to the data reception register 713F via the encryption communication control unit 700F as long as it is within the valid period even after the authentication between and is terminated. It should be noted that the set value of the main control unit transmission buffer write effective time setting register 719cF can be read after this setting is made by the encryption communication control unit 700F.

  FIG. 89 is a block diagram for explaining a configuration of a communication control circuit 171b2F for performing cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. As shown in FIG. 89, the communication control circuit 171b2F performs, for example, an authentication status register 721F, an authentication interrupt setting register 722F, a transmission data buffer 723aF, a data reception register 723bF, and a transmission data number register 724F in order to perform cryptographic communication with the communication control IC 325aF. , Received data number register 725F, recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F, recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F, recovery request / completion register 728F, encrypted communication data clear request / completion register 729F, communication timeout timer-prescaler setting register 729aF, and communication It has a timeout time setting register 729bF and the like.

  The authentication status register 721F indicates whether or not the chip ID of the payout control unit 171F is authenticated, the communication and authentication status between the card unit and the payout control unit, and the communication and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit. The status is written. In the authentication interrupt setting register 722F, whether or not to permit interruption for changing the state of chip ID authentication, authentication between the card unit and the payout control unit, and authentication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is set.

  The transmission data buffer 723aF is a buffer for writing a business message to be transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF (for example, the storage capacity is 128 bytes), and the business message is written to the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is included. The data reception register 723bF is a buffer (for example, having a storage capacity of 128 bytes) in which a business message transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F is written, and a business message is stored in the buffer by FIFO (First In, First Out). Is written.

  By configuring the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF with non-volatile memory, communication disconnection occurs between the payout control unit 171F and the communication control IC 325aF, and the buffer and register that have not been transmitted due to communication failure are stored in the buffer and register The written business message is retained even after returning. Therefore, even when recovery communication is performed, recovery processing such as re-execution of a user program to generate a business message written in the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF becomes unnecessary, and the payout control unit It is possible to reduce the processing load of 171F and the communication control IC 325aF. In addition, the amount of data required in the recovery process can be suppressed. Note that since the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are configured by a nonvolatile memory, backup by an external power source is not necessary. Registers other than the transmission data buffer 723aF and the data reception register 723bF are composed of a volatile memory.

  The transmission data number register 724F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the payout control unit 171F to the communication control IC 325aF, and monitors the number of data in the transmission data buffer 723aF. The reception data number register 725F is a register for writing the number of data transmitted from the communication control IC 325aF and received by the payout control unit 171F, and monitors the number of data in the data reception register 723bF.

  The recovery communication addition sphere request register 726F is a register in which the number of addition spheres is written when an addition sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after power-off recovery. The recovery communication addition ball request register 726F is updated only when the recovery communication is completed. The recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is a register in which the number of subtraction spheres is written when a subtraction sphere is generated as a result of recovery communication between the communication control IC and the payout control unit after the power-off recovery. Note that the recovery communication subtraction sphere request register 727F is also updated only when the recovery communication is completed.

  The recovery request / completion register 728F is a register in which information indicating whether or not recovery communication is requested between the communication control IC and the payout control unit and whether or not the recovery communication is completed are written. The encryption communication data clear request / completion register 729F is information that requests clearing of data such as a serial number held in the encryption communication control unit 700F communicating with the communication control IC 325aF, and that the data has been deleted ( This is a register in which information indicating "clear completion" is written.

<Recovery completion confirmation process>
Next, in the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the main control storage unit 161cF and the payout control memory when returning from a communication disabled state such as a power failure. The recovery process which transmits the predetermined information memorize | stored in the part 171cF is performed. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F perform a recovery completion confirmation process for resuming the generation of predetermined information by executing the user program on the condition that the recovery process ends. Specifically, the recovery completion confirmation process will be described with reference to a flowchart. FIG. 90 is a flowchart for explaining the recovery completion confirmation process.

  First, when the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are turned on in order to recover from an incommunicable state such as a power interruption, the main control circuit 161aF and the payout control circuit 171aF start processing of an authentication sequence. When the authentication is completed, the authentication results are written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, respectively. Then, the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F confirm whether or not the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291). When the authentication completion is not written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF291.

  When the authentication completion is written in the respective authentication status registers 611F and 711F (step SF291: YES), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F recover in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F. It is confirmed whether or not a flag indicating completion is written (step SF292). If the flag indicating the completion of recovery is not written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: NO), the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F return to the process of step SF292.

  The main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F start the processing of the user program when the recovery completion flag is written in the recovery communication completion register 618F and the recovery request / completion register 718F (step SF292: YES). (Step SF293). As means for starting the processing of the user program, for example, a means for transmitting a signal for starting the processing of the user program to start the processing of the user program and a stopping means for stopping the processing of the user program are provided. There are means for starting the processing of the user program by releasing the means.

  As described above, since the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F do not start the processing of the user program until the recovery processing is completed, new information by the processing of the user program before the information to be restored by the recovery processing is determined. Is prevented from being written, the processing of the user program can be resumed appropriately.

<Commands and responses sent and received between the main control unit and the payout control unit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, an outline of commands and responses transmitted / received between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described.

  FIG. 91 shows the transmission direction, whether the data to be transmitted is a command or a response, the name of transmission information, and its outline.

  First, a command named power-on notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This power-on notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F that power is turned on and communication is started. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “power-on reception” to the main control unit 161F. This power-on reception response is a response that the main control unit 161F receives a power-on notification and starts communication.

  Next, a command having a game state notification is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F. This gaming state notification command notifies the payout control unit 171F of the gaming state. The payout control unit 171F transmits a response named “game state response” to the main control unit 161F. This gaming state response is a response that a gaming state notification has been received with respect to the main control unit 161F.

<Main sequence processed between main control unit and payout control unit>
Next, a main sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F by processing executed by the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F will be described with reference to FIGS.

<< Communication sequence >>
First, with reference to FIG. 92, a sequence processed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F when the power is turned on will be described. The sequence shown in FIG. 92 is a process executed when communication is resumed after the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is normally completed.

  The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F is performed by a polling method using the main control unit 161F as a primary station, and the polling interval is 200 ms. Note that communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is excluded. The payout control unit 171F sets “communication line disconnection” and stops the game when the request command from the main control unit 161F cannot be received even after 1 second has elapsed since the response was transmitted.

  Furthermore, the payout control unit 171F transmits a response command to the main control unit 161F only when normal data is received. If the main control unit 161F does not receive a response command within the polling interval time, it retransmits the command up to three times including the first time. The serial numbers used for transmission and reception are stored in the storage unit for both the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and are used for command normality check, power-off recovery, and communication line disconnection recovery.

  Specifically, the communication sequence will be described. First, when power is turned on, communication of power-on notification and power-on reception is performed between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, and an authentication new sequence is started. . As described above, the authentication sequence is written in the authentication status registers 611F and 711F that the chip IDs of the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F are authenticated and the communication between the main control unit and the payout control unit is authenticated. . Furthermore, the process which produces | generates the encryption key and decryption key which are used for the encryption communication of the main control part 161F and the payout control part 171F by the said authentication sequence is performed. The communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F after the process is performed using the generated encryption key and decryption key.

  Next, after the authentication sequence is completed, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with a serial number “n”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n” without counting up the serial number. Furthermore, the main control unit 161F transmits a game state notification command to the payout control unit 171F with the serial number “n + 1”. The payout control unit 171F returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F as “n + 1” without counting up the serial number.

  Thereafter, the main control unit 161F counts up the serial number to “n + 2” and transmits a gaming state notification command to the payout control unit 171F. Then, the payout control unit 171F sets “n + 2” without counting up the serial number, and returns a game state reception response to the main control unit 161F.

  In the communication between the main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the interval from the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n” to the command transmission of the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1”, the game status notification of the serial number “n + 1” The interval from the command transmission to the command transmission of the game number notification of the serial number “n + 2” is 200 ms each.

<< Sequence after power off >>
Next, with reference to FIG. 93, a process when the status information request is unreached due to power failure / communication line disconnection will be described. FIG. 93 particularly shows that there is a power interruption / communication line disconnection (for example, when the power supply of the payout control unit 171F is once turned off and then turned on again), and the gaming state notification is not reached (from the main control unit 161F). FIG. 10 is a sequence diagram for explaining processing when a post-recovery communication partner matches with a payout control unit 171F).

  Referring to FIG. 93, before the power interruption occurs during the game, main controller 161F transmits a gaming state notification including serial number = n to payout controller 171F. In response to this, the payout control unit 171F transmits a game state reception including the serial number = n to the main control unit 161F.

  Then, after a power interruption occurs in the payout control unit 171F during the game, when a game state notification including a serial number = n + 1 is transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F, the payout control unit 171F The game state notification cannot be received because of the state. Thereafter, since the gaming state reception from the payout control unit 171F is not transmitted, the main control unit 161F performs control to stop communication assuming that the power supply is cut off after one second.

  Thereafter, when an authentication sequence is started between the power-on and main control unit 161F and the payout control unit 171F, the main control unit 161F includes a power source including serial number = 1 and main control serial number (previous last transmission serial number) = n + 1. The insertion notification is transmitted to the payout control unit 171F. Since the game state reception serial number transmitted to the main control unit 161F before the power interruption occurred is “n”, the payout control unit 171F has a payout control serial number backed up by the payout control unit 171F = n. Therefore, the payout control sequence number = n backed up by the payout control unit 171F does not match the main control sequence number = n + 1 backed up by the main control unit 161F. When the serial numbers do not match, the payout control unit 171F performs recovery processing on the information of the payout control unit 171F based on the recovery game information included in the power-on notification transmitted from the main control unit 161F. Thereafter, the payout control unit 171F transmits power-on reception including the serial number = 1 to the main control unit 161F.

  The main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F performs processing with the contents after the recovery process, and transmits a game state reception including a serial number = 2 to the payout control unit 171F. Thereafter, similarly, the main control unit 161F transmits a gaming state notification including a serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F. The payout control unit 171F transmits the game state reception including the serial number = 3 to the payout control unit 171F.

  The above-described recovery process is performed because the serial numbers do not match, but information (for example, the number of game information, prize ball information, etc.) included in the recovery game information is the main control unit 161F and payout control. The recovery processing may be performed even if there is a mismatch with the unit 171F.

<Slot machine>
Next, a slot machine will be described as another example of the gaming machine. FIG. 94 is a perspective view showing a state in which the front door of the slot machine is opened. In the description so far, the slot machine is also abbreviated as “S” in the following, because the pachinko machine is abbreviated as “P”.

  The above gaming system using game balls and holding balls is also applied to S units in the same manner. However, in the S platform, the game is played without using balls, and hence the game balls will be referred to as game points and the holding balls as points.

  Referring to FIG. 94, S platform (slot machine) 2SF is provided such that front door 2bSF is openable and closable with respect to main body frame 2aSF with the left side edge as a swing center. Although not shown in FIG. 94, a CU is connected to the left side of the S base 2SF in the same manner as the P base.

  In S 2SF, the number of bets is set by using game points, and the game points are added and updated in accordance with winning. For this reason, when a game is played on the S platform 2SF, a medal insertion operation is not necessary. Therefore, the S stand 2SF is not provided with a medal insertion slot and a medal payout opening.

  Inside the casing of the S unit 2SF, reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF (hereinafter also referred to as a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) in which a plurality of types of symbols are arranged on the outer periphery are juxtaposed in a horizontal direction. Of the symbols arranged on the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, three consecutive symbols are arranged so as to be seen from a see-through window provided on the front door 2bSF. A plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a predetermined order on the outer peripheral portions of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF.

  A touch panel type display 510F is provided in a portion surrounding each reel 2LF, 2CF, 2RF of the front door 2bSF. The display 510F is a display corresponding to the P displays 54F, and displays various types of information (game points, points, etc.) similar to the display 54F, as well as the number of bets set in the game. Is displayed. The display unit 510F is connected to the display control unit 350F of the CU similarly to the display unit 54F of FIG. 63, and display control is performed on the CU side. The indicator 510F is not provided in a portion surrounding each of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF, but is provided at a lower panel portion (position below the start switch 7SF shown in FIG. You may provide in the panel part provided with the conventional S medal payout opening.

  Further, a 7-segment display 50SF is provided in a lower portion of the display 510F. The 7-segment display 50SF is a display corresponding to the P 7-segment display 50F, and displays various types of information (such as the number of times the front door 2bSF is opened) of the same type as the 7-segment display 50F.

In addition, the front door 2bSF has a single BET switch 5SF operated when setting the number of bets using “game points = 1” corresponding to one medal, and the maximum determined according to the game state. When setting the number of bets (for example, “game point = 3” in the normal game state before BB occurrence and RT (Replay Time) where the winning probability of replay is high, “game point = 2” in the bonus) A MAXBET switch 6SF that is operated when the game is started, a start switch 7SF that is operated when the game starts, and stop switches 8LF, 8CF, and 8RF that are operated when the rotations of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF are stopped. Yes.

  In the case of playing a game on S units 2SF, first, similarly to P units, after securing game points using adjacent CUs, the number of bets is set using the game points. The game points are obtained by withdrawing the balance of the prepaid card inserted into the CU, the points, or the stored medals (corresponding to P stored balls) deposited in the game hall. In order to use game points, one-sheet BET switch 5SF or MAXBET switch 6SF may be operated. In the present embodiment, for example, by setting the bet number to 1, the game points are deducted by 1, and the display of the game points on the display 510F is also subtracted and updated. When the bet number is set, the pay line determined according to the bet number and the game state is valid, and the operation of the start switch 7SF is valid, that is, the game can be started.

  When the start switch 7SF is operated while the game can be started, the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF rotate, and the symbols of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF continuously vary. When any one of the stop switches 8LF, 8CF, 8RF is operated in this state, the rotation of the corresponding reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF is stopped, and the display result is derived and displayed on the fluoroscopic window.

  Then, all the reels 2LF, 2CF and 2RF are stopped, so that one game is finished, and a predetermined symbol combination (hereinafter also referred to as a role) on the activated pay line is assigned to each reel 2LF, 2CF, When the display is stopped as a result of 2RF, a winning occurs, a game point determined according to the winning is given to the player, and the display of the game point on the display 510F is also added and updated.

  In the case of S units, it is possible to count game points as in the case of P units. As shown in FIG. 94, the S stand 2SF is provided with a counting button 28SF for counting game points and converting them into points. The ball lending button, the return button, and the replay button are provided on the CU side (see FIG. 63). The player executes the counting operation based on an arbitrary timing or a display for prompting the counting operation on the display 510F in the same manner as the P units. Then, the game points are counted, and the state where the game points are decreased while the points are increased is displayed on the display 510F. The ball lending button may be provided not on the CU side but on the P platform side and the S platform side. In that case, the operation signal of the ball lending button may be directly input to the CU 3F, or may be transmitted to the CU 3F as a status information response via the P base 2F or the S base 2SF. .

  The types of winning combinations are determined according to the state of the game, but can be broadly divided into special roles with a shift to the big bonus (BB) and regular bonus (RB), and small roles with payout of medals. And a re-gamer (replay) that allows the next game to be started without the need to set the bet amount.

  Which of a plurality of types of winning combinations is to be won or whether any winning combination is to be determined not to win is determined by, for example, the main control unit (S) controlling the S stand 2SF when a start operation is detected. Equivalent to the main controller 161F of the base). The main control unit of the S base 2SF is mounted on a main control board corresponding to the main control board 16F mounted on the P base 2F. The main control unit determines the presence / absence of a winning combination by, for example, drawing a random number generated from a predetermined random number generator or generated on software.

  After that, the main control unit waits for the reel stop operation by the player, draws in the symbol corresponding to the winning combination in the predetermined frame number range based on the stop operation time, otherwise draws another symbol Is controlled to stop the three symbols and determine whether or not there is a prize. If the main control base determines that a winning is made, the main control base transmits a signal corresponding to the type of winning to the payout control unit (corresponding to the payout control unit 171F in FIG. 63). The payout control unit gives the player a number of game points corresponding to the signal (adds game points).

  The payout control unit of the S platform 2SF is mounted on a payout control board (not shown). The payout control board is delivered from the frame maker to the hall in a state of being attached to the main body frame 2aSF by the frame maker.

  On the other hand, the main control board (not shown) of the S stand 2SF is delivered to the hall from the slot machine manufacturer separately from the main body frame 2aSF in a state of being attached to a board mounting board for connecting wiring.

  With the S units, the game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using the gaming value, and variable display capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information each of which can be identified A slot machine in which one game is completed when a display result is derived to the device and a winning can be generated according to the display result derived to the variable display device, and the display result is displayed on the variable display device. Before deriving, predetermining means for determining whether or not to allow a plurality of types of winnings to occur, and control for causing the variable display device to derive a display result according to the determination result of the predetermining means A slot machine is configured that includes a derivation control means for performing and a granting means for imparting a game value when the winning occurs.

  FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram for explaining various data stored in each of the card unit and the slot machine and its transmission / reception mode. The transmission / reception mode shown in FIG. 95 is obtained by replacing the terminology in FIG. 65 described as the configuration of P units with that for S units, and the mode is the same as that described with reference to FIG. Now, further explanation is omitted.

  The information to be output to the outside of the pachinko machine 2F includes a winning information signal that can specify the winning opening and the number of winning prizes for the game balls, as described above for the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the current gaming state. A pending storage number signal that can specify the latest pending storage number may be included. Note that the information output to the outside of the pachinko machine 2F is not configured to be output to the outside from the information output circuit as in the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, but is output from the main control unit 161F via the payout control unit 171F. You may make it do.

  As described above, since the game control microcomputer provided on the main control board 16F performs data processing such as addition / subtraction processing, the information on the number of reserved memories is recognized as the latest information. Therefore, a reserved memory number signal that can specify the latest reserved memory number in the current gaming state can be output from the game control microcomputer to the outside via the information output circuit or the payout control microcomputer.

  In addition to the above-described information, the game control microcomputer on the main control board 16F includes a launch stop signal, a radio wave sensor detection signal, a magnet in addition to the information described above. Various information may be transmitted by various signals such as a sensor detection signal, an illegal winning detection signal, and a game state information setting completion signal, and the various information may be managed on the payout control microcomputer side.

  Here, the firing stop signal is a firing stop switch when the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact in the hitting operation handle 25F (a switch for forcibly stopping the firing when operated). Is operated, the hitting operation handle 25F is not rotated more than a certain rotation angle, or the card unit (CU) 3F and the pachinko machine (P stand) 2F are not electrically connected. This is output when the game control microcomputer determines that a predetermined firing stop condition is satisfied.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is transmitted to the main control board 16 by the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 163F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves). A sensor error is determined and output based on the determination.

  The magnet sensor detection signal indicates that the magnet sensor (magnet switch) for detecting abnormal magnetism (illegal magnetism) is connected to the main control board 16F (game control microcomputer), and a magnet is used to Based on an illegal game using a magnet such as changing the trajectory, a magnetism sensor signal is input to the main control board 16F based on an illegal game using a magnet, and a magnet sensor error is determined in the game control microcomputer. Is output based on.

  The unauthorized winning detection signal is sent to the winning winning opening of the winning sensor 162F in a state in which the counting winning switch is connected to the main control board 16F and the winning switch is closed. When an illegal winning error is determined by detecting a winning ball in the big winning mouth in the gaming control microcomputer based on the detection signal of the winning sensor for detecting the winning ball of the game, an output is made based on the determination. .

  The game state information setting completion signal is output when the setting of various game information (game state information) transmitted from the main control unit 161F to the payout control unit 171F is completed when the power of the pachinko machine (P units) 2F is turned on. The Such a game state information setting completion signal is used as a trigger signal for starting communication between the CU3F side (card unit side) and the P stand 2F side (pachinko machine side), for example.

  In addition to the information as described above, the microcomputer for game control on the main control board 16F from the payout control microcomputer on the payout control board 17F includes the following glass frame / main body frame opening signal, the number of winnings. Various information such as abnormal signal, illegal addition detection signal, radio wave sensor detection signal, proximity sensor abnormal signal, night open detection signal, counting notification request signal, card removal waiting signal, and power saving transition request signal The various information may be managed on the game control microcomputer side.

  The glass frame / main body frame opening signal is generated when the detection signal from the glass door opening detection switch 12F or the front frame opening detection switch 13F is input to the dispensing control board 17F. When the opening of the front frame 5F is determined, the output is made based on the determination.

  The winning number abnormality signal confirms whether the number of winnings per unit time is equal to or greater than a predetermined number in the payout control microcomputer with respect to the number of winnings by the winning detection signal input from the main control board 16F to the payout control board 17F. Whether or not the winning number is abnormal is determined based on the determination, and when it is determined that the winning number is abnormal, an output is made based on the determination.

  The illegal addition detection signal indicates that an illegal addition error is determined by the payout control microcomputer when the payout control board 17F receives a coin addition request from the CU3F in a state other than when the card is inserted into the CU3F. Based on the output.

  The radio wave sensor detection signal is a radio wave sensor error in the payout control microcomputer because the radio wave detection signal from the radio wave sensor (radio wave switch) 173F that detects abnormal radio waves (illegal radio waves) is input to the payout control board 17F. Is determined and output based on the determination.

  Proximity sensor abnormal signal is generated by winning sensor 162F, ball raising switch (upper) 41aF, foul ball detection switch 330F, out ball detection switch 701F, and launch ball detection switch due to a change in capacitance due to the passage of the ball. It is composed of proximity switches to be detected. For such proximity switches, the dispensing control microcomputer determines whether or not there is an abnormality based on the number of balls detected, and when the abnormality is determined, the determination Is output based on. For example, when only the ball raising switch (upper) 41aF is always turned on by an improper radio wave, the shot of the ball is not detected. On the other hand, when the actually fired ball is collected and detected by the shot ball detecting switch, It is determined that the proximity sensor is abnormal because wrinkles occur in the number of fire balls and recovery balls (out balls).

  The night open detection signal is output when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened as follows. At night when the pachinko machine 2F is turned off, the glass door 6F is detected based on the detection signals output from the glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F by the above-described counting counter operated by the backup power supply. The number of times the front frame 5F has been opened is counted. Then, when the power of the pachinko machine 2F is turned on, either the glass door 6F or the front frame 5F is opened in the payout control microcomputer by the count value of each opening number output from the count counter to the payout control board 17F. Is determined. It is also possible to detect the nighttime opening of only one of the glass door 6F and the front frame 5F and output the nighttime opening detection signal.

  The count notification request signal is output to make a request to notify the count value when it is determined in the payout control microcomputer that a count request has been made in response to the operation of the count button. Such a count notification request signal is used, for example, to execute audio output and numerical display related to counting by the main board.

  The card removal waiting signal is output to notify the card return ready state OFF and card removal waiting ON information when the payout control microcomputer determines that the card can be removed by the CU 3F.

  When the touch sensor does not detect the player's hand contact (for example, when it has not detected for a predetermined period) in the payout control microcomputer, the power saving transition request signal is “0”. When it is determined that a predetermined power saving control transition condition is satisfied, for example, when a card is not inserted into the CU3F or when a variable display is stopped, for example, the brightness of the liquid crystal backlight Is output as an operation request signal for shifting to a power saving state in which predetermined power saving control is performed such as a decrease in light emission and stop of light emission of various lamps.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, an example is shown in which the information output to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a winning information signal that can identify the winning mouth and the number of winning prizes that the game ball has won. Such an external output of the winning information signal may be applied to the pachinko machine (P units) 2F.

  In addition, it is possible to transmit various signals such as the reserved memory number signal, the emission stop signal, and the radio wave sensor detection signal described as signals to be transmitted from the game control microcomputer of the pachinko machine 2F to the payout control microcomputer. The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above may be applied. In addition, the transmission of various signals such as the glass frame / main body frame opening signal and the winning number abnormality signal described as signals to be transmitted from the payout control microcomputer of the pachinko machine 2F to the game control microcomputer has been described above. You may apply in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

<Modifications and feature points>
Next, modifications and feature points of the embodiment described above are listed.

  (1) When a slot machine (S units), which is an example of a gaming machine, is applied to the above gaming system, for example, there are P units of reels and various sensor parts attached to the reels and a main control board for controlling the reels. Corresponding to the board, other configurations correspond to P game frames. However, in the S platform, the various detection switches 41aF, 701F, 33F, the launch control board 31F, and the launch motor 18F of the game frame shown in FIG. 63 are unnecessary.

  A conventional S unit is provided with a credit function. When this function is enabled, the credit is subtracted when the number of bets is set, and the credit is added when a winning occurs. However, there is an upper limit for credits, and when a winning occurs when the number of credits reaches the upper limit value, medals are paid out from the hopper.

  On the other hand, in the S units according to the present embodiment, game points are subtracted when the bet number is set, and game points are added when a winning occurs. Further, when the game points reach a predetermined number, a display for prompting a counting operation is made, and the gaming points are converted into points by performing the counting operation. For this reason, it is not necessary to pay out medals when the credit reaches the upper limit unlike the conventional S units. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a hopper on the S platform according to the present embodiment.

  As a result, the amusement hall does not need to secure a large number of medals, reducing the economic burden. The game arcade is also freed from operations such as replenishment / collection of medals and maintenance operations to deal with clogged medals. The player is relieved from the hassle of inserting medals for each betting operation after the credit is full, and can easily concentrate on the game.

  On the other hand, if S units become medalless, a player who has won a large number of medals will not be able to act to show off his arms by stacking boxes with medals beside the seat. Inconvenience arises. However, in the present embodiment, such a problem can be prevented by providing a function for displaying a dollar box. In addition, it is desirable for the dollar box display in the case of S units to have a large number of medals loaded instead of a large number of balls.

  When S machines are applied as a gaming machine, each type of data is expressed as follows using two types of data, “Points” and “Game Points”, and “Credit” and “Credit Excess Points”. It is also possible to configure a gaming system that is converted. Note that these four types of data are displayed on the S displays 510F.

  First, when a conversion operation (lending operation, saving medal payout operation, or point payout operation) from a prepaid card balance, a saving medal, or a point is detected, each is withdrawn and converted into a game point. The

  A game point is data corresponding to a medal in a conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the number of game points on the display 510F and display the number of medal images corresponding to the game points. For example, when a pseudo-insertion medal operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) such that a player touches the medal image and inserts it into the slot machine is detected, the medal image disappears and the game points are subtracted. Instead, one bet is set. By performing such a pseudo medal insertion operation three times, the bet number is set to the maximum value of three.

  Thereafter, when a pseudo medal insertion operation is further detected, a credit is added in accordance with the detection. An upper limit value (for example, 50) is set for the credit, and when the credit exceeds the upper limit value, a credit excess point is added.

  The betting amount setting can be performed using the game points as described above, and can also be performed using credits. In other words, if there is an operation of the single BET switch 5SF, the bet number setting value is incremented by 1, and the credit is decremented by 1. If the MAXBET switch 6SF is operated, the bet number is set to 3, and the credit is subtracted according to the bet number setting.

  As a result of the game, when a winning occurs, a number of points corresponding to the winning is added to the credit. When a winning that exceeds the upper limit of credit occurs, the score for the excess is stored as a credit excess point. This credit excess point corresponds to a medal to be paid out when a winning occurs exceeding the upper limit of credit in the conventional slot machine. For this reason, for example, it is desirable to display the credit excess points on the display 510F and to display the number of medal images corresponding to the credit excess points. Further, it is desirable to change the color of this medal image so that it can be distinguished from the medal image corresponding to the game point.

  Further, it is desirable that the credit excess points are converted into game points by the player's operation. For example, when a pseudo medal conversion operation (for example, an operation of pushing a medal) is performed such that the player touches the medal image corresponding to the credit excess point and converts it to a game point, the medal image disappears and the credit excess Points are subtracted and game points are added.

  Alternatively, if the credit becomes less than the upper limit value, the credit excess point may be automatically converted into credit.

  When the player performs a counting operation, each of the game points, credits, and credit excess points is counted and converted into points. As a result, the player's points are posted as “card possession number + game points + credits + credit excess points”. The “card possession number” is the number of points before conversion (the number of possessions currently owned by the player) that has not been converted into game points.

  In the above description, the four types of data of points, game points, credits, and credit excess points may be stored on both sides by exchanging data between the CU and S units. You may memorize | store only in the S stand side only by CU side. Further, the credit excess point may be a target for dollar box display.

  Moreover, although the example using a credit excess point was demonstrated in the above description, it is not necessary to use a credit excess point. In this case, when the credit limit is exceeded, it may be added to the game points.

  (2) In this embodiment, a game point is added by consuming card frequency. Alternatively, game points are added by consuming stored balls (stored medals). That is, the card frequency or the stored ball is converted into game points. On the other hand, the card power and the stored balls are not converted into points (count balls, count medals). However, the card power and the stored ball may be once converted into points.

  (3) In this embodiment, game points are converted into points by counting operation. The conversion rate in this case is 1: 1. However, the conversion rate in the case of conversion may be other than 1: 1. For example, when 100 game points are converted, 97 points obtained by subtracting three of them may be converted into points. Or you may make it convert into the number of game balls obtained by multiplying a predetermined ratio of less than 100% with respect to a point.

  (4) The recording medium for recording the holding point in an identifiable manner may use a mobile terminal such as a smartphone. In this case, the communication unit for communicating with the mobile terminal is provided in the CU3F, and the CU recognizes the ID stored in the mobile terminal by holding the mobile terminal over the communication unit. The game is made possible by the procedure as described above. On the other hand, at the end of the game, the portable terminal is again held over the communication unit, so that the score at the end of the game is added to the player's score through the ID.

  (5) The operation means for counting game points may be provided on the CU side. In this case, the operation means may be displayed on a touch panel, or may be constituted by a physical switch.

  (6) When an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is desirable to display a message prompting the counting on the P-unit or the CU side display. However, instead of such a configuration, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, the counting display is automatically started and the display on the P table or the CU side is used. It may be notified that automatic counting has started because there are still uncounted game points, or that, in addition, the card will be returned after completion of automatic counting.

  Alternatively, when an uncounted game point remains when the card return operation is performed, it is determined that there is a possibility that the player may leave the table temporarily, and the display (CU side or P stand side) You may display the message which confirms whether it is temporary leaving. Further, the display device may be constituted by a touch panel so that the player can input a response to the message. Furthermore, if the response input is the end of the game, a message prompting the counting operation is displayed. On the other hand, if the response input is temporarily away from the desk, the card may be temporarily ejected while the ID of the card is stored on the CU side, the P platform side, or both. Thereafter, when a card with the same ID is inserted, the game is resumed from the original state.

  (7) The counting time from the start of the counting operation to the completion of the counting display is based on the game points when the game points are less than the first reference value and when the game points exceed the first reference value. The increasing rate of the counting time may be reduced. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect of counting display as if counting real spheres, and it is possible to prevent an excessive amount of time until counting is completed due to an increase in game points. Further, when the game points exceed a certain reference value, all the counting times may be the same. Alternatively, the same counting time may be adopted regardless of the number of game points without providing a reference value.

  (8) In the above-described embodiment, the glass door 6F opening detection and the front frame 5F opening detection are detected by the separate glass door opening detection switch 12F and the front frame opening detection switch 13F. Alternatively, both may be detected by a common detection switch.

  (9) As the counting operation means for counting the game balls, one that exhibits a counting function when operated a predetermined number of times twice or more may be employed. As a result, erroneous operation can be prevented. Further, in this case, one function may be used to exhibit another function different from the counting function. For example, when there is no operation for a predetermined time (for example, within 1 second) after the operation is performed once, a function for turning on a lamp for calling a store clerk is exhibited, and 2 within 1 second from the operation. When the second operation is detected, it is conceivable to perform the counting function.

  (10) When the counting operation button is operated for less than a predetermined time (short-time operation), for example, the first number of balls is counted, and when operated for a predetermined time or longer (long-time operation), the first operation is performed according to the operation time. It is desirable to control so that the number of balls larger than the number of balls of 1 is counted. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls are counted in the short-time operation, while a predetermined number exceeding 100 balls, for example, 200 balls or 400 balls, is counted in the long-time operation. Also, the number of game points to be counted may be controlled to be different depending on the long press time of the counting operation button. For example, it is conceivable that 100 balls start to be counted by long-pressing for 1 second, and if the long-pressing continues for 5 seconds as it is, all the remaining balls are counted. Alternatively, it may be controlled such that a predetermined number is counted by one operation and all remaining balls are counted by the fifth operation.

  (11) (A) The fact that game points equal to or greater than the “predetermined number of points” are not stored does not count game points even if a counting operation is performed, and a notification to that effect is given. Also, (B) when the game points are counted until the stored game points reach the “predetermined number of points”, no more counting is possible, and control is performed so that a notification to that effect is given. Is desirable. The same number may be adopted as the predetermined number of points in these two cases (A) and (B), that is, the reference value may be different.

  (12) When the counting operation is performed while the ball is being fired, it is desirable to control the counting operation to be invalidated when the number of game balls at that time is equal to or less than a reference value. However, even if the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected during the ball firing exceeds the reference value, the number of balls counted in one counting operation is set to a predetermined number. In some cases, the counting operation may be invalidated when the value obtained by subtracting the predetermined number from the number of game balls when the counting operation is detected does not satisfy the reference value.

  Further, in order to invalidate the counting operation during the game, it is desirable to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the ball firing operation is detected. Instead of this, or in addition to this, whether the number of in-game balls (floating ball floating in the game area 27F) is 0 (not in game) or not (in game) It may be determined whether or not. In addition, it is also possible to determine whether or not the game is in progress based on whether or not the variable display device is changing, whether or not it is a big hit, whether or not the attacker is open.

  Further, “in game” when S units are applied as a gaming machine to invalidate the counting operation during the game is, for example, a period from the start of rotation of the reels 2LF, 2CF, and 2RF to the stop. . Alternatively, it is a period from when the start operation is detected until the reels 2LF, 2CF, 2RF are stopped.

  (13) When the number of game balls is greater than a predetermined number regardless of whether or not a big hit is being made, a display prompting a counting operation may be performed.

  In addition, if the counting operation is not detected even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the display for prompting the counting operation, the game ball may be forcibly stopped, and the firing is not forcibly stopped. It may be.

  (14) Referring to FIG. 65, P platform is provided with a counting ball counter that temporarily stores the counted counting balls (holding balls), but does not include a counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls. . However, a counting ball cumulative storage counter that stores the cumulative value of counting balls may be provided on the P platform side. In addition, the CU side is provided with an area for storing card holding balls (counting balls). If a holding ball is recorded on the inserted card itself, this area holds the card holding ball. The current number of players' balls, including balls, is stored. For this reason, only in this area, the number of counting balls counted by the player in the current game cannot be specified. Therefore, an area for storing the number of counting balls counted by the player in this game may be further provided on the CU side. In this case, the CU adds balls to the area based on the information on the number of balls that are sent from the P cars after the game starts, and when the balls are converted into game balls, Subtract the holding ball.

  (15) The display for prompting the counting operation may be a display of “Please play the game after the game balls remain, so please return it” or display the counting button 28F on the screen. The display may be blinking.

  (16) When the number of game balls is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (3,000 balls or more), control is performed so that “control for performing a display prompting a counting operation on a display device” is executed as “predetermined notification control”. Is desirable. Here, “prompt counting operation” means, for example, a message that displays “Counting operation because the number of game balls has reached the upper limit” or a message that simply displays “Counting operation is required.” It may be. Further, the “predetermined notification control” may be a control for outputting a notification sound for prompting a counting operation from a speaker. Further, the “notification” may not be “notification for prompting the counting operation” but simply notify that “the number of game balls has reached the upper limit” (not to prompt for the counting operation). .

  Further, when the game point is equal to or greater than a predetermined first reference value (3000 balls or more), “predetermined notification control” is performed, and thereafter, the game point is set to a second reference value greater than the first reference value. It may be controlled so that the game is disabled when the game point is reached, and the game is permitted (no firing prohibited) until the game point reaches the second reference value from the first reference value. In the case where the gaming machine is a slot machine, the inoperable state can be realized by controlling the start lever to operate so that the reel does not start rotating or the betting number setting is invalidated.

  (17) When a game using game points is being performed (while the ball is being fired), control is performed so that the counting operation is not validated unless there are more than a predetermined number of game points (for example, 250 points). It is desirable to do. Here, the predetermined number of points is not limited to 250 points, and may be any number as long as it is 1 point or more. However, for example, when an excessively small number of points such as one point is set, a malfunction occurs when the timing of firing and the timing of counting occur almost simultaneously. Alternatively, if a counting operation is detected when the number of points is equal to or less than a predetermined number (for example, 10 points or less) and the counting operation is detected, 5 points are left for launching and the remaining points are counted. You may control to.

  In addition, when it is detected that a player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated because there are no more points left than the predetermined number of points has been stopped, it is invalidated first. The counting operation may be activated to automatically start the counting operation. That is, in this case, the player who notices that the counting operation has been invalidated only needs to stop the firing operation, and does not need to perform the counting operation again.

  (18) In order to change the number of game points to be converted by one operation according to the time for which the count button is kept pressed, for example, when a long press (for example, continuous operation for 1 second or more), While all are counted, only 200 balls may be counted in a short press (for example, continuous operation for less than 1 second). However, in this case, when the remaining number of game balls is small, for example, when it is less than 200 balls, it is desirable that all game balls are counted by operating the counting button.

  (19) Depending on the remaining number of game points, when the number of points counted by one short pressing operation of the counting button is made different, for example, the following may be considered. For example, when the number of game points is less than 200, all the game points are counted by one short press operation of the counting button. When the game points are 200 or more and less than 1000, 200 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 1000 or more and less than 5000, 1000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the game points are 5000 or more and less than 10,000, 2000 points are counted by one short press operation. When the number of game points is 10,000 or more, 2500 points are counted by one short press operation. The above numerical values are specific examples and can be set as appropriate.

  (20) When counting game balls (game points) and converting the points, not only counting display but also counting sound may be output from the speaker. In addition, when counting the game points, it is conceivable to display an image in which balls are dropped one by one from the ball storage tray to the counter.

  (21) Timing for performing conversion display (display indicating that game balls are counted and the number of balls is increased) based on a counting operation and subtracting game points on the data The timing for adding the points can be varied. The calculation may be executed after the conversion display is completed. For this purpose, count data may be transmitted from the gaming machine to the CU after the conversion display is completed. It should be noted that such a modification can be similarly applied to the case where the points are converted into game points.

  (22) In the present embodiment, in the communication between the CU and the gaming machine, a command-response method is adopted in which the CU is a primary station and the gaming machine is a secondary station. The relationship may be reversed. Alternatively, instead of adopting such a communication system having a master-slave relationship, a system may be employed in which both send data to the other party when a request to communicate occurs.

  (23) In FIG. 65 or FIG. 95, game balls (game points) are stored on both the gaming machine side and the CU side, but the game balls (game points) are stored only on the game machine side, and the CU It may not be stored on the side. On the other hand, the card holding balls (scoring points) are stored only on the CU side, but may also be stored on the gaming machine side. In particular, game balls (game points) are stored only on the gaming machine side, while card holding balls (points) are stored only on the CU side to clarify the division of data storage management. Good.

  (24) The counting display and various notifications performed on the display 54F may be similarly performed on the display 312F.

  (25) In the CU, the stored number of game balls is updated based on the value of the added ball number counter (added ball number) and the value of the subtracted ball number counter (subtracted ball number) transmitted from the P platform side. When the number of game balls stored is subtracted based on the value of the counting ball number counter transmitted from the P platform side, if the value of the number of game balls becomes negative, an error (abnormal) determination is made. Then, error processing may be performed. As a specific example of error processing, error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or the like, or an error notification signal indicating that an error has occurred is transmitted to the hall management computer or hall server 801F (in this case, for hall use). An error notification may be performed by the management computer or hall server 801F).

  (26) When a lending operation or a conversion operation (lending operation) from a holding point (held ball) to a gaming point (game ball) is detected, the gaming points may be counted up one by one. In order to shorten the waiting time of the player, a display may be made so that a plurality of points (for example, 25 points equivalent to 100 yen) are counted up. Conversely, when a game point counting operation is executed, a display may be made so that the points are counted up by a plurality of points. Furthermore, the number of units for counting up and displaying game points or points may be set from a plurality of types. In the setting, it is conceivable to use a touch panel of P or S display devices.

  (27) When the counting operation is executed, the points may be counted up at an accelerated rate when a predetermined time has elapsed since the counting up of the points was started. Alternatively, a speed-up button for accelerating the count display may be displayed on the touch panel display on the CU side or the gaming machine side, and the operation may be detected to display the acceleration count display. By performing the acceleration counting display of the points in this way, the waiting time of the player when counting a large number of gaming points can be shortened.

  (28) A touch sensor may be provided on the hitting operation handle, and the counting operation may be invalidated while the touch sensor detects that the player is holding the hitting operation handle. Invalidating the counting operation means detecting the counting operation but not executing the counting operation based on the detection output, or not detecting the counting operation itself. Or, if the player does not invalidate the counting operation only by touching the hitting operation handle, and if the counting operation is disabled if the hitting operation handle is turned to such an extent that the ball firing drive pulse is output. Good.

  In these cases, when a counting operation is detected, a message “Please release handle” may be displayed on the display of the gaming machine or CU. Alternatively, when the counting operation button is displayed as an icon on the touch panel screen, the counting operation button may be grayed out to notify the player that the operation is impossible.

  (29) At least one or all of the ball lending button, the return button, the replay button, and the counting button may be provided on the gaming machine side, or may be provided on the CU side. Further, it is conceivable that the button is displayed on the display device on the gaming machine side or the CU side described as the touch panel type display device.

  (30) The sequence control shown in FIGS. 67 to 73 is not limited to the transmission / reception sequence between control devices in a single gaming machine such as CU3F, P stand 2F, S stand 2SF, etc., particularly for processing related to security. For example, the present invention may be applied to a transmission / reception sequence between a plurality of gaming machines such as a CU3F, a P stand 2F, a jet counter, and a POS terminal.

  (31) In the above-described embodiment, the identity of the player is determined based on the card ID. However, instead of or in addition to this, the identity of the player is determined based on the biomass of the player's fingerprint or retina. May be performed.

  (32) In the above-described embodiment, a so-called enclosed circulation type gaming machine (P stand 2F and S stand 2SF) is shown, but it is not limited thereto, and a game medium (such as a pachinko ball) is provided from the upper part of the island. It may be a general gaming machine that is supplied to a gaming machine and from which a gaming medium is paid out by winning. Specifically, the game is performed by hitting the balls stored in the ball storage tray into the game area, and when winning, the balls are paid out to the ball storage tray, and are paid out to the ball storage tray at the end of the game. Pachinko machines that can exchange prizes using balls may also be used. Also, the coins stored in the coin tray are inserted into the coin slot, the number of bets is input and set, and the reel is rotated and stopped by operating the start lever. When a display result winning that is sometimes displayed has occurred, a slit machine may be used in which coins are paid out to a coin tray, and paid out to the coin tray at the end of the game so that prizes can be exchanged using the coin. That is, a gaming machine that can be played using game media (pachinko balls, coins) and that pays out game media to the player in accordance with the result of the game may be used.

  (33) In the above-described embodiment, the number of game balls and game points are directly added by the occurrence of a win, but instead, the points are added by the occurrence of a win, and the added points are calculated. It may be controlled so that the number of game balls and game points are added after being withdrawn.

  (34) In the above-described embodiment, when the value is deducted within the range of the valuable value owned by the player (prepaid balance, holding ball, savings ball) and the corresponding game points are added, In the above example, game points having the same value are added, but instead, for example, control may be performed so that game points corresponding to consumption tax are added to the value actually deducted.

  (35) In the above-described embodiment, authentication is performed using various authentication keys, but authentication may be performed using, for example, an authentication ID instead of the various authentication keys.

  (36) You may comprise the above-mentioned indicator 54F and 510F with a display with a touch panel. Further, the information transmitted / received between the P platform and the CU is not limited to that described in the above-described embodiment, and it is a game that determines what information is output from the P platform to the CU. You may enable it to perform input setting by touch operation with the touch panel of the display units 54F and 510F.

  Also, in the S stand 2SF, the information output from the S stand 2SF is converted and transmitted to Hallcon in the same manner as the P stand 2F described above. As information to be converted, for example, a big bonus prize or a regular bonus prize is given. And winning information such as various small role winnings, information indicating that the replay time is in progress, the number of additions and subtractions in FIG. 95, the number of game starts, and the like. Further, the information to be converted may be the number of coins to be paid out when coins are paid out with winning.

  (37) In the above-described embodiment, the gaming machine determines that “the gaming device (CU) is a predetermined player with the gaming points as the holding points on the condition that the conversion processing for all gaming points is completed (game points = 0)”. Processing (processing that accepts a card at the gift exchange and consumes the points specified by the card and enables the exchange of the gift, and inserts the card discharged from the CU into another CU connected to another gaming machine. A validating means for validating a recording medium processing operation (card return operation (operation of the card return button 322F)) ”.

  Here, the enabling means is, for example, “means for confirming game point 0 on the P platform side and transmitting card discharge operation permission ON to CU” or “game when receiving card return notification from CU”. It is determined whether or not the number of balls is 0, and in the case of 0, a means for validating card return by returning a card return response to the CU ", and further," game by performing counting operation etc. " It is a concept that includes “means for establishing the condition that the number of balls = 0 and consequently the card return is valid”.

(38) When the payout control unit 171F receives a value (= 63) in which the round flag is raised, the abnormality control process is executed by adopting one or more of those listed in the following a to c You may control as follows.
a Display unit (for example, a 7-segment display 50F and a variable display device that variably displays identification information (design)) by the payout control unit 171F or the main control unit 161F that receives abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F Is displayed.
b CU3F that has received the abnormality information from the payout control unit 171F performs abnormality notification such as an error number.
c An abnormality notification such as an error number is performed in a host device such as a hall management computer that has received the abnormality information from the CU3F.

  (39) In the present embodiment, information specifying the front frame 5F, storage information, resale information, disposal information, and the like are included as history information of the front frame 5F stored in association with the payout control security chip ID in the payout side table. An example is shown. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, maintenance information, repair information, and the like may be included as history information of the front frame 5F. Similarly, in the present embodiment, information specifying the game board 26F, storage information, resale information, discard information, and the like are stored as history information of the game board 26F stored in the main control side table in association with the main control security chip ID. Examples included are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, maintenance information, repair information, and the like may be included as the history information of the game board 26F.

  (40) In the present embodiment, after a manufacturer, a warehouse, or the like completes operations such as shipping, installation, and storage, necessary information (for example, as shown in FIG. 83, for example, from a terminal connected to the history management center 800AF). The delivery side table and the main control side table are updated by inputting the shipping date, installation date and time, removal date, sales company name, and disposal date). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a manufacturer or a warehouse company fills in application documents with necessary information and sends the information to the history management center 800AF. The payout side table and the main control side table may be updated by inputting necessary information from a terminal or the like. Note that a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF is also a terminal connected directly to the machine history management center 800AF (for example, an internal terminal in the machine history management center 800AF) via a communication line. It may be a terminal (for example, a terminal of a warehouse company or a second-hand company connected via the Internet).

  (41) In this embodiment, an example in which the payout side table and the main control side table are stored in one large capacity storage device 8005F has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the payout side table and the main control side table are stored separately in a plurality of large capacity storage devices, the large capacity storage device that stores the payout side table and the main control side table are stored. It may be divided into a mass storage device. Further, the payout side table and the main control side table stored in the large-capacity storage device can erase the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F for each security chip ID. Even if it is associated with a pair of security chip IDs, the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F can be deleted separately for each security chip ID. Thereby, even if it is the front frame 5F and the game board 26F (the period used is long compared with the front frame 5F) from which the period used is different, it can delete separately, respectively, and it can manage appropriately, respectively. it can.

  (42) In the present embodiment, an example has been shown in which a manufacturer other than the hall, a warehouse company, etc. update the payout side table and the main control side table by inputting necessary information to the machine history management center 800AF. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the payout side table and the main control side table may be updated by inputting information necessary for the hall itself to the machine history management center 800AF.

  (43) In this embodiment, when a second-hand trader resells the front frame 5F and the game board 26F to another hall and installs them, the resale information is stored as history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F. Indicated. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when moving to another hole in the same group as the hole in which the front frame 5F and the game board 26F are installed (for example, a hole with the same corporate code), the front frame 5F and the game board The movement information may be stored in the history information as a simple movement of 26F (management state (status) from “installation” to “installation”). That is, even if the installation of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F moves between holes of the same corporate code, it is not determined as abnormal. In addition, if the movement of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F is permitted between halls of the same corporate code and within the same prefecture, and if it moves to other prefectures between halls of the same corporate code, the same processing as resale is performed. May be.

  (44) In this embodiment, the history management center 800AF is set as follows, for example. In the machine history management center 800AF, a user registered in the system and authenticated by clear authentication is logged into the system. Authentication at login is as follows: (a) The specified user ID exists in the system. (B) The specified user is within the account expiration date. (C) The specified user is not account-locked. (D) The entered password matches the password of the specified user ID. (E) If the current password is not within the validity period, the user is logged in, but only the user's own password change and logout can be used, and a message is displayed indicating that the password needs to be changed. If the password is changed, log out to confirm the use of the new password.

  When the authentication is successful, the history management center 800AF clears the number of login failures and the continuous login error date / time of the user. On the other hand, the history management center 800AF records the number of login failures when the authentication fails or when the user actually exists. Each time the number of login failures reaches [the maximum number of login attempts] (when it becomes an integer multiple), the date and time when the account is locked is set.

  The history management center 800AF updates / sets the password expiration date when (a) a new user is registered, (b) when the password is cleared, and (c) when the user changes the password. The updated / set password is valid from that point until the [Password Validity Period] elapses.

If the authentication fails [the maximum number of login attempts] in the same session, the history management center 800AF transitions to the login NG screen instead of the login screen and does not attempt to log in.

  The history management center 800AF warns that at the time of login, the password may expire if the password of the user expires within the [password expiration warning period]. The warning is displayed on the login completion screen, for example, but if there is no message to be displayed on the login completion screen, the login completion screen is not displayed and the screen transits to the HOME menu.

  The machine history management center 800AF determines that (a) the number of failed login attempts by a user exceeds the [number of failed user login failures] (permanent account lock state), or (b) ] Has not passed (temporary account lock state), lock account.

  The history management center 800AF updates / sets the account expiration date when (a) a new user is registered or (b) the validity period is updated from the user information screen. The account can be used during the period from the account activation start date to the account activation end date.

The history management center 800AF sets, for example, 20 as the maximum number of accounts that can be generated at one time at the time of initial introduction. Here, [the maximum number of login attempts] is the number of times the account is locked for a certain period of time due to consecutive failed login attempts, and is set to, for example, 5 times at the initial introduction. [User Invalidation Login Failure Count] is the number of times the account is permanently locked due to consecutive login attempt failures, and is 100, for example, at the time of initial introduction. [Login attempt refusal time] is a period in which the account is locked for a certain period of time due to failed login attempts, and is 30 minutes at the time of initial introduction. [Password Validity Period] is a password validity period set when the password is changed, and is 90 days at the time of initial introduction. [Password Expiration Warning Period] is a period in which an account password is about to expire, and is 14 days at the time of initial introduction.

  The machine history management center 800AF sets the minimum number of characters of a password to 8 characters, for example, at the time of initial introduction, and sets the number of generations (including the current) to prevent re-use of passwords to 3 generations at the time of initial introduction. The history management center 800AF is registered on the condition that the operator information of the corresponding user is registered in order to register the user information. The business operator information includes attribute information such as the business type and address of each business operator involved in the work of the history management center 800AF.

  The machine history management center 800AF cannot basically cancel the management state (status) of the gaming machine after input, and if an error occurs due to an erroneous operation or the like, a comment is entered in the “total machine history remarks column”. Make it clear so that others can understand. However, since there is a possibility of erroneous insertion, it is possible to cancel only the status entered from the game machine status update screen. When revocation is possible, control is performed by authority so that only a limited number of people can perform revocation. Further, when searching the machine history in order to change the management state (status) of the gaming machine, the machine history management center 800AF searches only for the latest management state (status) of the gaming machine.

The machine history management center 800AF manages the types of data and the retention periods for each type as follows, for example.
(1) Account-related data (for example, business operator information, account information, etc.): Basically, control is performed only by logical deletion, not physical deletion.
(2) Master information such as gaming machine model (for example, gaming machine model master): Basically, control is performed only by logical deletion, and physical deletion is not performed.
(3) Information that is the basis of machine history management (for example, gaming machine chip shipment information, gaming machine shipment information, etc.): Basically, changes can be made until management is started, but thereafter editing is impossible. , Manage permanently.
(4) Machine history information (for example, history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F): Since it is basically input of fact information, changes after input are not allowed and are managed permanently.
(5) Information notified from the card unit key management center (for example, fraud detection, etc.): Information detected by the system, and is not allowed to be changed and managed permanently.
(6) Input journals to the system (for example, Web input log, online input log, system linkage input file, etc.): 14 days are stored for each type of input and each node.
(7) Output journal from system (for example, Web output log, online output log, system transmission file, etc.): 7 days are kept for each type of output and for each node.
(8) Record of business communication of concentration / distribution (for example, distribution schedule, etc.): Information is retained for about 7 days.
(9) System temporary file (for example, CSV upload file): Deleted after application behavior. However, it is deleted when it is confirmed that the cleaning batch is unnecessary in consideration of abnormal termination.
(10) Model information that has not been updated for a long period of time (for example, model information that has not been updated for a long period of time): Holds two generations.

  In the history management center 800AF, information on the front frame 5F and the game board 26F in which the relationship between the management state (status) before the update and the management state (status) after the update becomes abnormal with respect to the abnormality in the management state (status). Can be extracted, or only the information can be output to a file. Therefore, based on the information output in the file, it is possible to notify the user of management status (status) update omission and to update the management status (status) correctly. It should be noted that a user whose management status (status) is not updated may not only be contacted but also interviewed to confirm the correct management status (status) and take a response. In addition, the machine history management center 800AF performs notification such as contacting all of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that are currently in an abnormal management state (status). In addition, the latest information (at the time of file output) of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F that have become abnormal can be downloaded from a terminal connected to the machine history management center 800AF.

  In the history management center 800AF, the history information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F for which the management status (status) has not been updated for a long period of time becomes a management status (status) other than “discard” or “other”. It is possible to extract only the information of the front frame 5F and the game board 26F, or to output only the information to a file. For abnormalities in which the management state (status) has not been updated for a long time, information at the time of processing is extracted by batch processing and downloaded from a terminal connected to the history management center 800AF. In addition, a threshold for the maximum number of files (at the time of initial construction: 100,000 records) is set for one file to be downloaded, and when the threshold is exceeded, output is performed to another file. Furthermore, when downloading a file, the results of processing on the same day are collected and output as a compressed file.

  (45) In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the removal information is input to the history management center 800AF has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and used movement information, discard information, trade-in information, and the like are stored in the history management center 800AF. When the information is input, the removal information may be automatically registered in the history management center 800AF. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to manage the history of the gaming machine by assuming that it has been removed from the hall, and to reduce the burden of inputting the removal information from the hall to the history management system.

  (46) In the present embodiment, the configuration is shown in which the shipping information is registered in the machine history management center 800AF via the communication line after the gaming machine manufacturer ships the gaming machine to the hall. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A configuration may also be adopted in which shipping information is automatically registered in the machine history management center 800AF when the gaming machine manufacturer inputs information for shipping gaming machines to the hall. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the shipping state history from being forgotten without being registered.

  (47) In the present embodiment, when a gaming machine including the front frame 5F and the gaming board 26F constituting the P board 2F is installed in the hall, the enclosed circulation pachinko machine (P machine 2F) shipped by the gaming machine maker, The history management center 800AF stores the gaming machine installation information (operation information) notified from the P table 2F in association with the security chip ID of the semiconductor chip provided in each, and is notified from the stored information and the P table 2F. Checking with game machine installation information. If the machine history management center 800AF is abnormal as a result of the collation, for example, an error notification is performed by an abnormality notification lamp or a display 312F, or an error has occurred in the hall management computer or the hall server 801F. The error notification signal is transmitted, and the abnormality is notified. However, the machine history management center 800AF is not limited to the configuration for notifying the abnormality as a result of the collation, but the P frame 2F or the front frame 5F constituting the P table 2F and the game board 26F determined to be abnormal. It may be configured to prohibit gaming. The machine history management center 800AF may be configured to temporarily allow a game on the P table 2F for a certain period of time even if it is determined to be abnormal, so as not to hinder the hall business activities.

  It should be thought that embodiment disclosed this time is an illustration and restrictive at no points. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

The specific game state (hit game state) is a big prize after a predetermined time (symbol confirmed stop time + jackpot start effect time) has elapsed after a specific symbol combination (both of the same symbol) is displayed on the variable display device. Although the example in which the mouth is opened and the specific gaming state starts is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the combination of specific symbols (both of the same symbol) is displayed on the variable display device, it is provided in the gaming area. The specific gaming state may be started by passing the ball through a specific area (a specific pass gate sensor or a winning sensor). As a result, the player can control the time of occurrence of the big hit, and even if the possession is lost before the big hit starts, the player can have time to lend the ball and replenish the ball.
Further, a plurality of specific areas may be provided, and the number of big hit rounds may be varied depending on which specific area is passed. Alternatively, a lottery of lottery rounds may be performed by passing through a specific area. Further, in that case, if there are a plurality of specific areas, the lottery ratio of the number of rounds may be varied depending on which specific area is passed.

  1 Pachinko gaming machine, 2 gaming board, 3 gaming machine frame, 4A, 4B special symbol display device, 5 image display device, 6A normal winning ball device, 6B normal variable winning ball device, 7 special variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game Effect Lamp, 11 Main Board, 12 Production Control Board, 13 Audio Control Board, 14 Lamp Control Board, 15 Relay Board, 20 Normal Symbol Display, 21 Gate Switch, 22A, 22B Start Port Switch, 23 Count Switch, 100 Microcomputer for game control, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 103 CPU, 104, 124 Random number circuit, 105, 125 I / O, 120 Production control CPU, 123 Display control unit, 2F Pachinko machine, 2SF slot machine, 3F card unit, 16F main control board, 7F payout control board, 26F game board, 54F, 312F display, 309F card insertion / discharge port, 319F replay button, 320F IR light receiving unit, 321F lending button, 322F card return button, 161F main control unit, 325F display control unit 171F Dispensing control unit, 50F, 50SF 7-segment display, 323F CU control unit, 12F Glass door open detection switch, 13F Front frame open detection switch.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player,
Multiple types of winning areas including the starting area,
Hold storage means for storing hold information related to variable display;
Variable display execution means for executing variable display based on the hold information;
Specific display means for displaying a specific display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means;
Display mode control means for controlling the display mode of the specific display displayed by the specific display means;
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing an suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the specific display changes;
Signal output means for outputting a signal relating to winning of the game medium;
Setting means for setting the degree of advantage of the gaming machine,
The display mode control unit changes the display mode of the specific display displayed by the specific display unit from the current display mode to another display mode,
The display mode of the specific display includes a normal mode, a special mode different from the normal mode, and a special mode different from the normal mode and the special mode.
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a first suggestion effect in which the display mode of the specific display changes after the effect and a second suggestion effect in which the display mode of the specific display does not change after the effect,
The display mode control means includes
The display mode of the specific display can be changed from the normal mode,
The display mode of the specific display is such that the ratio of changing the display mode of the specific display to the special mode is higher when the display mode of the specific display is the special mode than when the display mode of the specific display is the normal mode. To the special mode,
The display mode of the specific display is changed to another display mode so that the rate of change from the current mode to another mode differs depending on the type of display mode of the specific display ,
When the display mode of the specific display is the special mode at the end, the proportion controlled to the advantageous state is lower than when the display mode is the normal mode at the end.
A gaming machine characterized by that.